Pesticide Residue Manual

LAB.
MANUAL 11
MANUAL OF METHODS
OF
ANALYSIS OF FOODS
AF
PESTICIDE RESIDUES
Endosulphan
DDT
FOOD SAFETY AND STANDARDS AUTHORITY OF INDIA

MINISTRY OF HEALTH AND FAMILY WELFARE
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
NEW DELHI
2012
PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012
MANUAL FOR ANALYSIS OF PESTICIDE RESIDUE IN FOODS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE
Codex Guidelines on Good Practice in Pesticide Residue

Analysis
Sample Collection
Reporting Analytical Results
Pesticide Standards
Purification of Solvents and Reagents
Extraction and Clean-Up Methods in Pesticide Residue
Analysis
Multi Residue Method for Determination of Chlorinated
Pesticide
i) DDT
ii) HCH
iii) Endosulphan
iv) Aldrin
v) Dieldrin
vi) Chlordane
vii) Heptachlor
Multi Residue Method for Determination of OrganoPhosphorus Pesticides
i) Acephate
ii) Chlorpyriphos
iii) Chlorpyriphos-methyl
iv) Demeton-O
v) Diazinon
vi) Dimethoate
vii) Ethion
viii) Fenitrothion
ix) Malaoxan
x) Malathion
xi) Mathamidophos
xii) Monocrotophos
xiii) Omethoate
xiv) Paraoxon
xv) Paraoxon-Methyl
xvi) Parathion
AF
2
3
4
5
6
PAGE
NO.
S.No.
11
12
13
14
15
10
AF
xvii) Parathion-Methyl
xviii) Phosalone
xix) Pirimiphos-Methyl
Multiresidue Gas Chromatography Method for Synthetic
Pyrethroids
i) Bifenthrin
ii) Fenopropathrin
iii) Cyhalothrin
iv) Permethrin
v) Cypermethrin
vi) Fluvalinate
vii) Fenvalerate
viii) Deltamethrin
Multiresidue Method of N-Methylcarbamate Insecticides
i) Carbaryl
ii) Carbofuron
Multiple Residue Method for Fumigants
i) Ethylene Dibromide
ii) Carbon Tetrachloride
iii) Methyl Bromide
iv) Phosphine
Thiamethoxam
Thiodicarb/Methomyl
Cymoxanil
Multiresidue Gas Chromatographic Method for Determination
of Organochlorine and Pyrethroid pesticides in Milk, Fish and
Eggs
i) DDT
ii) HCH
iii) Endosulphan
iv) Aldrin
v) Dieldrin
vi) Chlordane
vii) Heptachlor
viii) Dicofol
ix) Cyhlalothrin
x) Permethrin
xi) Cypermethrin
xii) Fenvalerate
xiii) Deltamethrin
Acetamiprid
Imidacloprid
16
17
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
23
24
25
26
27
Pretilachlor
Isoprothiolane
Fosetyl
Propiconazole
Dithiocarbamates
(i) Ferbam
(ii) Ziram
(iii) Thiram
(iv) Maneb
(v)Zineb
(vi)Mancozab
(vii) Nabam
Ethylene Thiourea and Ethylene Urea
Tricyclazole
Triadimefon and Triadimenol
Metalaxyl
Triazole Fungicides
i) Hexaconazole
ii) Propiconazole
iii) Penconazole
iv) Myclobutanil
v) Triademifon
vi) Bitertanol
Chlorsulfuron and Metasulfuron
Anilophos
Diclofop-Methyl
Glufosinate
Linuron
Diquat and Paraquat
Atrazine and Simazine
Metribuzin
2, 4-D
Pendimethalin Analytical Methods of Pesticide Residues in
Water
Organochlorine Pesticides in Water by Gas Chromatographic
Method
i) Aldrin
ii) - BHC
iii) - BHC
iv) - BHC
v) - BHC
vi) - chlordane
AF
18
19
20
21
22
38
40
41
AF
39
vii) - chlordane
viii) 4,4'- ODD
ix) 4,4'- DDE
x) 4,4'- DDT
xi) Dieldrin
xii) Endosulfan I
xiii) Endosulfan II
xiv) Endosulfan Sulphate
xv) Heptachlor
xvi) Heptachlor Expoxide
N-Methylcarbamoylomimes and N-Methlycarbamates in
Finished Drinking Water
i) Aldicrab
ii) Aldicarb Sulfone
iii) Aldicarb Sulfoxide
iv) Baygon
v) Carbaryl
vi) Carboftiron
vii) 3-hydroxycarboruron
viii) Methiocarb
ix) Methomyl
x) Oxamyl
Determinatin of Alachlor, Atrazine and Butachlor in Water
Determination of 2,4-D in Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid
Microextraction, Derivatization, and Fast Gas Chromatography
With Electron Capture Detection
Determination of Isoproturon in Water by Solid-Phase
Extraction and Liquid Chromatography
Nitrogen and Phosphorus Containing Pesticides in Finished
Drinking Water
(i) Dichlorvos
(ii) Phorate
(iii) Chlorpyrifos. Methyl
(iv) Chlopyrifos
(v) Monocrotophos
(vi) Dimethoate
(vii) Malathion
(viii) Parathion, Methyl
(ix) Parathion, Ethyl
(x) Ethion
(xi) Phosphamidon
(xii) Atrazine
42
43
AF
44
(xiii) Simazine
Laboratory Safety
CODEX GUIDELINES ON GOOD PRACTICE IN

PESTICIDE RESIDUE ANALYSIS
Introduction
The Codex document ALINORM 76/24 Appendix IV (Report of the ad hoc

Working Group on Methods of Analysis) contained the following statement:
"It was considered that the ultimate goal in fair practice in international trade
depended, among other things, on the reliability of analytical results. This in turn,
particularly in pesticide residue analysis, depended not only on the availability of
AF
reliable analytical methods, but also on the experience of the analyst and on the
maintenance of good practice in the analysis of pesticides.
These guidelines define such good analytical practice and may be considered in
three inter-related parts:
The Analyst
Basic Resources
The Analysis
The Analyst
Residue analysis consists of a chain of procedures, most of which are known, or

readily understood, by a trained chemist, but because the analyst concentrations
are in the range g/kg to mg/kg and because the analysis can be challenging,
attention to detail is essential. The analyst in charge should have an appropriate
professional qualification and be experienced and competent in residue analysis.
Staff must be fully trained and experienced in the correct use of apparatus and in
appropriate laboratory skills. The analyst can use the method within the expected
performance parameters established during method validation prior to analysis of
samples. They must have an understanding of the principles of pesticide residue
analysis and the requirements of Analytical Quality Assurance (AQA) systems.
They must understand the purpose of each stage in the method, the importance of
following the methods exactly as described and of nothing any unavoidable
deviations. They must also be trained in the evaluation and interpretation of the
data they produce. A record of training and experience must be kept for all
laboratory staff.
When a laboratory for residue analysis is set up, the staff should spend some of
AF
their training period in a well established laboratory where experienced advice and
training is available. If the laboratory is to be involved in the analysis for a wide
range of pesticide residues, it may be necessary for the staff to gain experience in
more than one expert laboratory.
Basic Resources
The laboratory
The laboratory and its facilities must be designed to allow tasks to be allocated to
well-defined areas where maximum safety and minimum chance of contamination
of samples prevail. Laboratories should be constructed of, and utilise materials
resistant to chemicals likely to be used within them. Under ideal conditions,
separate rooms would be designated for sample receipt and storage, for sample
preparation, for extraction and clean-up and for instrumentation used in the
determinative step. The area used for extraction and clean-up must meet solvent
laboratory specifications and all fume extraction facilities must be of high quality.
Simple receipt, storage and preparation should be handled in areas devoted to
work at residue levels. Maintenance of sample integrity and adequate provisions

for personal safety for priority requirements.
Laboratory safety must also be considered in terms of what is essential and what is
preferable, as it must be recognised that the stringent working conditions enforced
in residue laboratories in some parts of the world could be totally unrealistic in
others. No smoking, eating, drinking or application of cosmetics should be
permitted in the working area. Only small volumes of solvents should be held in
the working area and the bulk of the solvents stored separately, away from the
main working area. The use of highly toxic solvents and reagents should be
minimised whenever possible. All waste solvent should be stored safely and
AF
disposed of both safely and in an environmentally friendly manner taking into

account specific national regulations where available.
The main working area should be designed and equipped for utilisation of an
appropriate range of analytical solvents. All equipment such as macerators and
refrigerators should be spark free or explosion proof. Extraction, clean-up and

concentration steps should be carried out in a well ventilated area, preferably in
fume cupboards.
Safety screens should be used when glassware is used under vacuum or pressure.
There should be an ample supply of safety glasses, gloves and other protective
clothing, emergency washing facilities and a spillage treatment kit. Adequate fire
fighting equipment must be available. Staff must be aware that many pesticides
have acutely or chronically toxic properties and therefore, great care is necessary
in the handling of standard reference compounds.
Equipment and Supplies
The laboratory will require adequate, reliable, supplies of electricity and water.
Adequate supplies of reagents, solvents, gas, glassware, chromatographic
materials etc. of suitable quality are essential.
Chromatographic equipment, balances, spectrophotometers etc. must be serviced

and calibrated regularly and a record of all servicing/repairs must be maintained
for every such item of equipment. Calibration is essential for equipment including
glassware performing measurements. Calibration curves and comparison with
standards may suffice. Regular calbration and re-calibration of measuring
AF
equipment must be done where the possible change in nominal value may
significantly contribute to the uncertainty of the measurement. Balances and
automated pipettes/dispensers and similar equipment must be calibrated regularly.
The operating temperatures of refrigerators and freezers should be continually
monitored or be checked at specified intervals. All records should be kept up-to-
date and retained.
All laboratories require pesticide reference standards of known and acceptably

high purity. Analytical standards should be available for all parent compounds for
which the laboratory is monitoring samples, as well as those metabolites that are
included in MRLs.
All analytical standards, stock solutions and reagents whose integrity could be
influenced by degradative processes must be clearly labelled with an expiry date
and stored under proper conditions. Pure reference standards must be kept under
conditions that will minimise the rate of degradation, e.g. low temperature,
exclusion of moisture, darkness. Equal care must be taken that standard solutions
of pesticides are not decomposed by the effect of light or heat during storage or
become concentrated owing to solvent evaporation.
The Analysis
Avoidance of contamination
One of the significant areas in which pesticide residue analysis differs
significantly from macro-analysis is that of contamination and interference. Trace
amounts of contamination in the final samples used for the determination stage of
the method can give rise to errors such as false positive or false negative results or
to a loss of sensitivity that may prevent the residue from being detected.
Contamination may arise from almost anything that is used, for or is associated
AF
with, sampling, sample transport and storage, and the analysis. All glassware,
reagents, organic solvents and water should be checked for possible interfering
contaminations before use, by analysis of a reagentblank.
Polishes, barrier creams, soaps containing germicides, insect sprays, perfumes and
cosmetics can given rise to interference problems and are especially significant
when an electron-capture detector is being used. There is no real solution to the
problem other than to ban their use by staff while in the laboratory.
Lubricants, sealants, plastics, natural and synthetic rubbers, protective gloves, oil
from ordinary compressed air lines and manufacturing impurities in thimbles,
filter papers and cotton-wool can also give rise to contamination.
Chemical reagents, adsorbents and general laboratory solvents may contain,

adsorb or absorb compounds that interfere in the analysis. It may be necessary to
purify reagents and adsorbents and it is generally necessary to use re-distilled
solvents. Deionised water is often suspect; re-distilled water is preferable,
although in many instances tap water or well water may be satisfactory.
10
Contamination of glassware, syringes and gas chromatographic columns can arise

from contact with previous samples or extracts. All glassware should be cleaned
with detergent solution, rinsed thoroughly with distilled (or other clean) water and
then rinsed with the solvent to be used. Glassware to be used for trace analysis
must be kept separate and must not be used for any other purpose.
Pesticide reference standards should always be stored at a suitable temperature in
a room separate from the main residue laboratory. Concentrated analytical

standard solutions and extracts should not be kept in the same storage area.
Apparatus containing polyvinylchloride (PVC) should be regarded as suspect and,
AF
if shown to be a source ofcontamination, should not be allowed in the residue

laboratory. Other materials containing plasticisers should also be regarded as
suspect but PTFE and silicone rubbers are usually acceptable and others may be
acceptable in certain circumstances. Sample storage containers can cause
contamination and glass bottles with ground glass stoppers may be required.
Analytical instrumentation ideally should be housed in a separate room. The

nature and importance of contamination can vary according to the type of
determination technique used and the level of pesticide residue to be determined.
Residues and formulation analyses must have completely separated laboratory

facilities provided. Samples and sample preparation must be kept separate from
the all residue laboratory operations in order to preclude cross contamination
Reception and storage of samples
Every sample received into the laboratory should be accompanied by complete

information on the source of the sample, on the analysis required and on potential
hazards associated with the handling of that sample.
11
On receipt of a sample it must immediately be assigned a unique sample

identification code which should accompany it through all stages of the analysis to
the reporting of the results. If possible, the samples should be subjected to an
appropriate disposal review system and records should be kept.
Sample processing and sub-sampling should be carried out using procedures that
have been demonstrated to provide a representative analytical portion and to have
no effect on the concentration of residues present.
If samples cannot be analysed immediately but are to be analysed quickly, they
AF
should be stored at (1-5C) away from direct sunlight, and analysed within a few
days. However, samples received deep-frozen must be kept at < -16C until
analysis. In some instances, samples may require storage for a longer period
before analysis. In this case, storage temperature should be approximately -20C,
at which temperature enzymic degradation of pesticide residues is usually
extremely slow. If prolonged storage is unavoidable, the effects of storage should

be checked by analysing fortified samples stored under the same conditions for a
similar period.
When samples are to be frozen it is recommended that analytical test portions be

taken prior to freezing in order to minimise the possible effect of water separation
as ice crystals during storage. Care must still be taken to ensure that the entire test
portion is used in the analysis.
The containers must not leak. Neither the containers used for storage nor their
caps or stoppers should allow migration of the analyte(s) into the storage
compartment.
12
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
SOPs should be used for all operations. The SOPs should contain full working
instructions as well as information or applicability, expected performance, internal
quality control (performance verification) requirements and calculation of results.
It should also contain information on any hazards arising from the method, from
authorised by the analyst in charge.
AF
Validation of methods
standards or from reagents. Any deviations from a SOP must be recorded and
Guidelines have been published for validation of analytical procedures for various
purposes. The principles described in this section are considered practical and
suitable for validation of pesticide residue analytical methods. The guidance is not
normative. The analyst should decide on the degree of validation require ed to
demonstrate that the method is fit for the intended purpose, and should produce
the necessary validation data accordingly. For instance, the requirements for
testing for compliance with MRLs or providing data for intake estimation may be
quite different.
An analytical method is the series of procedures from receipt of a sample to the

production of the final result. Validation is the process of verifying that a method
is fit for the intended purpose. The method may be developed in-house, taken
from the literature or otherwise obtained from a third party. The method may then
be adapted or modified to match the requirements and capabilities of the
laboratory and/or the purpose for which the method will be used. Typically,
validation follows completion of the development of a method and it is assumed
that requirements such as calibration, system suitability, analyte stability, etc. have
13
been established satisfactorily. When validating and using a method of analysis,

measurements must be made within the calibrated range of the detection system
used. In general, validation will precede practical application of the method to the
analysis of samples but subsequent performance verifications an important
continuing aspect of the process. Requirements for performance verification data
are a sub-set of those required for method validation.
Proficiency testing (or other inter-laboratory testing procedures), where
practicable, provides an important means for verifying the general accuracy of

results generated by a method, and provides information on the between
laboratory variability of the results. However, proficiency testing generally does
AF
not address analyte stability or homogeneity and extractability of analyst in the

processed sample.
Where uncertainty data are required, this information should incorporate
performance verification data and not rely solely on method validation data.
Whenever, a laboratory undertakes method development and/or method

modification, the effect of analytical variables should be established, e.g. by using
ruggedness tests, prior to validation. Rigorous controls must be exercised with
respect to all aspects of the method that may influence the results, such as : sample
size; partition volumes, variations in the performance of the clean-up systems
used; the stability of reagents or of the derivatives prepared; the effects of light,
temperature, solvent and storage on analytes in extracts; the effects of solvent,
injector, separation column, mobile phase characteristics (composition and flowrate), temperature, detection system, co- extractives etc. on the determination
system. It is most important that the qualitative and quantitative relationship
between the signal measured and the analyte sought are established unequivocally.
14
Preference should be given to methods having multi-residue and or multi-matrix

applicability. The use of representative analytes or matrices is important in
validating methods. For this purpose, commodities should be differentiated
sufficiently but not unnecessarily. For example, some product are available in a
wide range of minor manufactured variants, or cultivated varieties, or breeds, etc.
Generally, though not invariably, a single variant of a particular commodity
maybe considered to represent others of the same commodity but, for example, a
single fruit or vegetable species must not be taken to represent all fruit or
vegetables . Each case must be considered on its merits but where particular
variants within a commodity are known to differ from others in their effects
AF
on method performance, analyses of those variants are required. Considerable

differences in the accuracy and precision of methods, especially with respect to
the determination step, may occur from species to species.
Confirmatory Tests
When analyses are performed for monitoring or enforcement purposes, it is

especially important that confirmatory data are generated before reporting on
samples containing residues of pesticides that are not normally associated with
that commodity, or where MRLs appear to have been exceeded. Samples may
contain interfering chemicals that may be misidentified as pesticides. Examples in
gas chromatography include the responses of electron-capture detectors to
phthalate esters and of phoshorus-selective detectors to compounds containing
sulphur and nitrogen. As a first step, the analysis should be repeated using the
same method, if only one portion was analyzed initially. This will provide
evidence of the repeatability of the result, if the residue is conformed. It should be
noted that the only evidence supporting the absence of detectable residues is
provided by the performance verification data.
15
Confirmatory tests may be quantitative and/or qualitative but, in most cases, both
types of information will be required. Particular problems occur when residues
must be confirmed at or about the limit of determination but, although it is
difficult to quantify at this level, it is essential to provide adequate confirmation of
both level and identity.
The need for confirmatory tests may depend upon the type of sample or its known
history. In some crops or commodities, certain residues are frequently found. For
a series of samples of similar origin, which contain residues of the same

pesticides, it may be sufficient to confirm the identity of residues in a small
proportion of the samples selected randomly. Similarly, when it is known that a
AF
particular pesticide has been applied to the sample material there may be little
need for conformation of identity, although a randomly selected results should be
conformed. Where blank samples are available, these should be used to check the
occurrence of possible interfering substances.
Depending upon the initial technique of determination, an alternative procedure

which may be a different detection technique, may be necessary for verification of
quantity. For qualitative conformation (identity) the use of mass-spectral data, or a
combination of techniques based on different physico-chemical properties is
desirable.
The concept of lowest Calibrated level (LCL)
When the objective of the analysis is to monitor and verify the compliance with
Maximum Residue Limits (MRLs), the residue methods must be sufficiently
sensitive to reliably determine the residues likely to be a present in a crop or an
environmental sample at or around the MRL or AL However, for this purpose it is
not necessary to use methods with sufficient sensitivity to determine residues at
16
levels two or more orders of magnitude lower. Methods developed to measure

residues at very low levels usually become very expensive and difficult to apply.
The use of LCL would have the advantage of reducing the technical difficulty of
obtaining the data and would also reduce costs. The following proposals for LCLs
in various samples may be useful in enabling the residue chemist to devise
suitable methods.
Residues with agreed MRLs, the LCL can be specified as a fraction of the MRL.
LCL (mg/kg)
AF
MRL (mg/kg)
Foranalytical convenience this fraction will vary and could be as follows:
0.5
0.5 upto 5
0.1 increasing to 0.5 for higher

MRLs
0.05 upto 0.5
0.02 increasing to 0.1 for MRL
5 or greater
When the MRL is set at the limit of determination of the analytical method, the
LCL will also be at this level.
Expression of results
For regulatory purposes, only confirmed data should be reported, expressed as

defined by the MRL. Null values should be reported as being less than lowest
calibrated level, rather than less than a level calculated by extrapolation. Generally
results are not corrected for recovery, and they may only be corrected if the
recovery is significantly different from 100%. If results are reported corrected for
recovery, then both measured and corrected values should be given. The basis for
17
correction should also be reported. Where positive results obtained by replicate

determinations (e.g. on different GC columns, with different detectors or based on
different ions of mass spectra) of a single test portion (sub-sample), the lowest
valued value obtained should be reported. Where positive results derive from
analysis of multiple test portions, the arithmetic mean of the lowest valid values
obtained from each test portion should be reported. Taking into account, in
general, a 20-30% relative precision, the results should be expressed only with 2
significant figures (e.g. 0.11, 1.1, 11 and 1.1 x 102). Since at lower concentrations
the precision may be in the range of 50%, the residue values below 0.1 should be
References
AF
expressed with one significant figure only.
Joint FAO/WHO Food Standard Programme. Codex Alimentarius Commission.

Report of the thirty fifth session of the Codex Committee on Pesticide Residues ,
Rotterdom, The Netherlands. 31st March - 5th April 2003. pp. 46-55.
18
SAMPLE COLLECTION
The present chapter is designed to deal only with the collection of samples for
pesticide analysis. To provide a background of problem areas associated with
pesticides the following information is repeated from the FAO Food Inspection
manual.
Collect a total sample approximating 10 kg by sampling a minimum of 10/ 1 kg

subs selected at random from the lot. Small retail units may necessitate the
AF
collection of several units to total 1 kg per subdivision.
For large individual items (1 kg or more) such as fish, melons, cabbage heads,
cauliflower, pineapple etc. collect a total composite of 10 subs taking only one
unit from each of 10 different shipping containers or locations in the lot.
Collect a total composite sample of 10 kg by collecting 1 kg portions from each of

10 different bulk containers in the lot. The minimum amount of material to be
submitted to the laboratory, is as follows
EXAMPLES
COMMODITY
Small or light products,

unit barries weight upto
about 25 g
Medium sized products
unit
weight
usually
between
Large sized products unit
weight over 250 g
Peas, olives parsley
Dairy
products
products
Whole milk,
buffer, cream
dairy
MINIMUM
QUANTITY
REQUIRED
1 kg
apples, oranges, carrots

potatoes
1 kg
(at least 10 units)
cabbage,
cucumber
melons,
2 kg
(at least 5 units)
cheese
0.5 kg
19
Egg (10 unit if whole)

meat
Oils and fats
Cereals
products
Spices
and
poultry, fat, fish and

other fish and animal
products
cottonseed
oil
margarine
cereal
0.5 kg
0.5kg 1 kg
Chilies,
coriander
cumin,
0.25kg
Packaging and Transmission of laboratory samples
The laboratory sample must be placed in a clean inert container offering adequate
protection from external contamination and protection against damage to the
AF
sample in transit. The container must then be sealed in such a manner that
unauthorized opening is detectable, and sent to the laboratory as soon as possible
taking any necessary precautions against leakage or spoilage, e.g. frozen foods,
should be kept frozen, perishable samples should be kept cooled or frozen. Fruits
/vegetables/perishable commodities are advised to ship in dry ice while
transporting from field to lab.
Sub-sampling
The way in which a sample is taken for analysis is the first of a series of potential
sources of error in food analysis. Some liquid foods are reasonably homogeneous,
but solid and semi-solid foods are most always heterogeneous. It must be assumed
that the attribute for which the food is being examined is unevenly distributed
throughout the sample. Liquids are advised to bring back to room temperature
before sub sampling.
The taking of a representative sample is obviously the most difficult task. A liquid
food (e.g. milk) generally need only be well mixed or shaken before subsampling.
20
Semi-solid foods are those containing a solid material plus a large portion of free
liquid. Examples include many canned foods. In the event that the solid or the
liquid are to be analyzed individually, they are separated using a sieve or filter and
individually mixed for subsampling. When both solid and liquid phases are to be
analysed as a unit, it is often advisable to blend or otherwise homogenize the two
before sub sampling.
Solid samples can be of three general types, namely finely divided (e.g. whole
cereal grains or flour), an aggregate (e.g. solid mixtures such as sausage), or a

whole unit (e.g. an entire fruit). Finely divided dry products can be mixed for
subsampling using commercial portioning equipment such as a Jones Divider, or
AF
by spreading the sample over a large surface, quartering with a straight-edge and
mixing opposite quarters. The two mixed halves can be recombined and the
process repeated one or more times to make the subsample portion even more
representative. An aggregate solid sample is probably the most difficult as it
consists of different food materials usually with different physical properties. The
challenge is to take a subsample having a composition representing an average of

the food sampled. This most often requires that the aggregate food be chopped or
ground before mixing and subsampling. The whole unit sample can be most easily
subsampled by taking a representative portion of the food. This could be a quarter
of a fruit, a piece of loin from a whole fish or other similar sectioning.
In summary, a selective subsample consists only of suspect portions and ignores

the remainder of the sample. A representative subsample, however, must as best
possible represent an average of the whole sample.
General Guidelines
21
A sample must be statistically representative of the population from which it is

taken. Transportation and storage must be adequate to keep residues in their
original condition in order to justify the expertise and expense involved in a
pesticide residue analysis.
Composting
A composite is defined as an admixture of two or more portions of a substance. A

composite is formed by first subsampling two or more portions of the same food.
An example would be subsampling several individual cans from the same food
AF
lot. These subsamples are then combined and mixed so that a portion taken of the
composite would be representative of the whole. A composite is simply a physical
attempt to average the normal variation between individual sample units or
portions, it is most useful when the analytical result must be compared to a
standard or requirement involving the entire food product.
As the composite is to be representative, the subsamples of the individual sample

units must not only be taken correctly, but must all be approximately the same
size, weight or volume. Given correct subsampling, the only remaining problem is
to make the composite reasonably uniform and representative. This may involve
chopping and grinding as well as physical mixing.
Chopping, Grinding, Mixing
The well equipped food analysis laboratory should have a variety of sample
preparation equipment including mechanical choppers, mincers, grinders, blenders
and a hammer or similar mill. Use of dry ice is recommended in case of volatile
and unstable molecules during extraction.
22
The type of mechanical processing equipment selected will depend on the food
product to be treated. The analyst must also keep in mind that mechanical
grinders, mills, etc. usually generate heat during the processing. This can possibly
change the sample composition, such as for fatty foods where the heat may be
sufficient to partially melt the fat. In such cases, hand chopping and mixing may
be the best procedure. In other instances, the sample may have to be frozen before
grinding. The analyst must judge the best method for himself, depending on the
kind of food and the substance for which it is to be analysed.
The moisture content of a food also plays an important role in determining the
food processing procedure or equipment to use. Dry foods can generally be
AF
milled, while moist foods can be chopped, minced or ground. Very moist and
liquid foods can be blended. The home food processors now available are very
useful for many products.
If no mechanical processing equipment is available, then of course hand
processing must be done. The tools used include knives, granters and choppers.
When a sample is processed by hand, it must be sufficiently finely divided to
permit proper mixing and later sub-sampling of the mixture. The analyst must
always keep in mind that proper sample preparation is not only to gain a
representative portion for analysis, but is also to prevent change in the sample
which may result in a biased analytical result.
Homogenization of sample composite
Ideally, the entire sample should be homogenized using equipment such as a

Hobart food cutter. Before being placed in the chopper, samples may need to be
either halved or quartered (e.g. apples, peaches) or cut into small (5-10 cm) pieces
(e.g. cantaloupe, carrots, squash). After homogenization, remove a portion for
23
analysis.
If equipment such as a Hobart food cutter is not available, the sample may be
homogenized in an appropriate blender. In this case, prepare a composite sample
consisting of approximately equal parts (weight or number) from each unit.
Special attention must be paid to the method of cutting sections of fruit and
vegetables.
Pesticides may tend to collect in the stem area of fruits and on the top of
vegetables. Vertical sections must therefore, be cut through the stem and centre of
fruits and the top and center of vegetables. Finely cube the composite sample and
AF
reduce by mixing and quartering to ca 300 g. Homogenize the 300 g in an

appropriate blender.
If the homogenized sample is not immediately analysed, store it in a clean

container with a tight closure and freeze. Samples should be refrigerated, if they
are expected to be analysed within four days. Aqueous or semi-aqueous samples

should be kept at < -10C or below, before analysis.
Freezing is often the only way to prevent a change in a food before analysis or for
reserve storage. Some foods, like whole fish, may need to be frozen before
grinding.
The single most important problem in handling frozen food samples is proper
thawing before analysis. Thawing must take place in such a manner that the
composition of the food remains unchanged. Thawing should be done slowly
without heat. Any separated liquid must be mixed back in thawed product before
composite preparation.
Sample storage
24
Normally the whole sample is stored depending analysis at <-100C. In certain

cases where unusually large samples are submitted or where storage space is at a
premium, a suitable sub-sample may be taken. The sub-sample must be
homogeneous and truly representative of the original sample. Its size will be
determined by the analyses required and the methods of analysis employed.
Homogeneization will increase the rate of enzymatic hydrolysis so frozen
homogenized samples should be analysed within two weeks. In the case of fruits
and vegetables for human consumption only the edible portion is analyzed. Soil
will be removed from root vegetables, by gentle brushing under a stream of water.
Outer leaves of cabbage, cauliflower, etc. will be removed. Various commodities
AF
are stored as follows :
Butter, cheese, eggs and ice cream - freeze the whole sample
(b)
Dry feeds - store at room temperature in airtight container
(c)
Feeds for fumigant analysis - seal in plastic bags and freeze
(d)
Fruits and vegetables freeze or refrigerate the whole sample
(e)
Animal fats - freeze the whole sample
(a)
Reserve storage
The reserve portion of a food sample must be maintained in storage so that there is
very little or no change from the original analysis. Ideally, the reserve portion
analysed at a future time will give a result equivalent to the original. It should
consist of an adequate portion for reanalysis and a second party's analytical
challenge. The recommended storage is < -10C.
25
Records
Each laboratory sample must be correctly identified and should be accompanied

by a note giving the nature and origin of the sample and the date and place of
sampling, together with any additional information likely to be of assistance to the
analyst.
References
Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations. Manuals of Food
AF
Quality Control, introduction to food sampling, food and nutrition. Paper 1419
Section 11, Rome (1988).
Sample pre-processing technique:
Temperature + 2 to - 20C should be maintained during sampling depending upon
the commodity/compound of interest.
26
REPORTING ANALYTICAL RESULTS
It is extremely important in pesticide residue studies that analytical results be

reported in a consistent and unambiguous manner. Often, national or international
organisations that summarize the analytical results and calculate dietary intakes,
must evaluate and interpret data obtained from different laboratories, each
reporting results in a different format. To facilitate these evaluations, laboratories
should report enough details about the detection and quantitation limits of the
analytical method to enable correct interpretations of the data to be made.

Laboratories should ensure consistent detection and quantitation limits throughout
a study. Results of recovery tests for the different contaminants should also be
AF
reported. However, analytical findings should be reported as measured, without

the use of correction factors that take recovery into account.
Detection and quantitation limits of the analytical method
The analytical methods used in the analysis of food samples must be as sensitive
as possible. The sensitivity of the overall analytical procedure is usually defined in
terms of Limit of Detection (LOD) and Limit of Quantitation (LOQ) or
determination.
Limit of detection
The Limit of Detection (LOD) as it applies to food contaminants may be defined

as the minimum concentration of contaminant in a food sample that can just be
qualitatively detected, but not quantitatively determined, under a pre-established
set of analysis conditions. This is necessarily a very broad definition, since it
encompasses all classes of contaminants and all detection techniques. LOD
defines the minimum amount of contaminant in a food sample below which no
27
finite value can be reported, e.g. not detected at limit of detection of 1 g/kg.
In many instances particularly for the determination of pesticides, it is appropriate
to place a special restriction on the term detected. Because of the possibility that a
small detectable signal at a particular GLC retention time could result from
interference, it is desirable to specify that the identity of a detection be confirmed
before it is reported. A detection whose identify cannot be confirmed would not be
Limit of Quantitation
reported as a positive finding.
The Limit of Quantitation (LOQ) is the minimum concentration of a contaminant
AF
in a food sample that can be determined quantitatively with an acceptable

accuracy and consistency.
The Codex Committee on Pesticide Residues employs the term limit of

determination which is defined as the lowest practical concentration of a pesticide
residue on contaminant that can be quantitatively measured and identified in the

specified food commodity or animal feed stuff with an acceptable degree of
certainty by current regulatory methods of analysis.
Lower Limit of Detection (LLD)
The smallest amount of sample activity which will yield a net count for which
there is confidence at a predetermined level that activity is present.
Reporting results
Report the exact portion of food taken for analysis and report results in parts per
million (ppm).
Raw Agricultural Commodities: Report the results as ppm on portion examined,
28
except report raw milk on fat basis.
Processed foods: Report the results as ppm on portion examined, except for dairy
products and concentrates.
Dairy products: Report results as ppm on a fat basis, except report residues in low
cottage cheese) on a whole as is basis.
fat dairy products (e.g. skim milk, buttermilk, nonfat dried milk, uncreamed
Concentrated and Dehydrated Products: Report results as ppm on as is basis.
AF
Where significant residues are encountered on concentrates which must be

reconstituted to the whole product basis before consumption, it is useful to
calculate to the whole basis and record both results.
Analytical limits of quantitation and detection
When a method is used in a specified way, the lowest concentration in the sample
of a residue producing a response of sufficient magnitude for reliable
measurement is referred to as the limit of quantitation. Residues causing
recognizable GLC peaks (or other type detector response) below the limit of
quantitation may still be within the limit of detection though not within the limit
of quantitation. These findings are reported as Trace. Below that level, residues
whose peaks cannot be distinguished from the baseline with confidence are
considered not detected.
Analytical limits are defined for each chemical recovered by a given multiresidue
method according to the following considerations:
29
1. Response of the determinative step (GLC detector) to the chemical when

the detector has been adjusted to a pre-determined response (sensitivity) to
a particular compound. For example, the Food and Drug Administration
laboratories ave GLC detectors adjusted to produce 50% full scale recorder
deflection (FSD) for 1 ng heptachlor epoxide (EC detector) or 2 ng
parathion (TCD and FPD, phosphorus mode).
2. Weights of sample equivalent routinely injected into the GLC determinative
step. In FDA programmes, aliquots of extract equivalent to 20-30 mg of

nonfatty food (or fatty food calculated on the whole basis) and 3 mg fat are
AF
injected for routine analysis.
3. Minimum measurable peak of 10% FSD.
Based on the above considerations, approximate limits of quantitation for residue
recovered are:
Fat basis
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
Heptachlor epoxide
Parathion
Whole basis
0.01 ppm
0.02 ppm
Limits of quantitation for other chemicals determined by these same methods are
in the same relation to the above values as their particular GLC detector reasons
are to heptachlor epoxide or parathion.
Modern GLC detectors do not always operate best at the operating conditions
which have been recommended for many years. It is still very important, however,
that programmes retain consistent limits of quantitation in examining for and
reporting residues. Thus, the weight of sample equivalent injected must be
adjusted to provide the same limits of quantitation as have been in effect in the
past. For example, modern Ni63 EC detectors often are most linear and stable at
30
conditions which produce 50% FSD for 0.1 ng heptachlor epoxide (10% of the
amount formerly required). IN this case, to maintain a limit of quantitation
consistent with that used in the past, the weight of equivalent sample injected must
be only 10% of that formerly used i.e. 2-3 mg whole food or 0.3 mg fat.
Similarly, other limits of quantitation directed in specific programmes can be met

by appropriate balancing of the weight of equivalent sample injected and
sensitivity of the detector.
Other factors affecting analytical limits
AF
Beyond the specifications defining limits of quantitation, certain other factors can
affect the levels at which residues can be detected or quantitated. In particular
1. Nature of the product and amount of nature of co-extractives. For example,

fats and concentrated and dehydrated products often present problems of
sample size and cleanup and thus usually can be examined only at a higher
level of quantitation than other products.
2. Background signal resulting from detector response to sample coextractives
and/or from normal operation of the instrument imposes a requirement for

the residue peaks to be larger than otherwise necessary in order that they
can be distinguished from the background and accurately measured.
3. Metabolized, weathered or degraded residues. Quantitation of residues

which differ from the parent chemical is often complicated, especially when
the parent and/or terminal residue is a mixture of chemicals. The accuracy
and precision of such quantitation is higher than would be expected based on
the detector sensitivity to the particular residue.
31
Each of these factors may reduce the certainty of quantitation and/or identification
of a residue and thereby raise the level at which the residue can be quantitated
and/or reported with confidence. In some instances a limiting factor can be
overcome (e.g. additional cleanup can be used to remove coextractives, or an
interfering residue can be separated or degraded) so that the expected limit of
quantitation can be reached.
General rules
Within the qualifications already discussed, the following guidelines is applied to
AF
routine residue analysis :
Calculate finite values for all residues to the limit of quantitation of the finding
was not confirmed. Report calculated values to the limit of quantitation or to the
particular residue by that method. Such levels should be conformable, even if the
particular level specified by the programme.
Reporting not detected
The term not detected should be used to indicate that food sample(s) was analysed
or a particular contaminant or class of contaminants, e.g. organochlorine

pesticides, and analytical response was observed. A not detected reporting should
be accompanied by a limit of detection for the analytical method used, and a short
summary of which compounds or types of compounds were amenable to the
method. For example, if a leafy-vegetable composite were analysed using a method
capable of recovering several organchlorine pesticides, the report might state
organochlorine pesticides; not detected at detection limit of 1 g/kg or heptachlor,
25 g/kg; other organochlorine residues, not detected at detection limit of 1 g/kg.
Values of zero should be avoided, or at least qualified by defining the limit of
detection.
32
Reporting Trace values
Occasionally, although not a good practice, laboratories will use the term trace to
report the detection of a contaminant. This usually refers to an analytical response
that is just above the limit of detection but below the limit of quantitation i.e. the
compound is detectable (with confirmed identity), but cannot be quantified
(detection limit < trace < quantitation limit).
Laboratories should report such low-level detections, but also should clearly state
the meaning of trace, and the analytical uncertainties associated with it.
AF
Rounding of numbers
To report correct significant digits we must round off numbers. To obtain this
approximate number you must do off certain of the lower digits in the number, the
process known as rounding off. An error is of course introduced in rounding off,
and it is desirable to make this error be as small as possible. By using the proper
method of rounding, it is always possible to make the absolute error no greater than
half a unit in the last place retained. This is done by increasing by one the last digit
kept if the discarded part is greater than half a unit in that digit position. If the
discarded part is exactly one-half a unit the last place kept, it is best to increase the
last kept digit by one sometimes, and not other times, so that if several round offs
are made during the problem, all will not introduce errors in the same direction. A
simple way to do this is always to round the last kept digit to an even number when
the discarded part is exactly half unit in the last kept place. E.g. 2.324, 2.316 and
2.315 would take the form 2.32 if rounded off to two places.
References
U.S. Food and Drug Administration, Pesticide Analytical Manual, Vol. I, Section
143 (1977).
33
PESTICIDE STANDARDS
Preparation and storage of reference standard solutions
The greatest source of quantitative error in GC analysis is undoubtedly inaccurate

standard solutions. SHERMA, J. 1981.
Storage of primary standards
Proper storage of reference standards in order to maximize preservation of

chemical integrity is an essential part of the analytical process. Studies have
AF
consistently shown that most classes of standards in neat (or essentially pure) form
are generally stable for at least one year if kept tightly sealed, protected from light,
and either refrigerated or frozen. Many of the organochlorine, triazine and
carbamate compounds are included in this group. The organophosphate
compounds tend to be more susceptible to decomposition.
Small sample vessels, containing the net standards, are best stored refrigerated
within a secondary, air-tight container. A cabinet style desiccator loaded with 0.5%
to 1.0% (by volume) of indicating silica gel or similar capacity desiccant will
generally prove quite satisfactory, providing both isolation and a reasonably

moisture-free atmosphere. Laboratories with limited refrigeration space may
conveniently substitute large, wide-mouth, resaleable glass jars loaded with 2 to 4
cm of an appropriate desiccant.
Whenever a vessel is removed from refrigeration, it should be allowed to gradually

rise to room temperature before opening. Vessel closures should remain removed
only as long as is necessary to withdraw samples. After withdrawing aliquots,
primary standard vessels should be returned to cold storage immediately.
34
Solvents
The advantages and disadvantages of the following solvents are outlined below :
toluene, iso-octane (2,2,4-trimethylpentane), ethyl acetate and/or hexane. All
solvents should be pesticide grade and distilled-in glass.
Toluene and iso-octane are suitable solvents for most pesticide standards. Isooctane does not dissolve as many compounds as toluene but is preferred and used
whenever possible because it does not affect Florisil elutions. In addition, isooctane is much more compatible with electron capture detectors.
AF
Iso-octane and hexane are both suitable for standard dilutions. Iso-octane, while
more expensive offers the advantage of a much lower vapour pressure than hexane.
Thus, it is much less likely to evaporate through seals during long-term storage and
during repeated vessel openings.
Ethyl acetate, dichloromethane, other chlorinated solvents are not recommended as

a final dilution solvent for electron capture GLC/ECD analysis but maybe used for
preparation of the concentrated stock solutions of the more polar compounds.
The Pesticide and Industrial Chemicals Repository of the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency in Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, U.S.A. has been a
source of standard reference materials for government laboratories throughout the
world. This situation has changed and agencies other than the United States
Government facilities are now not eligible to receive this service. Concern for
funding this service is being persued by the Office of International Activities of the
Environmental Protection Agency.
Inquiries as to the current situation regarding eligibility of other laboratories being

included in the service should be directed to :
35
Director
Quality Assurance Branch
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
U.S. Envionmental Protection Agency,
Cincinnati, Ohio, 45268, U.S.A.
Telephone : 513-569-7325
Weight units
below:
AF
In residue analysis, weights smaller than mg are usually used. They are explained
1. 1 microgram (g) 1 g = 1-6 g or 1 g
= 1000000 g
= 10-9 g or 1 g = 1000,000,000 ng
3. Picogram (pg) 1 pg
= 10-12 g or 1 g = 1000,000,000,000 pg
2. Nanogram (ng) 1 ng
Preparation of standard solution of pesticides
Preparation of stock solution 1 mg/mL (1000 ppm)
Weigh 50 mg of the pesticide of pesticide reference standard and transfer to 50

mL volumetric flask. Dissolve the pesticide in a suitable solvent and make to
volume.
36
Intermediate solution 10 g/mL (10 ppm)
Pipet 1 mL of the stock solution into individual 100 mL volumetric flask. Dilute
to volume with the suitable solvent.
Working solution 1 g/mL (1 ppm)
AF
to volume with the suitable solution.
Pipet 10 mL of the intermediate solution into 100 mL volumetric flask. Dilute
37
PURIFICATION OF SOLVENTS AND REAGENTS
Before any analysis is attempted it is of utmost importance that the purity of the
solvents and all reagents is ensured. If reagent blank analysis does not indicate
any contamination, purification of reagents and solvents can be avoided.
Purification of Florisil
Florisil, a synthetic magnesium silicate long used as an adsorbent in FDA

methodology, is subject to variations in adsorptivity common to most analytical
AF
grade adsorbents. Years of experience in using Florisil have lead to

establishment of procedures for purchasing, handling, and testing the material
to optimize and standardize its application. PR Grade Florisil (U.S. Silica,
Berkeley Springs, WV 25411) is specified because other grades available from
chemical supply companies may be prepared differently by the manufacturer
and may exhibit drastically different adsorptivity from what is required.

Handling directions are designed to prevent contamination that may interfere
with subsequent analyses and to ensure consistent adsorptivity throughout use
of a particular lot of Florisil.
Observe these procedures for handling Florisil:
Use PR Grade Florisil, 60-100 mesh, calcined (heated) 3 hr at 1250F (677C),

for all RAM 1 methods that require Florisil.
Other grades may not be capable of providing the elution patterns required for
successful application of the methods.
Immediately after opening bulk lots of Florisil, transfer to glass containers

38
(preferably amber) that are glass-stoppered or have Teflon-lined or foil-lined

screw caps; store in dark. Activate each portion by heating at 130C for 168 hr
(1 wk) before use. Top most rack of the oven.
Store at 130C in foil-covered bottles in the Florisil may be heated in bulk in

pint glass bottles or in individual column amounts in 50 mL Erlenmeyer flasks.
Cover containers with foil to prevent contamination, and use in rotation to avoid
lengthy storage time. Alternatively, store stoppered container of activated
Florisil in desiccator at room temperature and reheat at 130C after 2 days.
Alternatively, in case PR grade is not available, reflex 1 kg of Florisil with
AF
2.5 mL of distilled water for one hour. After repeating the process two more
times, decant the water through Buchner funnel and dry in an oven at 130C for
two hours. Partially dried Florisil should then be transferred to a silica bowl and
kept in muffle furnace at 660C for 3 hours and stored as described below.
Purification of sodium sulfate
All methods specify use of anhydrous, granular, reagent grade sodium sulfate.
To remove phthalate esters that interfere in determinations using electron
capture detectors, heat sodium sulfate 4 hr in muffle furnace at 600C. Store in

glass containers; if plastic lids are used, separate them from sodium sulfate with
layer of foil.
If reagent blank tests indicate that sodium sulfate is contributing interferences to

otherdeterminations, rinse several times with acetone and ethanol, then dry.
39
Purification of Glass Wool
All methods specify use of Pyrex glass wool, which can have contaminants that
interfere with determination. If reagent blank tests indicate that glass wool is
contaminated, rinse it with solvent and air-dry or heat 1 hr at 400C.
Some methods specify silanized glass wool, which may be purchased. To
silanize glass wool in laboratory, soak 10 min in 10% dimethyl dichlorosilane,

rinse with toluene, and soak another 10 min in methanol. Rinse with methanol
AF
and allow air-drying.
Purification of Celite 545
Purification of Celite should be done by making a slurry with 6M HCI while

heating on a steam bath. Then the slurry is washed with distilled water several
times until neutral. Again wash with several solvents ranging from high to low
polarity and dry.
Impurities interfering with phosphorus selective detectors are removed by
heating Celite at 600C in a muffle furnace for a period of a minimum of 4

hours.
Purification of charcoal
Make 200 g slurry with 500 mL hydrochloric acid; stir magnetically while
boiling for one hour. Add 500 mL of water; stir and boil for another 30 minutes.
Recover the charcoal by filtering through a Buchner funnel, wash with distilled
water until washings are neutral and dry at 130C. Store in a tightly stoppered
bottle.
40
Purification of magnesium oxide
Make 500 g slurry with enough distilled water to cover it, in an one litre
Erlenmeyer flask. Heat with occasional shaking for 30 minutes on a steam bath.
Filter with suction. Dry for 12-24 hours at 105-130C and pulverize to pass a
No. 60 sieve.
About 10% water is absorbed in this process. Store in a closed jar.
Purification of solvents n-Hexane, n-Heptane, Chloroform, Toluene,

Isopropanol, Methanol, Methylene Chloride, Petroleum Ether, Ethyl
AF
Acetate, Isooctane
All these should be of AR grade and should be redistilled using all-glass

apparatus.
Florisil cleanup procedure for the distilled solvents
Purification of acetone
Reflex acetone (2.5 mL) with KMnO4 (0.5 g) until the violet colour persists.
Collect fractions at 55-60C.
Purification of ethyl ether

Use all-glass distilled ethyl ether and assume the presence of 2% ethanol added
as a stabilizer to prevent formation of peroxides. Practical shelf life is limited,
however, even when alcohol is added peroxides form readily. Test for peroxides
using "Peroxide Test" paper.
*n-Heptane is recommended to use in place of n-Hexane due to comparative

boiling point and volatability.
41
Purification of acetonitrile
All methods specify use of acetonitrile distilled from all-glass apparatus. To

make use of reagent grade acetonitrile, test for impurities by holding moistened
litmus paper over mouth of storage container. If litmus paper turns blue, purify
5 L acetonitrile by adding 1 mL of 85% phosphoric acid, 30 g phosphorus
pentoxide, and boiling chips, then allowing to stand overnight. Distill from all
glass apparatus at 81-82C, discarding first and last 10% of distillate; do not
AF
exceed 82C.
42
EXTRACTION AND CLEAN-UP METHODS IN

PESTICIDE RESIDUE ANALYSIS
Extraction techniques
Extraction means separation of pesticide residues from the matrix by using

solvent. The extraction procedure should be such that it quantitatively removes
pesticides form matrix (high efficiency), does not cause chemical change in
pesticide and use inexpensive and easily cleaned apparatus. The extraction
method and solvent typedetermine the extraction efficiency from substrates.
AF
Choice of extraction method
The main objective behind employing a particular method for a specific

substrate is to bring the solvent to close proximity of the pesticide residues for
sufficient period so that pesticide residues gets solubilised in the solvent. The
choice of method depends on the type of substrate and ageing of residues. The
substrates in pesticide residue analysis could be liquids like water, fruit juices,
body fluids (urine, blood etc.) and solids like soil, flesh, green plant materials
(leaves, fruit etc.), dry fodder, grains etc.
Liquid substrates
Partitioning: Samples like water, body fluids, juices are extracted by

partitioning with water immiscible solvent. The addition of sodium chloride in
aqueous samples improves the extraction efficiency by reducing the solubility
of pesticide in water. It also prevents the emulsion formation, which is
frequently encountered during partitioning.
Use of absorbent : The pesticide residues from aqueous samples can be

43
extracted by passing the sample through solid adsorbents packed in glass

column. The adsorbents have high affinity for pesticide molecules, therefore,
they are held up on the absorbent whereas water passes out. The solid
adsorbents are then extracted with organic solvent. The solid
adsorbents
normally used for removal of pesticide from aqueous samples is given below:
Solid adsorbents
Liquid coated or bonded on inert

solids
1. Activated charcoal
1.
2. Polyurethane foam
chromosorb
3. Cellulose triacetate
2. Undecane coated on chromosorb W.
4. Molecular sieves
3. RPC-18-HPLC column material
(sephadex etc.)
4. RPC-C-8-HPLC column material
4000
coated
on
AF
Carbowax
5. Ion exchange resins
6. Magnsium Sulphate
7. Silicagel (activated)
8. Akynuba activated (acidic, basic and neutral)

9. Florisil and Extrulet
Small packed columns of RPC 18 and C-8 with trade name Sepack are
commercially available in the market.
Solid substrates
Fresh residues
Dipping, tumbling, shaking: This method is usually employed for solid

substrate when pesticide residues are present on the surface as in case of freshly
applied pesticide.
44
Weathered residues
When sufficient time has elapsed after the application (weathering), the residues
are not present on the surface but they penetrate the substrate matrix and are in
adsorbed form. The substrate matrix needs to be broken down in fine particles
before extraction with solvent.
The methods that employ these techniques are macerating/blending,
AF
Choice of solvent
macerating/blending followed by column extraction, soxhlet extraction, etc.
The choice of solvent for extraction depends on the a) nature of the substrate
and b) the type of pesticide to be extracted. However, the solvent should satisfy
the following conditions.
Should have high solubility for the pesticide and least solubility for co extractives.
Should not change the pesticide chemically or react with it.

Economical
Low boiling.
Easily separated from the substrate.

Compatible to the method of final determination.
Choice of solvent depending on type of substrate

The solvent for extraction of pesticide in different substrate is chosen as
follows.
Aqueous substrate : Water immiscible solvent like hexane, petroleum ether,

benzene, dichloromethane, chloroform, ethyl acetate, etc.
45
Solid substrates (soil, fodder etc.) : Different solvents like acetonitrile, hexane
and mixed solvents are used for dry sample with low moisture like grains,
samples with high moisture content (green plant samples and substrates with
high fat content (grains, oilseeds, egg, meat, fish etc.).
Choice of solvent depending on nature of pesticides
The pesticide molecules can be broadly divided into two groups namely nonionic and ionic type. The non-ionic pesticides also differ in their polarity. For
nonionic type of pesticides, organic solvents with varying polarity depending on
AF
the polarity of pesticide molecules are employed.
Recent techniques of extraction
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE)
Solid phase extraction technique is based on the concept of selective retention

by the device for the analyte, in this case the pesticide. SPE can be made to
work on either the batch or column mode. This method has not become popular
as there is loss of the pesticide as it tends to adhere to the surface of the beaker
and tubes. The method is modified by the use of adsorbents contained in
cartridges of various sizes usually made of plastic such as polyethylene or
polypropylene of extremely high purity and is termed as column-liquid solid
extraction (CLSE), however for simpliciaty it is referred to a SPE cartridges.
Solid Phase Micro-Extraction (SPME)
In this technique a droplet of extractant, or a fiber coated with the extractant is

46
suspended in the solution to be extracted and then transferred to an analytical

device.
Accelerated Solvent Extraction (ASE)
The extracting solvent is passed under amabient temperature or pressure

through the matrix, removing the analyte using a smaller volume of the solvent.
Microwave-Assisted Solvent Extraction (MASE)
The technique employs the use of microwave energy and a suitable solvent to
procedure.
AF
extract the analyte from the matrix, water is commonly preferred solvent in this
Supercriticial Fluid Extraction (SFE)
In the supercritical fluid extraction (SFE) method carbon dioxide gas is passed
under supercritical temperature and pressure (liquefied carbon dioxide) through
the matrix to extract the pesticide and then transferred to the analytical device
for quantitation.
Stir-Bar Sorptive Extraction (SSE)

SBSE was introduced in 1999 by Pat Sandra's group to overcome some of the
limits of the existing techniques, in particular in the recovery of medium-tohigh
volatility
analytes
when
sampled
in
liquid
phase
with
polydimethylsiloxane-open tubular traps (PDMS-OTT); further aim was to

improve the limited recovery achievable in ultra trace analysis with solid-phase
micro extraction (SPME), especially under un favourable phase ratios when
working with small volumes of sorptive material (in general PDMS) coating the
47
fused-silica fibre . SBSE was first developed for sampling in liquid phase and is
based upon sorption of the investigated analytes or fraction onto a very thick
film of PDMS coated onto a glass-coated magnetic stir bar (commercially
known as Twister, Gerstel GmbH, Mulheim, Germany). Sampling is done by
directly introducing the SBSE device into the aqueous sample; in the original
experiments, the analytes sampled for a given time were recovered by thermal
desorption and then on-line transferred to a gas chromatography (GC) or GC
mass spectrometry (MS) system for analysis. Later, liquid desorption in
combination with high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) also was

applied, mainly for analytes not analyzable by GC.
AF
BASIC CONCEPTS OF SBSE
SBSE is based upon sorption, which is a form of partition based upon the
analytes dissolution in a liquid-retaining polymer from a liquid or vapour
sample, thus, originating a bulk retention. The main advantages of sorption are
related to high inertness of PDMS, which gives better performance for labile,
polar, or reactive compounds; absence of catalytic degradation reactions;

analyte recovery mechanism based upon a well-known chromatographic
process; and linearity of sorption isotherms, which is fundamental for
quantitative analysis.
REFERENCE : Carlo Bicchi, Erica Liberto, Chiara Cordero, Barbara
Sgorbini, Patrizia Rubiolo LCGC,May 1, 2009.
Clean-up Techniques
Cleanup refers to a step or series of steps in the analytical procledure in which

the bulk of the potentially interfering coextractives are removed by physical or
chemical methods.
During extraction, the solvent comes in contact with the substrate matrix, to
48
enable extraction of the pesticide along with some of the constituents of the
substrate matrix also get solubilized. The extract not only contains pesticide
residues but also other constituents, which are called co-extractives. The
removal of interfering co- extractives from extract is called clean up. The coextractive generally extracted along with pesticide from various substrates are
moisture, coloured pigment like chlorophyll, xanthophylls and anthocyanins,
colourless compounds like oil, fat and waxes etc.
When dry substrate is extracted with water immiscible solvent, it contains

traces of moisture, which can be removed by passing the extract through
anhydrous sodium sulfate. High moisture containing substrate are extracted
AF
with water miscible solvent, the extract contains lot of water and water soluble
compounds, the extract is concentrated to remove organic solvent, the aqueous
phase is diluted with saturated sodium chloride solution and then extracted with
water immiscible solvent just like water samples. After removal of moisture, the
other coextractives are removed by using various separation techniques.
Liquid-liquid partitioning
In this technique, co-extractives from the extract are removed by partitioning
the residues between two immiscible solvents.
Acetonitrile-hexane partitioning: Acetonitrile-hexane partitioning is used for

the removal of oil and fat from the extract. This technique is used for the
cleanup ofextracts of oil seeds, milk, butter etc.
Partitioning with acid/base treatment: This technique can be used for the
pesticides, which are either acidic or basic in nature. This technique can not be
used for neutral type of pesticides.
49
Chemical Treatment
In these techniques, the co-extractives are either precipitated and separated by

filtration or made water-soluble so that pesticide can be partitioned into water
miscible organic solvent.
Saponification: This technique is employed to remove fats and oils from the
extract. The fat and oil is saponified or hydrolysed by treatment with alkaline
aqueous solution. This method can be employed for the pesticides that are
stable to alkali treatment or the pesticides, which give definite product that can
AF
be analysed easily.
Precipitation: This technique can be used only for the pesticides having some
water solubility. In this technique, the co-extractives are precipitated with a
coagulating agent like ammonium chloride.
Oxidation: In this technique, the co-extractives are oxidized with concentrated

sulfuric acid. This technique can be used for pesticides, which are stable to acid.
For example this technique has been used for the clean up of milk extracts
containing HCH, DDT, aldrin and dieldrin.
Chromatographic techniques
Chromatography is a technique used for the separation of constituents from the

mixture. In Chromatography, two phases are involved in separation. The extract
from the sample contains mixture of pesticide and co-extractives; various
Chromatographic techniques can be employed for separating them or removal
of the co-extractives from the pesticides.
50
Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC): For clean up, preparative TLC plates (20
x 20 cm) with thick layer of adsorbent (~ 2 mm) are used. Silica gel plates are
normally used but other adsorbents like alumina can also be used.
Ion Exchange Chromatography. Ion exchange resins can also be used for
clean up of ionic pesticide. For cationic pesticides like paraquat and diquat,
cation exchange resins (H+) while for anionic pesticide like 2,4-D, anion
exchange resins (Ch) are used. The matrix contains fixed charged groups are the
counter ions of opposite charge. These counter ions can be exchanged from
other ions of similar charge in the mobile phase. The aqueous extract containing
pesticide is passed through a column of ion exchange resin. The exchange resin
AF
holds up the pesticide being ionic, whereas non-ionic co- extractives pass out of
the column. The held up pesticide is eluted out using suitable electrolyte
solution.
Gel Permeation Chromatography and Molecular Sieves: The separation in gel
permeation Chromatography and molecular sieves is based on the principle of

size exclusion. Both gel and molecular sieves have tubular structures with inner
diameter (id) similar to the molecular sizes. The molecules having size greater
than the tube id do not pass through it. The molecules having size less than the
tube id pass through it. Molecules having greater size moves faster than the
smaller ones, enabling separation of molecules occur depending on their sizes.
The co-extractives like chlorophyll, other pigments, etc. have molecular sizes
greater than most of the pesticide, therefore, they are easily separated. Also the
co-extractives having molecular size less than pesticide molecule will elute later
than pesticide.
51
Adsorption Column Chromatography. Adsorption column Chromatography is

the most common and widely used technique for clean up. Different type of
adsorbent or mixture of adsorbent have been used for clean up. The adsorbent
generally used for clean up are Silica gel (80-100 mesh), alumina (acidic, basic,
neutral), polyethylene coated alumina, Florisil, Charcoal and mixtures of
Recent Trends in Clean up
charcoal + Celite + MgO.
Solid phas extraction cartridges: Serves the dual purpose of extraction and
AF
clean up. Advantages of SPE device over other conventional solvent extraction
and clean up of pesticides includes better reproducibility, reduction in solvent
use, high speed, versatility, freedom from interferences and field applications.
52
MULTIRESIDUE METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF

CHLORINATED PESTICIDES
The method is applied for determination in food stuffs of the residue content of
the following organochlorine pesticides and some of their isomers and
degradation
products,
p,p'-DDE,
o,p'-DDT,
p,p'-DDT,
Endosulfan-,
Endosulfan- and Endosulfan Sulphate, -HCH, -HCH, -HCH, -HCH,
Aldrin, Dieldrin, Chlordane, Heptachlor, Heptachlor Epoxide.
AF
Principle
Thoroughly mixed test portion is extracted with CH3CN (high -H2O foods) or
aqueous CH3CN (low-H2O or high sugar foods). Fat is extracted from fatty
foods and partitioned between pertoleum ether and CH3CN. Aliquot (non-fatty
foods) or entire solution (fatty foods) of CH3CN is diluted with H2O and
residues are extracted into petroleum ether. Further purification is done by
chromatography on Florisil column, eluting with mixture of petroleum ether

and ethyl ether. Residues in concentrated eluates are measured by Gas-
Chromatography (GC) and identified by combination of Gas - Chromatography.
Analyst competence in applying method for trace residues should be assured

before analysis. Recoveries of added compounds through method should be
= 80%.
Scope:
The present method describes the determination of the analysis of the following
chlorinated pesticides:
53
OC : 22 items
12. Dieldrin
2.- BHC
13. Endrin
3. -BHC
14. Endosulfan II
4. -BHC
15. p,p'-DDD
5.Heptachlor
16. Endrin aldehyde
6.Aldrin
17. Endosulfan sulfate
7.Heptachlorepoxide
18. p,p-DDT
8.Gamma-Chlordane
9.Endosulfan I
19. Endrin ketone
20. Methoxychlor
21. o,p-DDT
AF
10. -chlordane
1.- BHC
11. p,p'-DDE
22. Dicofol
General Reagents
Solvents must be purified and final distillation conducted in all glass apparatus.
Solvent purity test - Electron capture GC requires absence of substances causing
detector response as indicated by following test: Place 300 mL solvent in

kunderman-danish concentrator fitted with 3-ball Snyder column and calibrated
collection vessel or use flash evaporator and concentrate to 5 mL. Inject 5 L
concentrate from 10 L, syringe into gas chromatograph, using conditions as
described. Concentrate must not cause recorder deflection >1 mm from baseline
for 2-60 min after injection.
(a) Acetonitrile - Purify technical CH3CN as follows: To 4 L CH3CN add 1 mL

H3PO4, 30 g P2O5 and boiling chips, and distil in all-glass apparatus at 8182C.Do not exceed 82C.
54
Some lots of reagent grade CH3CN are impure and require distillation.
Generally vapors from such lots will turn moistened red litmus paper blue
when held over mouth of storage container. Pronounced amine odor is
detectable.
(b) Acetonitrile saturated with petroleum ether - Saturate CH3CN, (a) with
redistilled petroleum ether, (m).
AF
(c) Alcohol-USP, reagent grade, or methanol, oaks
(d) Eluting solvent: Pipet 3.5 mL CH3CN into 500 mL CH2CI2 and dilute with
hexane to 1L.
(e) Florisil: 60/100 PR grade activated at 675C.
Store at 130C in glass stoppered bottles or in air tight desiccator at room

temperature.
(f) Sulphuric acid 96% purity analytical grade.
(g) Sodium chloride
(h) H. Methanol (HPLC grade)

(i) Tri-sodiumcitrate dihydrate
(j) Di-sodium hydrogen citrate sesquihydrate
(k) Formic acid (AR grade)
(l) Sulfuric acid (AR grade)
55
(m) Primary secondary amine (PSA) sorbent, 40m particle size SPE
(n) C18 sorbent, 40m particle size SPE, where samples contain >1% fat
(o) Graphitized carbon black, 120/140 mesh size dispersive SPE
(p) Magnesium sulfate anhydrous
Preparation of laboratory sample and extraction
Non-fatty foods
AF
Pit soft fruits, if necessary. Chop or blend representative laboratory sample of

leafy or cole-type vegetables, pitted soft fruits, firm fruits, and roots. Mix
thoroughly to obtain homogeneous test sample before taking portions for
analysis. Grind dry or low moisture products, e.g., hays, to pass No. 20 sieve and
mix thoroughly. Proceed as in (a), (b) or (c).
High moisture (more than 75% H2O) products containing less than 5%
(a)
sugar
(1)
Products other than eggs - Weigh 100 g chopped or blended test
portion into high-speed blender jar, add 200 mL CH3CN and ca 10

g Celite, and blend 2 min. at high speed. Filter with suction through
12 cm Buchner fitted with filter paper into 500 mL suction flask.
Transfer filtrate to 250 mL graduate and record volume (V).
Transfer measured filtrate to 1 L separator, and proceed as in (d)
(2)
Whole eggs - Discard shells and blend combined yolks and whites
at low speed >5 min or until test sample is homogeneous. Low
speed blending will minimize foaming or whipping of sample.
Weigh < 25 g thoroughly mixed yolks and whites into high-speed
56
blender jar, and proceed with addition of CH3CN as in (a).

(b)
High moisture (more than 75% H2O) products containing 5-15% sugar
Add 200 mL CH3CN and 50 mL H2O to 100 g test portion in blender and
proceed as in (a).
(c)
Dry or low-moisture products e.g. hays - Add 350 mL H2O-CH3CN

(7+13) (350 mL H2O diluted to 1 L with CH3CN) to 20-50 g ground test
portion in blender (if larger test portion sample is required, and enough
additional extraction mixture to wet sample and permit thorough
blending). Blend 5 min at high speed and proceed as in (a), beginning
AF
"Filter with suction. Transfer < 250 mL filtered extract [record volume
(V)] to 1 L separator and proceed as in (d).
(d)
Transfer of residues to petroleum ether - Carefully measure 100 mL

petroleum ether and pour into separator containing filtrate. Shake
vigorously 1- 2 min and add 10 mL saturated NaCI solution and 600 mL

H2O. Hold separator in horizontal position and mix vigorously 30-450C.
Let separate, discard aqueous layer, and gently wash solvent layer with
two 100 mL portions H2O.Discard washings, transfer solvent layer to 100
mL glass-stoppered cylinder, and record volume (V). Add approximately

15 g anhydrous Na2SO4 and shake vigorously. Do not let extract remain
with Na2SO4 > 1 h otherwise this may result in loss of organochlorine

pesticides by adsorption. Concentrate the solvent to 5-10 mL in K-D
concentrator/ flash evaporator.
57
Pesticide standard solutions

p,p'-DDT, p,p'- DDE, p,p'-DDT, aldrin, dieldrin, heptachlor, helptachlor
expoxide, -HCH, -HCH, -HCH, -endosulfan, -endosulfan and endosulfan
sulphate, -HCH.
(A) Stock solution 1 mg/mL. Weigh 5 or 10 mg of each pesticide standard
reference and transfer into individual corresponding 5 or 10mL volumetric

flask, and accordingly dissolve and make up to 5 or 10mL
with
n-Hexane/
flask
in
the
volumetric
AF
n-Heptane
(B) Intermediate solution 10 g/mL. Pipet 1 mL of each stock solution into

individual 100 mL volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with hexane.
(C) Working solution 0.1 g /mL. Dilute 1 mL of solution B to 100 mL
volumetric flask and make the volume with n-hexane.
Fat Containing Foods
Milk - To 100 mL fluid milk (dilute evaporated milk 1 + 1 with H2O) in 500 mL
centrifuge bottle, add 100 mL alcohol or methanol and ca 1 g sodium or

potassiumoxalate, and mix. Add 50 mL ether and shake vigorously 1 min; then
add 50 mL petroleum ether and shake vigirously 1 min. Centrifuge ca 5 min at
ca 1500 rpm. Blow off solvent layer with wash bottle device into 1 L separator
containing 500-600 mL H2O and 30 mL saturated NaCI solution. Reextract
aqueous residue twice, shaking vigorously with 50 mL portions ether petroleum ethe (1+1); centrifuge and blow off solvent layer into separator after
each extraction. Mix combined extracts and H2O cautiously. Drain and discard
H2O. Rewash solvent layer twice with 100 mL portions H2O.
58
Animal and Vegetable fats and oils: If solid, warm until liquid and filter through
dry filter paper.
Butter: Warm to about 50C until the fat separates and decant the fat through a
dry filter.
Cheese : Place 25-100 g (sufficient to provide 3 g fat) of diced sample, about 2 g

of oxalate and 100 mL ethanol in a high-speed blender and blend 2-3 minutes.
(If experience with the product indicates that emulsions will not be broken by
centrifuging, add 1 mL water/2 g sample before blending). Pour into a 500 mL
centrifuge bottle. Add 50 mL of ethyl ether and shake vigorously 1 minute. Then
AF
add 50 mL of petroluem ether and shake vigorously 1 minute. Centrifuge about

5 min at 1500 rpm. Siphon off the solvent layer using a solvent delivery tube.
Blow ether layer off by gently blowing through the mouthpiece tube into a 1 L
separator containing 500-600 mL of water and 30 mL of saturated salt solution.
Re-extract the aqueous residue twice, shaking vigorously with 50 mL portions of
ethyl ether- petroleum ether (1 +1). Centrifuge and siphon off the solvent layer
into the separator after each extraction. Mix the combined extracts and water
cautiously. Drain and discard the water layer. Rewash the solvent layer twice
with 100 mL portions of water, discarding the water each time. (If emulsions
form, add about 5 mL of saturated salt solution to the solvent layer or include it
with the water wash). Pass the ether solution through a column of anhydrous
sodium sulphate 50 mm high in a tube and collect the eluate in a 400 mL beaker.
Wash the column with small portions of petroluem ether and evaporate the
solvent from the combined extracts on a water-bath at 100C with the assistance
of a current of air.
Fish : Weigh 25-50 g thoroughly ground and mixed sample into a high speed
blender. (If the fat content is known or can be estimated, adjust the sample size
so that a maximum of about 3 g of fat will be extracted). Add 100 g of
59
anhydrous sodium sulphate to combine with water present and disintegrate the
sample. Alternately blend and mix with a spatula until he sample and sulphate
are well mixed. Scrape down the sides of the blender jar and break up caked
material with a spatula. Add 150 mL of petroleum ether and blend at high speed
for 2 minutes. Decant the supernatant petroluem ether through a 12 cm Buchner
funnel fitted with 2 sharkskin papers into a 500 mL suction flask. Scrape down
the sides of the blender jar and break lip the caked material with a spatula. Reextract the residue in the blender jar with two 100 mL portions of cpetroleum
ether, blending for 2 min each time. (After blending 1 min, stop the blender,
scrape down the sides of the jar and break up caked material with a spatula, then
continue blending for 1 min). Scrape down the sides of the blender jar and break
AF
up caked material between extractions. Decant the supernatant petroleum ether

from repeated blendings through the Buchner funnel and combine with the first
extract. After the last blending, transfer the residue from the blender jar to the
Buchner funnel and rinse the blender jar and material in the Buchner funnel with
several portions of petroleum ether. Pour the combined extracts through a 40
mm column of anhydrous sodium sulphate in a tube, and collect the eluate in a

500 mL K-D/vacuum evaporator concentrator/flash evaporator with a plain
collection tube. Wash the flask and column with small portions of petroleum
ether and evaporate most of the petroleum ether from the combined extracts and
rinses. Transfer the concentrated fat extract to a tared beaker using small
amounts of petroleum ether. Evaporate the petroleum ether on a water-bath at
100C under a current of dry air.
Other fatty foods: Weigh into blender jar amount estimated to provide ca 3 g of
fat. In separate container mix amountof sodium sulphate equal to 2.5 x estimated
weight of water in sample with 100 mL petroleum ether, and transfer to blender
jar. Mix at medium speed for 3 min. Allow solids to settle and decant petroleum
ether through medium porosity filter paper into tared 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask
to which a few boiling chips had been added before weighing. Add 100 mL
60
petroleum ether to residue in blender jar, mix at medium speed for 1 min, allow
solids to settle and decant petroleum ether through filter to combine with above
filtrate. Transfer solid residue in blender jar to filter paper, fold paper over
solids, and squeeze paper gently against side of funnel with spatula to recover as
much solvent as possible. Evaporate petroleum ether on a water bath. Dry flask
and weigh flask plus contents. Determine amount of fat by subtracting tare
Acetonitrile partitioning
weight of flask.
Weigh 3 g of fat into a 125 mL separator and add petroleum ether so that the
AF
total volume of fat and petroleum ether is 15 mL. Add 30 mL of acetonitrile

saturated with petroleum ether. Shake vigorously 1 min, allow the layers to
separate and drain the acetonitrile into a 1 L separator containing 650 mL water,
40 mL saturated salt solution and 100 mL of petroleum ether. Extract the
remaining petroleum ether in the 125 mL separator with 3 additional 30 mL
portions of acetonitrile saturated with petroleum ether, shaking vigorously 1 min

each time. Combine all the extracts in the 1 L separator.
Hold the 1 L separator in a horizontal position and mix thoroughly 30-45
seconds. Let thelayers separate and drain the aqueous phase into a second 1 L
separator. Add 100 mL of petroleum ether to the second separator, shake
vigorously 15 seconds and let the layers separate. Discard the aqueous phase,
combine the petroleum ether with that in the first separator and wash with two
100 mL portions of water.
Discard the washings and draw off the petroleum ether layer through a 50 mm
column of anhydrous sodium sulphate into a 500 mL K-D concentrator/flash
evaporator. Rinse the separator and then the column with three approximately 10
mL portions of petroleum ether. Evaporate the combined extract and washings to
61
about 5 mL.
Clean up
Clean up of aldrin, dieldrin, -chlordane, heptachlor, o, p-DDT, p,p'-DDE, p,p'DDT, - HCH, -HCH, -HCH and -HCH.
Take the concentrated petroleum ether extract into 250 mL separatory funnel.
Add 100mL of petroleum ether saturated with ACN, after vigorous shaking,
discard the petroleum ether layer.collect the ACN layer and reduce the volume
to 10 mL. Add 20 mL of 10% NaCl solution; extract the residues with 75mL of
volume.
OR
AF
n-Hexane twice. Collect the n-hexane layers each time and reduce to small
Take the concentrated petroleum ether extract into 250 mL separatory funnel and
drop wise concentrated sulphuric acid a Pasteur pipette till the upper layer of
petroleum ether becomes clear, discard the lower phase of spent sulphuric acid
and wash the upper layer with three 10 mL portion of distilled water. Dry the
petroleum ether layer over sodium sulphate and make to the desired volume. In
general 50 g of samples of cereals pulses, vegetables will require about 20 mL of
sulpuric acid.
NOTE: to use sulfuric acid digestion method, it is advised to keep the

temperature of the sample at less than -10C.
Column chromatography - Clean up
Prepare 22 mm i.d. Florisil column containing 10 cm of activated Florosil tapped

with ca 1 cm anhydrous Na2SO4. Wet column with 40-50 mL hexane. Use
Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator with volumetric or graduated tube or flash
evaporator to collect eluate. Transfer petroleum ether or hexane solution of test
sample extract to column, and let it elute at ca 5 mL/min. rinse container (and
62
Na2SO4. if present) with 2 ca 5 mL portions hexane, transfer rinsings to column,

and rinse walls of chromatographic tube with additional small portions of
hexane. Elute endosulfan I and II, endulfan sulfate, at ca 5 mL/min with 200 mL
eluant I (3.5 mL CH3CN into 500 CH2CI2 and dilute with hexane to 1L).
Concentrate eluate to suitable definite volume in K-D concentrator or in flash
GLC determination:
evaporator. For evaporation < 5 mL use 2 ball micro snyder or Vigruex column.
Appropriate gas chromatography equipped with electron capture detector (H3 or
AF
Ni63). The suggested operating conditons are:
(1) Column made of borosilicate glass, 1.8 m long, 4 mm i.d. and packed with
any of the material given below:
(1) 10% DC-200 or DV-101 column on 80-100 mesh chromosorb WHP,

operating conditions Tempertaure injector 225C, column 200C, electron
capture detector < 210C, carrier gas flow > 120 mL N 2/min.
(2) For good separation of chlorinated pesticides, a non-polar/fused silicated

quartz capillary column and similar are recommended.
GC operating conditions for organochlorine compounds single-column analysis

using narrow-bore columns and electron capture detector:
Column 1 - 30 m x 0.25 or 0.32 mm ID fused silica capillary column chemically

bonded with SE-54 (DB-5 or equivalent), 1 film thickness.
63
Carrier gas
Helium
Carrier gas pressure
16 psi
Injector temperature
225C
Detector temperature
300C
Initial temperature
100C, hold 2 minutes
Temperature program 100C to 160C at 15C/min followed

Final temperature
by 160C to 270C at 5C/min.
Column 2 - 30 m x 0.25 mm ID fused silica capillary column chemically bonded

with 35 per cent phenyl methylpolysiloxane (DB-608, SPB-608, or equivalent),
AF
25 m coating thickness.
Nitrogen
Carrier gas pressure
20 psi
225C
300C
Carrier gas
160C, hold 2 minutes
Temperature program
160C to 290C at 5C/min
Final temperature
290C, hold 1 min
Initial temperature
64
Table: Gas chromatographic retention times for the organochlorine

pesticides using narrow-bore capillary columns single-column method of
analysis
Compound
DB5
14.51
11.43
12.59
13.69
12.46
17.34
21.67
19.09
23.13
19.67
18.27
22.17
24.45
13.41
16.62
14.70
10.94
11.51
12.20
11.71
17.02
20.11
18.30
21.84
18.74
17.62
20.11
21.84
13.59
16.05
DB608
AF
Aldrin
-BHC
-BHC
-BHC
-BHC (Lindane)
-Chlordane
4,4'-DDD
p,p'-DDE
p,p'-DDT
Dieldrin
Endosulfan 1
Endosulfan II
Endosulfan sulfate
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Retention time (min)
65
Calculation : Calculate the residue levels using the following formula:
Peak height of the

Residue
L of the standard
Sample
level =
injected
------------------------------------- x ----------------------------------
(mg/kg)
Peak height with the
L of the sample
standard
injected
(mL)
Final volume of the sample extract concentration in
x ---------------------------------------------------------------- x ppm of reference
Reference
Official Methods of Analysis. AOAC. 17th Edition, pp. 1-10.
(i)
AF
Mass in g of the sample solution
Indian Standard 14628:1999
(ii)
66
Quantitative method for organo-chlorine Pesticides by GC-ECD
Sample preparation technique:

1. Take 2 kg sample
2. Homogenize the sample
3. Extract the samples with 10mL of ethyl acetate, 10g of anhydrous sodium
sulphate followed by centrifugation at 2000rpm for 5 minutes.
4. Draw/Take 5mL of an aliquot from the supernatant.
5. Clean up using 125 mg of PSA in Dispersive Solid Phase Extraction.

6. Place the cleaned extract in a 10mL test tube.
AF
7. Add 200mL of 10% diethylene glycol (in methanol) which will act as
keeper as well as analyte protector.
8. Mix thoroughly using vortex mixer.
9. Put the mixture for evaporation to near dryness in a low volume

concentrator using gentle stream of dry Nitrogen (at 35o C).
10.Dissolve the residues in a mixture of 1mL of methanol and 1mL of 0.1%
acetic acid in water by sonication (1 min) followed by vortexing (30 s).
11.Centrifuge solution at 10,000 rpm for 5 min.

12.Filter the supernatant through 0.2 m polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)
membrane filters and then analyze by LCMS/MS.
13.GC Conditions: An ion trap, quadrupole, time-of-flight (TOF), or other

GC/MS instrument may be used with electron impact (EI) ionization, an
autosampler (AS), and computerized instrument control/data collection
and has an AS. However, with reference to the compound of interest on
matrix based refer to the method as has been published in Food Chemistry
125 (2011) 803-812.
67
GC/ECD condition (for organochlorine & pyrethroid )

Column : Ultra2, 5%Phenyl Methyl Siloxane
(25 m x 0.33m x 0.2mm)
Carrier : He (Flow rate 0.8 mL/min)
Oven temperature program
AF
Initial 180 C,
Splitless Inlet 250C
Ramp 5C /min to 210C hold 1 min,

Ramp 2C/min to 245C, hold 0 min
Ramp 2C/min to 280C, hold 2 min*
Post run 300C hold 2 min.

Run time 44 min*
Injection volume 2 L
GC/FPD condition (for Organophosphorus)
Column: HP 5, 5%Phenyl Methyl Siloxane

(30 m x 0.32mm x 0.25 m)
Carrier: He (1.0 mL/min)
Splitless Inlet 210C
Oven temperature program
68
Initial 50C,
Ramp 35C /min to 200C hold 5 min,
Ramp 15C/min to 250C hold 6 min,
Ramp 35C/min to 290C hold 10 min
Post run 300C hold 2 min .
H2 flow 75.0 mL/min
AF
N2 Make up gas flow 60.0 mL/min
Detector: FPD 250C
Air flow 100.0 mL/min

Injection volume 2 L
NOTE: It is suggested to follow mass spectrometry for the determination of

pesticide residues in foods at low level and to adopt the collaborative study for
determination of pesticide residues in food as per the method published in
Journal of AOAC International Vol.90, No. 2, 2007 page: 485-520.
69
MULTI RESIDUE METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF

ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDES
Scope: The method describes the simultaneous determination of Acephate,

Chlorpyriphos, Chlorpyriphos-methyl, Demeton O, Diazinon, Dimethoate,
Ethion, Fenitrothion, Malaoxon, Malathion, Methamidophos, Monocrotophos,
Omethoate Paraoxon, Paraoxon-methyl, Parathion, parathion-methyl Phosalone,
(a)
AF
Apparatus and Reagents
Pirimiphos-methyl residues in Food and Agricultural samples.
A Gas chromatographs equipped with: flame photometric detector

operated in phosphorus mode (FPD- P), 526 nm filter. Operating
conditions: injector 220C, detector 250C; establish stable flame at
electrometer setting that will produce 40% full-scale deflection for 1ng
parathion-methyl; baseline noise should be < 2%. Columns (a) SPB-5

(Supelco, Bellefonte, PA) or any equivalent, 30 m x 0.53 mm id; hold at
140C for 2 min, increase to 240C at 5C/min and hold 2 min; N2 crrier
gas, 15 mL/min; N2 makeup, 15 mL/min (b) Glass, 2 m x 3 mm id, packed

with 5% OV-101 on 80-100 mesh Supelcopaort (Supleco); 170C,
increase to 250C at 5C/min and hold 2 min; N2 carrier gas, 45 mL/min
(c) Glass, 2 m x 3 mm id, packed with 1.5% SP 2250 + 1.95% SP 2401 on

100-120 mesh Supelcoport (Supelco), hold at 175C for 2 min and
increase to 240C at 5C/min and hold 10 min; N2 carrier gas, 45 mL/ min
(2) Gas chromatograph with NPD/TID detector operated with 30 m x

0.53 mm column (1.50 m film thickness) and DL 210 (1.0 m film
thickness) or equivalent. Both connected to press fit Y-shaped inlet
splitter. Temperature programme 120C (3 min hold) to 270C (10 min
hold at 50C/min), injector temperature 250C, detector temperature
70
300C, head temperature 400C, bias voltage 4.0 hydrogen gas pressure
20 psi, helium carrier gas 20 mL/min is also recommended. (b)
Chromatographic cleanup columns: (1) Ready to use extrelut-3, fix needle
at column end as flow regulator. (2) Glass column 30 cm x 20 mm id with
glass septum (Carbon-celite cleanup).
(b)
Chromatographic cleanup columns: (1) Ready to use extrelut-3, fix needle

at column end as flow regulator. (2) Glass column 30 cm x 20 mm id with
Chopper grinder
(d)
A high speed blender
(e)
Rotary vacuum evaporator
Reagents
AF
(c)
glass septum (Carbon-celite cleanup).
(1) Reference standard solutions
Prepare individual standard solutions in heptane (or n-hexane), adding

benzene (ca 2%) if solubilization is difficult, then prepare suitable dilution
with heptane. Prepare standard cumulative solutions by mixing suitable

volumes of individual standard solutions and diluting with heptane.
(2) Solventsacetone, acetonitrile, benzene, dichloromethane, methanol,

n- hexane, all HPLC grade.
(3) Silanized glass wool.

(4) Celite 545 - 0.020-0.045 mm
(5) Active carbon - Derco g-60
(6) Sodium chloride AR
71
(7) Cotton wool - washed with acetone and n-hexane
Pesticide standard solutions

(A)Stock solutions 1 mg/mL
Weigh 100 mg of each organophosphorus insecticide reference standard and
transfer into 100 mL individual volumetric flasks. Dissolve in ethyl acetate and
AF
(B) Intermediate solution 10 g/mL
fill the volume to 100 mL.
Pipet 1 mL of each stock solution into individual 100 mL volumetric flasks.

Dilute to volume with ethyl acetate.
(C) Working solution 0.5 g /mL
Pipet 5 mL of each intermediate solution into a 100 mL volumetric flask and
dilute to volume with ethyl acetate.
Extraction
Foods are divided into 3 main groups according to moisture and fat content.
Group I Vegetables and fruits: Weigh 50 g of chopped sample into high speed
blender jar, add 100 mL acetone, blend 2 minutes at high speed. Filter with
suction though Buchner funnel with glass septum waste residue with Ca 50 mL
acetone. Bring extract to an exact volume (150-200 mL) with acetone-water
(2+1).
72
Group II Milk: Fresh milk (500 mL) is placed in a 250 mL separatory funnel.
Acetone (150 mL) is immediately added to the milk and the flask is manually
shaken for 10 minutes. The entire contents were filtered through a Buchner
funnel with filter paper in a 500 mL Erlanmyer flask. An additional 25 mL
acetone is used to wash the filter cake in the Buchner tunnel and this is added to
the filterate. The filterate is extracted first with 100 mL methylene chloride and
then with 50 mL of methylene chloride. The extract is dried over anhydrous
sodium sulfate at 50-60C, under reduced pressure.
Group III Grains (wheat, rice): Weigh 50 g chopped sample into high speed
Partition
AF
blender jar and 50 mL distilled water and proceed for group I.
For all groups place half the volume of food extract equivalent to 25 g of sample
(reserve the 2nd half) in a separatory funnel and add 100 mL of dichloromethane
and 100 mL acetone and 10 g of sodium chloride. Shake vigorously 1 min until
most sodium chloride is dissolved. Allow layers to separate, transfer the

aqueous layer to a second separatory funnel. Dry organic layer through sodium
sulfate. Add 200 mL portion of dichloromethane to second seperatory funnel and
shake vigorously 1 min each time and dry organic layer above. Rinse sodium
sulfate with Ca 50 mL dichloromethane. Collect organic layers and washings
and concentrate just to dryness in rotary evaporatory (40- 45C) water bath
reduced pressure.
73
Chromatographic column Clean up

Group I and III
Fill glass column (2 cm id glass column) with 2 g celite followed by 4g of
carbon celite (1+4) and top with glass wool plug. Wash column with 20 mL
benzene. Transfer sample quantitatively to column with small portions of
benzene (Ca 2 mL) and elute pesticide with 60mL of acetonitrile-benzene (1+1).
Concentrate just to dryness in rotary evaporator (45- 50C) water bath, reduced
AF
Group II
pressure). Add a suitable benzene and analyze by GC.
Transfer sample quantitatively to disposable extrelut 3 mini column with Ca 3

mL n-hexane. Allow solution to drain into filling material. Wait 10 min to obtain
even distribution then elute 3 times with 5 mL acetonitrile equilibrated with nhexane. Add 4 mL methanol to elute and concentrate to dryness in rotary
evaporator of 50-55C reduced pressure. Add suitable volume (1 mL) benzene

and analyse by GC.
Determination
Quantity residues by height or area measurement from solution of known

concentration of the authentic compounds. Table 1 shows the retention time and
table 2 shows the limit of detection of organophosphorus insecticides.
74
Table1. GC retention times (min) or organophosphorus insecticides relative

to parathion-methyl
COMPOUNDS
SPB-5
---1.30
1.00
0.45
0.81
0.64
2.18
1.16
1.04
1.22
--0.66
0.52
0.82
0.84
1.30
1f
2.90
1.58
SP2250SP2401C
0.97
0.82
0.60
0.55
0.89
1.69
1.09
1.19
1.09
--1.12
0.9
1.21
1.08
1.16
19
2.45
0.92
0.97
0.26
1.18
0.99
0.48
0.84
0.69
1.73
1.11
1.03
1.16
0.09
0.64
0.48
1.06
0.85
1.19
12.20 e
COLUMN
OV-101b
AF
Acephate
Chlorpyriphos
Chlorpyriphos-methyl
Demeton-O
Diazinon
Dimethoate
Ethion
Fenitrothion
Malaoxon
Malathion
Methamidophos
Monocrotophos
Omethoate
Paraoxon
Paraoxon-methyl
Parathion
parathion-methyl
Phosalone
Pirimiphos-methyl
1.11
Fused silica, (DB 5 or equivalent) 30 m x 0.53 mm id; hold at 140C for 2 min,
increase to 240C at 5C/min and hold 2 min; N carrier gas, 15 mL/min or any
other alternative columns can also be used provided standardization is done.
Glass, 2m x 3 mm id, packed with 4% OV-101 on 80-100 mesh Supelcoport;
170C increase to 250C at 5C/min and hold to 2 min; N2 carrier gas, 45

mL/min. c Glass, 2 m x 3 mm id, packed with 1.5% SP2250 + 1.95% SP2401 on
100-120 mesh Supelcoport; hold at 175C for 2 min, increase to 240C at
5C/min and hold 10 min; N2 carrier gas, 45 mL/min. dcompound is not revealed
at these operating conditions.
NOTE: Capillary column in place of packed column may be used, provided the
method is standardized using the changed column/s.
75
Table 2. Detection limits for organophosphorus insecticides

Detection limit, mg
Azinphos-ethyl
0.21
Chlorpyriphos
0.13
Chlorpyriphos-methyl
0.10
Demeton-O
0.07
Diazinon
0.13
Dimethoate
0.21
Ethion
Fenitrothion
0.14
0.18
0.29
AF
Malaoxon
Compound
0.18
Methidathion
0.17
Monocrotophos
0.55
Omethoate
0.10
Paraoxon
0.15
Paraoxon-methyl
0.21
Parathion
0.26
Parathion-methyl
0.12
Phosalone
0.31
Pirimiphos-methyl
0.11
Malathion
76
Calculation :
Peak height of the

Residue
L of the standard
sample
injected
----------------------- x ---------------------------------------- x
(mg/kg)
Peak height of the
L of the sample
extract injected
AF
Standard
level =
Final volume of the sample extract (mL)
concentration in
----------------------------------------------- x ppm of reference solution

Mass in g of the sample
References
JAOAC, Vol. 75, No. 3, 511-518, 1992.
JAOAC, Vol. 78, No. 3, 813-815, 1995.
77
MULTI RESIDUE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY METHOD FOR

SYNTHETIC PYRETHROID
The analytical method describes the determination by GLC of bifenthrin,

fenopropathrin, cyhalothrin, permethrin, cypermethrin, fluvalinate, fenvalerate,
and deltamethrin in food commodities.
Principle
Fruits and vegetables are extracted with acetone, and grains are extracted with
AF
acetonitrile-water. Analytes are partitioned into hexane, evaporated to dryness,

and dissolved in hexane. The extract is partitioned with acetonitrile and cleaned
up on a deactivated Florisil column with 6% ethyl ether in hexane. Analyte
concentrations are determined by gas chromatography with electron capture
detection (GC-ECD) and comparison with calibration standards.
Apparatus and Reagents
Gas chromatograph - Fitted with autosampler and operating conditions :
injection port temperature, 180C; ECD temperature; 300C; He carrier gas, 29

cm/s; make-up gas 30 mL/min; column temperature programme 50C for 1
min, to 205C at 30C/min, to 240C at 1C/min, hold 2 min at 240C; splitless
injection, opening plitter 0.8 min after injection; split vent flow, 22 mL/min;
purge flow, 9 mL/min. Difference in detector response between 2 successive

injections of the same standard solution should not exceed 6%.
78
GC column: 30m x 0.25 mm id, 0.10m film thickness (DB-5, 5%

phenylmethylpolysiloxane, J&W scientific; USA or equivalent provided
standardization is done).
Solvents - Acetone, heptane or n-hexane, acetonitrile, and ethyl ether; HPLC

grade, or redistill in all-glass apparatus and check for interferences by GC-ECD
(a). Sodium suflfate, anhydrous - Heat at 650C for 4 h. Cool in desiccator.
Eluting solvent - 6% ethyl ether in hexane. Mix 60 mL ethyl ether with 940 mL
hexane.
AF
(i) Insecticide standards - Purity, > 90%. Prepare individual standard stock
solutions in hexane at 10.0 mg/100 mL (deltamethrin, cypermethrin, 250 g/
mL) and 50 mg/mL (fenpropathrin, permethrin, fenvalerate, and fluvalinate, 500
g /mL. Prepare a mixed standard solution for determining the Florisil elution
pattern by pipetting 5 mL of each of bifenthrin and cyhalothrin, 10 mL of each
deltamethrin, cypermethrin, fenopropathrin, permethrin, fenvalerate, and
fluvalinate individual standard stock solutions into 100 mL volumetric flask and
diluting to volume with hexane.
(j) Deactivated Florisil - 60-100 mesh, pesticide grade. Activate at 650C 4h in

muffle furnace. Transfer to oven at 130C and let stand 5 h. Store in glass-
stoppered bottles or in air-tight desiccator and let cool overnight. Deactivate

Florisil by carefully adding 5% (w/w) distilled water. Shake 1 h on mechanical
shaker and let stand overnight. Store in sealed container at room temperature.
Deactivated Florisil is stable for up to 7 days.
(k) Acetonitrile saturated with hexane - Add 300 mL acetonitrile and 100 mL
hexane to 500 mL separatory funnel. Shake vigorously, with frequent venting, 2
min. Let layers separate. Drain acetonitrile layer into a storage bottle.
79
Determination
(1)
Florisil elution pattern - Place small plug of glass wool at bottom of 400
x 22 mm id glass column. Add 1 cm layer of anhydrous Na2SO4. Add ca
50mL hexane to column, then add10g deactivated Florisil, and tap sides of
column for even packing. Top with l cm layer of anhydrous Na2SO4.
Prewash column with ca 50 mL hexane. Do not let column dry until
elution is complete. Place 1.0 mL of the mixed standard solution, on
the Florisil column and elute the synthetic pyrethroids with 6% eluting
solvent. Inject 1 L aliquots onto GC, and determine the recovery of each
insecticide. A recovery of ca 95% of fluvalinate is expected which
AF
depends upon the activity of the Florisil and volume of eluting solvent,
which may range from 130 to 200 mL. Adjust volume to achieve ca 95%
fluvalinate recovery.
(2)
For extraction from high-moisture (> 75%) products, weigh 50.0 g (to
nearest 0.1g) chopped product into homogenizer jar; add 120 mL acetone;
and homogenize 3 min at 18,000 rpm. Suction filter through 12 cm

Buchner funnel with filter paper into 500 mL suction flask. Rinse
homogenizer with two 25 mL portions acetone and use rinses to wash
residues in Buchner funnel. Transfer filtrate to 500mL separatory funnel.

Wash suction flask with two 10 mL portions of acetone, adding washes to
separatory funnel.
For dry or low-moisture products such as grains, weigh 20.0 g (to nearest
0.1 g) into homogenizer jar, add 150 mL acetonitrile-water (2+1), in place
of acetone.
(3)
Add 60 mL hexane to separatory funnel containing extract. Shake

vigorously, with frequent venting, 5 min. Add 200 mL 4.0% aqueous
NaCI (w/v) and mix vigorously ca 30s. Let layers separate and discard
aqueous layer. Pass hexane layer through glass funnel containing glass
80
wool plug and ca 15 g Na2SO4, collecting extract in 250 mL round-bottom

flask. Rinse separatory funnel with two 20 mL portions of hexane and
pass rinses through glass wool into round-bottom flask
4)
Evaporate contents of round-bottom flask to dryness on rotary evaporator,

at 40C. Redissolve residue in 10 mL hexane and transfer to 125 mL
separatory funnel, rinse round-bottom flask with two 5 mL portions
hexane and add rinse to separatory funnel. Add 30 mL acetonitrilesaturated hexane, and shake vigorously, with frequent venting, 5min. Let
layers sepaate, and drain acetonitrile phase into 250 mL round-bottom

flask. Add 30 mL acetonitrile saturated hexane to hexane phase in
AF
separatory funnel and shake vigorously with fequent venting, 5 min. Let
phases separate and drain acetonitrile layer into same 250 mL roundbottom flask. Repeat 30 mL acetonitrile extraction and collect acetonitrile
(Note Accurately measure volumes of acetronitrile and hexane for optimal
results). Evaporate acetonitrile extract to dryness on rotary evaporator at
60C. Dissolve residue in 5 mL hexane. (Note: Ensure acetonitrile is
Transfer extracts to column and let level fall until just above Florisil
(5)
evaporated completely to dryness).
packing, rinse the 250 mL round-bottom flask with two 10 mL portions of

hexane, add each rinse to column, and let run through column. Elute
pyrethroid residues with same volume of 6% eluting solvent, used in
Florisil elution standardization C (l), collecting eluate at 3 mL/min in 250
mL round-bottom flask. Evaporate eluate to less than <50 mL on rotary
evaporator at 40C and transfer to 50 mL volumetric flask. Dilute to
volume with hexane so that the final concentration is 1.0 g/mL for fruits
and vegetables or 0.4 g/mL for grains.
81
(6)
Tentatively identify residue peaks by comparing retention times from

extract to those of standards solution. According ca concentration of
pyrethroids in extracts, select the standard solution with peak heights
similar to those of the extracts. Inject a standard solution with peak height
25% of analyte peak height, dilute and reanalyze if analyte
concentration exceeds 500 g/mL.
Calculate amounts of each pyrethrin in test extract with the following equation:
AF
Residue mg/kg = Cstd x (HEx/Hstd) x (Vstd x VEx) x (D/W)
Where Cstd = standard concentration (g/mL), HEx = peak height in extract,

Hstd = peak height in standard, Vstd = standard volume injected (L), VEx =
extract volume injected (L), D = dilution volume (mL), and W = test portion
weight (g).
References
Official Methods of Analysis.17th Edition.998.0, pp. 65-67 (2000).

Or
GC-MS and LC/MS-MS (collaborative study) may be used for synthetic

pyrethroids. (Ref: JAOAC International vol. 90 No.2, 2007, Page; 485-520)
82
MULTI RESIDUE METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION OF

N-METHYLCARBAMATE INSECTICIDES IN FOOD COMMODITIES
The analytical method prescribes gas liquid chromatographic method for

determination of carbaryl and carbofuron in food commodities.
Principle
Residue is extracted from crop with CH2Cl2, and extract is purified by
partitioning with petroleum ether and coagulating with H3PO4-NH4Cl solution.
AF
Phenolic impurities are largely eliminated by partitioning CH2Cl2 extract with

KOH solution. Carbamate residues are treated with 1-fluoro-2, 4-dinitrobenzene
to form ether derivative. Residues may be determined at levels > 0.05 ppm
(g/g). Recoveries range from 90 to 110%.
Reagents
(a) Borax - 5% aqueous solution (b) Diatomaceous earth - Wash thoroughly with
acetone and dry 2 h at 110C.
(c) Coagulating solution - (1) Stock solution - Dissolve 20 g NH4CI and 40 mL
H3PO4 in 360 mL H2O. (2) Working solution - Dilute 100 mL stock solution to
1L for coagulation.
(d) 1-fluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene solution - Redistill at 128C and 1 mm pressure.

Dissolve 1.5 mL in 25 mL acetone.
(e) Pesticides - Best quality obtainable from manufacturer; analytical grades
when available.
(f) Potassium hydroxide solution - 0.5 M aqueous solution.
83
(g) Sodium chloride solution - 20% aqueous solution.

(h) Solvents - Acetone CH2CI2, isooctane, CH3CN and petroleum ether (distilled
in glass; see statement regarding solvents; acetophenone and methanol
(analytical grade).
Gas Chromatographic Apparatus:
A gas chromatograph equiped with electron capture detector and 46 x 0.643

(o.d.) cm (18 x 1/4 in)glass column containing 10% DC 200 (12,500 cst) on
AF
60-70 mesh. Porous Teflon end plugs for 1/4 in (0.64 mm) o.d. glass tubing, but
glass wool can be used at outlet and omitted at inlet if necessary. (Glass wool at
inlet tends to absorb derivatives gradually and to release them later, giving rise
to ghost images of compounds).
Equilibrate column 2 days at 250C and 2 weeks at 212C. Operating conditions

: temperatures column 212C detector 218C, standby temperatures 190C
and 200C, respectively; N2 carrier gas 60mL/min; sensitivity 1 x 10 A full 29
scale; and detector potential either 25 or 50 V depending on response level

needed (1/3 to 2/3 full scale peak height with injections of 4 ng carbamate)
Alernatively, use instrument with 63Ni detector and 1.8 m (6 ft x 4 mm id glass

column containing 10% DC-200 on 60-70 mesh. Do not use glass wool at
beginning of column. Operating conditions temperatures -column 232C,
detector 250C N2 carrier gas 80mL/min, sensitivityl x 1Q-9 A full scale, and
detector potential 50 or 75 V.
84
Note: Other alternative equivalent capillary columns can also be used, provided
standardization is done.
Extraction of pesticides
Place 100g test portion and 200 mL CH3CN (add 50 mL dry ice/ H2O/ with fruit
or other test samples containing 5-15% sugar) in square screw-top jar, and
macerate in blender operated 2 min at moderate speed. Filter solution with
suction into 500 mL round-bottom flask through rapid paper in 11 cm Buchner.

Transfer aliquot equivalent to 40 g crop (mL aliquot = mL H2O intest portion +
AF
mL CH3CN added + mL H2O added - 5 mL volume contraction) x 40/100) to

250mL separator. Shake 10 s with 25 mL NaCl solution B (g). Drain and discard
aqueous phase. Repeat with fresh NaCl solution B (g). Add 100 mL petroleum
ether, and shake 30s. Drain CH3CN into 1 L separator. Stripe petroleum ether by
shaking 20 s with 50 and 10 mL portions CH3CN draining each into the 1 L
separator. Add 300 mL H2O, 25 mL NaCl solution, B (g) and 50 mL methanol.
Extract mixture with 100 mL and two 25 mL portions CH2Cl2, shaking each 20s,
and drain lower layer into 500 mL round-bottom flask. Add 2 drops
acetophenone, and evaporate in rotary evaporator connected to aspirator pump.
Druing evaporation, keep H2O bath within 40-50C range and remove flask from
H2O bath when extract volume has been reduced to 2 mL, so that final
evaporation to dryness takes place at low temperature.
Add 5 mL acetone, and swirl flask to dissolve residue. Add 50 mL coagulating

solution, swirl to mix, add 1-2 g diatomaceous earth and swirl again to mix. Pour
solution into150 mL suction filter of medium porosity packed with 6 mm (17.4
in) diatomaceous earth, and collect filtrate in 500 mL round-bottom flask. Break
vacuum immediately after liquid is drawn into diatomaceous earth layer. Rinse
sides of flask with 5 mL acetone, swirl and repeat coagulation. Rinse flask with
85
20 mL coagulating solution, and add rinse to filter just after liquid of second
coagulation is drawn into diatomaceous earth layer. After filtration is complete
(ca 5 min), transfer filtrate to 250 mL separator. Extract carbamates by shaking
20s with three 25 mL portions CH2CI2, rinsing filter flask with each portion
before adding to separator. Drain CH2CI2 (lower) extract into another 250 mL
separator. Solution may be held overnight at this point. Add 40 mL H2O and
10 mL 0.5 M KOH, mix briefly by gentle swirling, and shake 20s. Drain CH2CI2
through granular anhydrous Na2SO4 supported by glass wool in filter funnel and
collect filtrate in 250 mL Erlenmeyer. Add 10 mL CH2CI2 to separator, swirl

gently, and drain organic phase. Repeat once, Rinse filter with two 10 mL
AF
portions CH2CI2.
Add 2 drops acetophenone, and evaporate with same technique used in first
evaporation in previous paragraph.
Determination
Add 100 mL H2O, 2 mL 0.5 M KOH, and 1 mL 1-fluoro-2, 4-dinitrobenzene 2

solution. Stopper and mix 20 min. at high speed on mechanical agitator. Add
10 mL 5% borax, swirl to mix and heat on steam bath 20 min. Cool to room
temperature by placing flasks in shallow water bath for 10 min. Add 5 mL
isooctane, stopper, shake 32 min at high speed, and pour into 250 mL separator.
Drain aqueous phase, and rinse twice with H2O. Drain isooctane solution
through funnel contaiing 6 mm glass wool plug into glass-stoppered test tube.
Solution may be held overnight at this point. Inject 10L extrct into gas
chromatograph. If necessary to dilute extract, transfer 1 mL of isooctane extract
to another test tube, dilute to exact volume with isooctane, and shake to mix.
Chromatograph standard solutions and extracts solutions at approximately same
level of response. Methylcarbamates (carbaryl/carbofuron) (g/g) =
86
Peak height of the sample
L of the standard injected
-------------------------------- x ------------------------------------------Peak height with the standard
L of the sample extracte injected
Reference:
solution
AF
in ppm of refernce
x ------------------------------------------------ x
Concentration
Official Methods of Analysis. AOAC, 17th Edition, 985.23 (2000).

Or
LC-MS may also be used for determination of carbamates at low level in foods
as per the method published in journal of AOAC International Vol. 90, No. 2,
2007,Page;485-520. (refer page 95 of manual)
NOTE: FOR OC, OP, CARBAMATES IT IS SUGGESTED TO
FOLLOW THE METHOD AS PER SECTION (AOAC 970.52, AOAC

985.23 AND JOURNAL OF AOAC INTERNATIONAL VOLUME 90, NO.
2, 2007; PAGE485-520)
87
MULTI RESIDUE METHOD FOR FUMIGANTS
Principle
This method is applicable to ethylene dibromide, carbon tetrachloride and
methyl bromide. Repeated determinations are advised to average out for the
inability of having a good composite. Extra care must be taken to avoid lots of
acetone with these impurities present. All these fumigants may be detected by
AF
Apparatus
this method with some modification of conditions.
Gas chromatograph - With isothermal conditions and electron capture detector.

The oven temperature may require the oven door be left open to achieve the
lowest possible temperature.
Chart recorder - 1 mV, with a fast chart speed and fast response time. Column 3 or 4meter x 2 mm glass column packed with varied coating.
Examples: 15% polypropylene glycol (LB 550X, Ucon fluid) or Poropak Q.
Reagents
Acetone - High grade, checking each lot and bottle or interfering peaks, in
window of interest, on the gas chromatography detector combination used.
Standard Fumigants - Weigh amount of fumigant, layered under the surface of

acetone into a small volumetric flask. Take the weighed difference. Take care to
88
keep all standards in screw capped containers in freezer or refrigerator between

standard use. Dilute final dilutions at time of analysis.
Procedure
Store sample at less than 5C. Quickly weigh 50 g of sample and immerse in 150
mL acetone-water (5+1), in a 250 mL g/s flask, and stopper. Let stand 48 hr in
dark at 20C - 25C, swirling at 24 hr. Decant 10 mL supernate into 25 mL g/s
graduate, add 2 g Sodium chloride, stopper and shake vigorously 2 min. Let
stand until layers separate. Pour 5 mL clear upper layer into 10 mL g/s graduate;
AF
add 1 g anhydrous Calcium chloride, stopper, and shake 2 min. Let stand 30
min, with occasional shaking.
Withdraw 0.5 L aliquots from upper layer into 1 L syringe. Inject into a gas
chromatograsph. Inject all solutions in triplicate and average results.
Construct a calibration curve daily of peak heights against ng fumigant.
Reference
Official Methods of Analysis, AOAC, 15th Edition, 977.18 A, B (1990).
89
Phosphine
A GLC method has been described for determining phosphine (hydrogen
phosphide) in wheat.
Apparatus
(a) Gas chromatograph equipped with flame photometric detector and 526 nm
phosphorus filter, integrator and pen recorder. Operating
conditions
temperature (C)- detector 160, inlet 135, column 70, gas flow (mL/min)
AF
carrier gas nitrogen 40, hydrogen 210 air 42, oxygen 20, sensitivity 1x108
amu full scale deflection.
(b) GLC column-6x35 mm id glass tube packed with 30% OV 101 on 80-100
neck gas chrom Q (Other alternative equivalent capillary columns can also
be used, provided standardization is done )
(c) Reaction flask 300mL boiling. 3- Neck, angle type with 24/40 centre joint
and 19/38 side joints.
(d) Funnels i) 125 mL separator. Teflon stopcock with 20/40 ground glass
inner joint.
(e) Condenser 20 cm jacket with 20/40 ground glass joints.
90
(f) Gas collection 1 ltr. Flask-volume 1 ltr. Collaborated round bottom, 2neck with 34/45 ground glass outer joint in centre and 24/40 outer joint on
side neck. To centre joint connect straight reducing, brushing-type adopter
with34/45 outer and 24/40 inner joint.
(g) Syringe sampling adopter-Straight reducing, bushing type with 21/40

outer and 10/30 inner joints fitted with 9.5mm. Analabs white silicone
rubber septa by pressing them one at a time into sleeve with piece of
AF
wood dwelling, leaving 1/8 gap between septa.
(h) Connecting adapter- Glass 24/40, angle-type adapter, with glass stopcock
and hose connection arm.
(i) Syringes- Hamilton, gas liquid- tight 50,100 and 1000L.
Reagents
(a)
Aluminum Phosphide tablets containing 70% aluminum phosphide 26%
(b)
Sulphuric acid: Reagent grade, concentrated 10% in water.
ammonium carbamate, 4% edible paraffin.
(c)
Phosphaphine: Compressed gas 99.5% hydrogen phosphide.
(d)
Preparation of phosphine standards: Working standards for gas

chromatography are prepared by nitrogen dilution of 99.5% phosphine.
Bubble phosphine into water filled glass tube fitted with a syringe
sampling adapter. Transfer 1000, 100 and 10L aliquots of headspace gas
to volume calibrated 1 L flask previously flushed with nitrogen and fitted
with syringe sampling adapters.
91
The concentration of phosphine in the standards will be C, pg/L.

C= DT/V
Where,
D
density of phosphine (g/L) in sampling tube, connected for

temperature, pressure and purity,
L phosphine transferred to 1 L flask;
Calibrated volume 1L flask.
AF
Extraction apparatus:-
The apparatus is assembled in 2 parts: a reaction unit and a gas collection unit.
Apply a thin film of silicone grease (Dow corning) to all joint and stop cocks.
Using enlarging adapters, connect separating funnel and condenser to opposite
side necks on reaction flask. Stopper center joint and attach connecting type
adapter to top joint on condenser. The gas collection flask is close to air by
attaching syringe sampling adapter to side neck and connecting type adapter to
centre neck. With vacuum line attached to vacuum gauge reads 27 (685mm)
mercury below atmospheric pressure, close stopcock and vacuum line.
Grain sampling procedure

Starting to 100 - 1000 g whea, weigh sampling, then divide on grain sample
divider to obtain 50-100 g sub-sample. Accurately weigh resulting sub sample
and transfer to reaction flask using powder funnel with joint. Stopper flask and
save for extraction.
To prevent loss of intact physically bound phosphine,
sample must be sub sampled immediately upon receipt.
92
Extraction
Assemble reaction unit over heating mental with all stop cocks closed. Connect
evacuated gas collection unit to reaction unit by joining balls and socket joints
on connecting adapters. Add 100 mL 10% H2SO4 to separatory funnel opens
stop cocks on connecting adapters to create partial vacuum in reaction unit.
Open stop cock on separatory funnel and carefully drop acid into reaction flask;
close stop cock just before liquid level enters stop cocks. Turn on condenser
water and heating mental and let mixture come to boil. After 20 minutes from
cold, switch off heating mental and remove from under reaction flask. Slowly
open stop cock on separator funnel and let air purge fumes from reaction flask
AF
into gas collection flask. Purge operation lasts early 10-15 sec during which a
hissing noise is heard. When hissing noise stops, close all stop cocks and
disconnects gas collection unit from reaction unit.
Experiments have shown that gaseous phosphine trapped in gas collection flask
for several hours without significant loss of phosphine. Gradual escape of

phosphine by diffusion through rubber septum avoidable way, but rate of loss is
very slow. However, use of crimp top vials or 2 septa in syringe sampling
adapter is suggested which will not affect analytical results.
Samples containing high concentration of phosphine may present explosion

hazards. Two precaution should be taken when dealing with samples with
strong phosphine odors as guard against accidental explosion in extraction
apparatus: Reaction unit should be purge with nitrogen before adding sample,
and system should be purge with nitrogen instead of air after refluxing is
complete.
93
Gas Liquid Chromatography
Using gas tight syringes, inject 10-100L gaseous sample into gas
chromatograph. Before use, however, prime syringe with water by wetting
plunger tip and inserting into syringe barrel. Expel excess water from syringe
before proceeding with sampling. Flush syringe barrel with sample at least 10
times before final fill; then overfill and adjust volume for screening of unknown,
inject 50 L gaseous samples. Proceed from syringe filling to injection with

minimum delay. With samples showing positive for phosphine, repeat injections
two more tomes. Calculate mean area for triplicate injection and quantitate by
AF
comprehension to standard curve. If peak area response for given sample

weightily exceeds calibrated linearity range of detector, dilute sample by
transferring aliquot to another flask.
Calculation: Phosphine concentratoni in sample is calculated as follows:
Phosphine, ppm (u) = WFD/MS
Phosphine, ppm (c) = ppm (u) [100/Y]
Where (u) singnifies uncorrected recovery; (c) signified corrected recover; W=

mean weight of phosphine (pg) in injection aliquot; F= volume of purge
collection flask (L); D= dilutin factor; M= injection volume (L); S= sample
weight (g); Y= recovery as extrapolated from recovery curve.
94
Note: Experiments have shown that gaseous phosphine trapped in gas

collection flasks for several hours without any significant loss of phosphine.
Gradual escape of phosphine by diffusion using rubber septum /septa is one
of the options, wherein the rate of loss is very slow. However, the trapping
procedure may further be extended using crimp top vials or 2 septa in
syringe sampling adapter using n-heptane as solvent to avoid the risk
associated with loss of phosphine and further will not affect analytical
AF
results or the personnel doing the experiments.
Reference: J ASSOC OFF. ANAL CHEM. (Vol.61 No 4,1978): 829.836
Headspace Conditions:
1.0-mL sample loop;
90 C sample equilibration temperature;

15-min sample equilibration time;
0.5-min mixing time (at power 10);
110-kPa vial pressurization pressure;
and 0.5-min injection time.

After the sample was introduced into the GC column, split the column flow into
two flows before entering the detectors by using a Y-shaped quartz connector.
One flow will be introduced into an electron capture detector (ECD) for the
detection of compounds of interest and the other into a nitrogen and phosphorus
detector (NPD) for the detection of MITC.
95
HS-GC analysis using an automated headspace sampler,

Increase the temperature (by 5 C) from 70 to 95 C for the soil samples and
from 60 to 95 C for the water samples. The temperature that gives the greatest
GC response should be selected as the optimum sample equilibration
temperature.
Similarly determine the optimum equilibration by varying the sample heating
GC conditions:
cycle for intervals of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 45 min.
Capillary column (30 m x 0.25 mm x 1.4 m);
AF
240 C inlet temperature;
300 C detector temperature for both detectors;

80 C isothermal oven temperature;
and 1.1 mL/min column flow rate.
The salt that produces the greatest GC responses in area will be selected as the
best salt type for modifying the matrix. The optimum concentration and volume
of the salt solution will be determinde using the selected salt.

The optimum value will be defined as the condition that resulted in the greatest
and/or the most reproducible GC responses.
Reference:
J. Agric. Food Chem. 1998, 46, 986-990
96
THIAMETHOXAM
Principle of the method

The plant material is extracted with a mixture of water/methanol (8+2 vol. +
vol.). An aliquot of the filtered extract is diluted with water and cleaned-up on a
pheyl solid-phase cartridge and a ENVI-Carb graphiticed nonporous carbon
cartridge. The organic solvent part of the eluate from the clean-up is evaporated
and the concentrated solution diluted with water. The analyte is determined on
Equipment
AF
a two-column reversed phase HPLC system with UV-detector at 255 nm.
Sample concentrator
Laboratory wrist action shaker

High speed homogenizer
Vacuum manifold for solid phase extraction clean-up
Reagents
Ethanol, analytical grade

Methanol analytical grade
Methanol, HPLC grade
Tetrahydrofurane HPLC grade
Water; HPLC grade
Celite 535 filter aid,
Bond Elute Phenyl cartridge, 500 mg/3 mL
ENVI-Carb graphitized nonporous carbon cartridge, 250 mg/3mL
Reference substance for standardization. Prepare a stock solution of
97
Thiomethoxam (200 g/mL) in ethanol.
Extraction
Shake the plant material with 50 mL of a mixture of water/methanol (8+2 vol. +
vol) for 1 h at about 260 rpm or homogenize int he same amount of the same
solvent mixture with a high speed blender at about 9000 rpm for 2 min. Filter the
homogenized material through a Buchner funnel into an Erlenmeyer flask using
Celite filter aid. Due to the high water content of the extracts, the filtrates easily
foam if the vacuum used in the filtration apparatus is too strong. Wash the filter
AF
cake and extraction jar with the extraction solvent.
Transfer the filtrate into a 100 mL volumetric flask and bring to volume with the
solvent mixture.
Clean up by solid phase extraction
Take an aliquot of 5 mL (edible parts) or 2 mL (non-edible parts) of the filtered

extract and dilute with the same volume of water (5 mL or 2 mL). Condition a
phenyl solid-phase extraction cartridge with 3 mL methanol and 3 mL water.

Percolate the diluted filtrate through the cartridge and discard the eluate. Wash
the cartridge with 2 mL of water and discard the eluate.
Condition a ENVI-Carb cartridge with 3 mL tetrahydrofurane, 3 mL methanol,

and 3 mL water. Attach the phenyl cartridge to the top of the ENVI-Carb
cartridge with an adapter. Elute the analyte from the upper onto the lower
cartridge with 3 mL water/methanol (1+1 vol + vol). Remove the phenyl
cartridge and discard it.
98
Elute the analyte from the ENVI-Carb cartridge with 3 mL water/

tetrahydrofurane (8 + 2 vol + vol). Evaporate the elute down to about 2 mL on
the sample concentrator and bring to a volume of 2.5 mL with water. Use this
solution for HPLC.
Instrumentation
High performance Liquid Chromatographic system

For determination of thiomethoxam use a HPLC two-column switching system
equivalents).
AF
with UV-detector, Pump, and autosampler-injector as follows (or with suitable
Detector : UV/VIS detector 783 Pumps : Dual piston pump model Autosampler :
Automatic sampling system
Recorder: Dual channel recorder SE 120 (ABb Goerz AG, Wien, Austria)
sensitivity set to 10 mV full scale; chart speed: 0.5 cm/min.
Switching valve: C6W electrically actuated (Valco) for a scheme of the column
switching set up
Column 1: 125 m x 2 mm i.d., packing material Nucleosil C18, particle size 5 m

(Stagroma CH-8304 Wallisellen)
99
Column 2: 125 mm x 2 mm i.d. packing material Nucleosil 100 phenyl, particle

size 7 m (Stagroma CH-8304 Wallisellen)
Mobile phase 1: Water/methanol (8+2 vol + vol) at 0.25 mL/min
Mobile phase 2: Water/methanol (7+3 vol + vol) at 0.25 mL/min
Mobile phase compositions given are approxiamte and can be modified
depending on interferences from specific series of specimens.
Detector sensiivity: 0.003 aufs
AF
Volume injector: 50 L
Detector wave length: 255 nm
Retention time - ~7 min on column 1 and ~7 min on column 2 (depending on

conditions chosen).

--------------------------------- x
Peak height of the standard
solution
Calculation
Residue
(mg/kg)
Final volume of the

sample extract (mL)
--------------------------------- x

-------------------------------L of the sample extracted
injected
concentration in ppm of the

reference standard
Reference
1.
CIBA Giegy Limited Agrochemical Division.
2.
Pesticide Research Journal, 17 (1), 46-50 (2005).
100
SIMULTANEOUS DETERMINATION OF FUNGICIDES AND

HERBICIDES
(VIZ.,
ACETAMIPRID,
ISOPROTHIOLANE,
ATRAZINE,
METALAXYL,
CYMOXANIL,
IMIDACLOPRID,
PROPICONAZOLE,
SIMAZINE,
THIAMETHOXAM, THIODICARB, TRIADIMEFON, TRIADIMENOL BY

USING LC-MS/MS IN NON FATTY FOOD MATRICES).
Scope:
This is a single method which describes simultaneous determination of
METALAXYL,
AF
ACETAMIPRID, CYMOXANIL, IMIDACLOPRID, ISOPROTHIOLANE,

PROPICONAZOLE,
ATRAZINE
SIMAZINE,
THIAMETHOXAM, THIODICARB, TRIADEMIFON, and TRIADIMINOL.
Reagents/Chemicals:
Certified reference standards (>98% purity)

HPLC grade solvents.
Ethyl acetate
Acetonitrile
Methanol and water

Primary secondary amine (PSA, 40m, Bondesil) sorbent
Anhydrous sodium sulphate (dried)
Magnesium sulphate (dried)
101
Apparatus:
HPLC system Q-Trap mass spectrometer/Triple Quad
A high-speed homogenizer
Low-volume concentrator, Non-refrigerated centrifuge
Preparation of Standard Solutions:

Prepare the standard stock solutions by accurately weighing 10 mg (0.01 mg)
methanol.
AF
of each analyte of interest in 10 mL volumetric flasks and dissolve using 10mL
Prepare the stock standard mixture of 10 mg/L by mixing the appropriate

quantities of the individual stock solutions followed by requisite volume make
up.
Sample Preparation Technique:
1. Take 2kg sample
2. Homogenize the sample
3. Extract the samples with 10mL of ethyl acetate, 10g of anhydrous sodium
sulphate followed by centrifugation at 2000 rpm for 5 minutes.
4. Draw/Take 5mL of an aliquot from the supernatant.

5. Clean up using 125 mg of PSA in Dispersive Solid Phase Extraction.
6. Place the cleaned extract in a 10mL test tube.
102
7. Add 200mL of 10% diethylene glycol (in methanol) which will act as
keeper as well as analyte
8. Protector. Mix thoroughly using vortex mixer.
9. Put the mixture for evaporation to near dryness in a low volume
concentrator using gentle stream of dry Nicogen (at 35C). Dissolve the
residues in a mixture of 1mL of methanol and 1mL of 0.1% acetic acid in
water by sonication (1 min) followed by vortexing (30 s).
10.Centrifuged solution at 10,000 rpm for 5 min.
11.Filter the supernatant through 0.2 m polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)
AF
membrane filters and then analyzed by LCMS/MS.
LC-MS/MS conditions:
A triple quadrupole, ion trap, or other LC/MS/MS instrument may be used
provided it is capable of electrospray ionization (ESI) in the positive mode

with computerized instrument control/data collection and has an AS.
An injection volume (5100 mL) will be determined for each instrument

to achieve S/N > 10 for the quantitation ion for a 10 ng/g equivalent
sample concentration
Suggested LC conditions:
A 15 cm long, 3.0 mm id, 3 mm particle size C18 column, flow rate of
0.3 mL/min, and gradient elution with an initial condition of 25% MeOH
in
5 mM formic acid solution (takes linearly in 15 min to 90% MeOH in
5 mM formic acid solution and hold for 15 min).

103
A short C18 guard column must be used to protect the analytical column,
and a bypass valve must be used before the MS instrument to avoid
introduction of the early and late eluting nonanalyte components into the
detector.
The MS/MS conditions shall be optimized using direct infusion into the
ESI source to provide highest S/N for the quantitation ion of each LC-type
analyte from a single MS/MS transition. A second transition with
reasonably matching relative abundance ratios vs a contemporaneously
AF
analyzed reference standard is needed for qualitative purposes.
NOTE: This method can be used as an alternative method to several other

individual methods described in the manual wherever it is applicable.
Reference:
Journal of Chromatography A, 1173 (2007) 98109.
104
THIODICARB/METHOMYL
Principle
Thiodicarb residues consist of thiodicarb, dimethyl-N,N [thiobis [ (methylimino)
carbonyloxy]] bis (ethanimidothioate) and its degradation products methomyl
and methomyl oxime cumulatively measured as the oxime.
The residues are extracted with a mixture of 9:1 acetone: water. A standard
coagulation procedure is used to remove interfering coextractives. Alkaline
AF
hydrolysis converts thiodicarb and methomyl to methomyl oxime. The oxime is

quantified by gas chromatography utilizing a flame photometric detector
selective for sulfur containing compounds.
The method sensitivity is 0.04 ppm for a 25 g sample. The average recoveries
are 89% for thiodicarb and 93% for methomyl at several levels over a range of
0.04 to 10 ppm.
Apparatus
a. Gas Chromatograph equipped, with a flame photometric detector

utilizing a 94 nm filter selective for sulfur-containing compounds.
Operational parameters were:
Injection volume - 4 L
Attenuation - 2 x 104
105
Chromatographic column was 100 cm by 6 mm OD (2 mm ID)

packed with 5% SP- 1000 on Supelcoport 100/120 or any other
equivalent column provided standardization is done. The column
was conditioned for 48 hours at 225C with a flow rate of
60 mL/min carrier
Gas flows
Column
170
Nitrogen carrier 60 mL/min
Injector
*185
Hydrogen
100mL/min
detector
180C
Oxygen
15mL/min.
Air
100mL/min
AF
Temperature
b. Water bath.
Reagents
(a) Acetone, analytical grade
(b) Ammonium chloride, granular, reagent, A.C.S.

(c) Colour phast indicator sticks, pH 0-14 range (EM-Reagents) or equivalent
(d) Dichloromethane, analytical grade (tested for acceptability)

(e) Distilled water
(f) Ethyl acetate, analytical grade
(g) Ethylene glycol, analytical grade (for use as a "keeper"),
(h) Hydrochloric acid, concentrated, reagent ACS
(i) Hyflo supercel (Johns-Manville) diatomaceous filter aid (or equivalent)
(j) Phosphoric acid, reagent 85% A.C.S.
106
(k) Potassium phosphate monobasic, analytical grade.

(l) Sodium chloride, analytical grade
(m) Sodium hydroxide, analytical grade
(n) Sodium sulfate, anhydrous granular.
Sample preparation
Thiodicarb reidues are unstable at room temparature; therefore, samples must
remain frozen until time for analysis. Adequate amounts of dry ice should be
added to the sample when grinding. The resulting sample texture should be fine
AF
enough to allow for thorough mixing. Store sample in plastic bags in a freezer.
Weighed aliquots can be taken for analysis when sublimation of the dry ice is
complete.
Procedure
1. Weigh 25 grams of thorougly mixed sample into a 400 mL plastic beaker.

Add 150 mL of 9:1 acetone: water and homogenize for 3 minutes at
moderate speed. Fortification of samples with thiodicarb or methomyl to
determine recovery should be done before homogenization.
2. Vacuum filter the contents of the beaker into a 500 mL flask through
Whatman No. 1 filter paper covered with a lightly packed 1 cm layer of
filter aid. Rinse the beaker with 75 mL 9:1 acetone: water and pour over
filter cake.
107
3. Set the flask in a warm water bath (35-40C) add one drop of ethylene
glycol as a keeper, and evaporate all of the acetone with the aid of a gentle
stream of dry air.
4. Remove the flask from the water bath, add 50 mL of coagulation solution
(0.5 g ammoniumchloride + 1.0 mL 85% phosphoric acid in 400 mL
distilled water) and let stand for 45 minutes, swirling occasionally.
5. Vacuum filter into a 250 mL flask through Whatman No.1 filter paper
AF
covered with a lightly packed 1 cm layer of filter aid. Rinse the flask with
50 mL of fresh coagulation solution and pour rinse over filter cake.
6. Partition the extract in a 250 mL separately funnel for 30 seconds shaking

gently) with 50 mL of methylene chloride. Dry the lower methylene
chloride layer by draining through 75 g of sodium sulfate supported in a

10-cm funnel plugged with glass wool. Repeat the partitioning twice
more with 50 mL methylene chloride each time. Collect the extract in a
500 mL Erlenmeyer flask. Rinse the sodium sulfate with 25 mL of

methylene chloride.
7. Add one drop of ethylene glycol and evaporate the solvent in a warm
water bath (35-40C) using a gentle stream of dry air until approximately
one mL remains. Do not allow the extract to blow completely dry to avoid
loss of residues.
108
8. Add 25 mL of 10% aqueous sodium hydroxide and 2-inch magnetic

stirring bar. Set the flask in a water bath positioned on a Magnetic
stirrer/hot plate and stir at 60C for 45 minutes.
Note: Steps 9 through 11 should be completed in the same day.
9. Chill samples in an ice-water bath. Slowly add 4.5 mL concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Stir while chilled for one minute. 10.
10. Remove from the ice-water bath. Dissolve 3.5 g of potassium phosphate
AF
monobasic in each sample to buffer the solution. Saturate the solution

with 8 grams of sodium chloride. The pH measured by indicator sticks
should be between 5 and 6. If not, adjust accordingly with additions of
concentrated hydrochloric acid or 10% aqueous sodium hydroxide.
12.Decant solution into a 250 mL separatory funnel. Partition three times

with 50 mL of methylene chloride, rinsing the original flask with the first
two portions of methylene chloride. Drain the lower methylene chloride
layer through 75 g of sodium sulfate supported in a 10 cm funnel plugged

with glass wool into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. Rinse the sodium sulfate
with an additional 25 mL of methylene chloride.
12.Add one drop of ethylene glycol keeper and evaporate the methylene
chloride to about one mL in a warm water bath (35 to 40C) with the aid
of a gentle stream of dry air. Remove the air stream at this point and allow
the remaining methylene chloride to evaporate just to dryness by the heat
of the bath.
109
13.Dissolve residue in n-heptane. Dilute to required volume with ethyl

acetate and analysis by GLC.
Calculation
Residue
(mg/kg) =
------------------------------- x ---------------------------------L of the sample extract

injected
concentration in ppm of
------------------------------------------ x
the reference standard
AF
Final volume of the sample extract

References
Manual of Pesticide Residues analysis Vol. I (1981) Edited by Hons Peter Their
and Hens Zumer (299-308).
110
CYMOXANIL
Outline of method
Cymoxanil residues are extracted from crop or soil samples with ethyl acetate.
The aqueous extract is initially washed with hexane. The aqueous solutionis then
dichloromethane.
extracted with dichloromethane. Water samples are directly extracted with
AF
In both cases, the dichloromethane phase is rotary-evaporated, the residue is

dissolved in ethyl acetate, and the solution is cleaned up on silica gel column.
Cymoxanil is determined by gas chromatography using a thermionic detector.
Apparatus
Homogenizer. E.g. Ultra Turrax (Janke & Kunkel)

Laboratory centrifuge, type UJ 3 (Heraeus Christ) with 340 mL glass
tubes
Round-bottomed flasks, 500 mL and 250 mL with ground joints

Rotary vacuum evaporator, 40-50C bath temperature
Separatory funnel, 250 mL
Laboratory mechanical shaker
Chromatographic tube, 15 mm i.d. 30 cm long
Volumetric flasks, 10 mL
111
Gas chromatograph equipped with thermionic nitrogen-specific detector

Microsyringe, 10 L
Reagents
Acetone, p.a.
Ethyl acetate
AF
n-hexane / heptane
Dichloromethane
Eluting mixture 1 : ethyl acetate + n hexane 1 : 9 v/v

Eluting mixture 2 : ethyl acetate + n-hexane 4:6 v/v
Cymoxanil standard solutions : 0.5-5 g /mL acetone
Filter aid, e.g. Celite 545
Procedure:
Extraction
Fruits and vegetables
Weigh 50 g of the sample (g) into 340 mL centrifuge tube, and add 100 mL ethyl
acetate and 5 g filter aid. Homogenize the mixture for 5 min, and then
centrifuge. Decant the supernatant liquid into a 500 mL round bottomed flask.
Extract the residue with 100 mL ethyl acetate for 5 min on a mechanical shaker.
Centrifuge and decant the liquid phase. Combine the extracts, add 50 mL water,
112
and rotary-evaporate until the water begins to condense, quantitatively transfer

the aqeous phase into a 250 mL separatory funnel and wash successively with
three 30 mL portions of hexane, with gentle swirling. Discard the organic
phases. Extract the aqueous solution successively with three 50 mL portions of
dichloromethane for 5 min on a mechanical shaker. Separate the lower organic
phases (centrifuge, if necessary) and filter through sodium sulphate into a 250
mL round bottomed flask. Wash the sodium sulphate with dichloromethane.
Rotary-evaporate the solution almost to dryness.
AF
Water
Extract 50 to 200 mL water (G) successively with three 50 mL portions of

dichloromethane for 5 min on a mechanical shaker. Sepaate the organic phases
(centrifuge, if necessary) and filter through sodium sulphate into a 250 mL round
bottomed flask. Wash the sodium sulphate with dichloromethane. Rotary-
evaporte the solution almost to dryness.
Column chromatography
Plug the bottom end of the chromatographic tube with glass wool and add about
5 mL hexane. Slurry 10 g silica gel in 20 mL hexane, and slowly pour the slurry
into the column, gently tapping the glass walls. Allow to settle, and add 3 g
sodium sulphate. Drain the hexane to the top of the sodium sulphate.
Dissolve the residue in 1 mL ethyl acetate, and transfer quantitatively to the

prepared column, using three 3 mL portions of eluting mixture 1 to complete the
113
transfer. Let the solution percolate into the column packing (flow rate of 1-2
drops per s). Elute the column firstly with 200 mL of eluting mixture 1. Discard
this fraction, then elute cymoxanil with 200 mL of eluting mixture 2. collect the
eluate in a 250 mL flask, and rotary-evaporate almost to dryness.
Gas chromatographic determination
Quantitatively transfer the residue into a volumetric flask, using acetone to

complete the transfer, and dilute the solution with acetone to a given volume,
chromatograph.
Inject an alquot of this solution (V.) into the gas
AF
e.g. 10 mL (V End).
Operating conditions
Gas chromatograph :
Column: Glass, 2 mm i.d. 50 cm long; packed with 2% OV-101 on
chromosorb W-HP, 100-120 mesh.
Column temperature: Programmed to rise at 30C/min from 100 to

190C, then isothermal at 190C for 4 min.
Injection port temperature: 190C.

Detector: Thermionic nitrogen specific detector; Temperature 320C
Gas flow rates: Helium carrier, 25 mL/min; Hydrogen 4.5 mL/min; Air 70
mL/min.
Attenuation: 4
114
Recorder: 1 mV; chart speed 5 mm/min.

Injection volume: 1 L
Linearity range: 0.5-10 ng
Retention time for cymoxanil: 2 min 24 s
Calculation of residues:
The residue R, expressed in mg/kg cymoxanil, is calculated from the following
AF
equation.
Residue (mg/kg)= ------------------------------ x -----------------------------------Peak height of the standard

injected
L of the sample extract
------------------------------------------------- x concentration in ppm of

reference standard
Reference:
Holt. Determination of residues of 1 [2-cyano-2-methoxyminoacetyl]-3ethylurea by gas liquid chromatography. Pestic. Sci. 10, 455-459 (1979).
115
MULTIRESIDUE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC METHOD

FOR THE DETERMINATION OF ORGANOCHLORINE AND
PYRETHROID PESTICIDES IN MILK, FISH AND EGGS
The present method prescribed the analytical method for determination of
organochlorine and synthetic pyrethroids in milk, fish and eggs.
Apparatus
AF
(a) Refrigerated centrifuge-Able to rotate at 3000 rpm at -15C.

(b) Rotary evaporator - With vacuum device and cooler
(c) SPE automate - (Optional) or SPE vacuum manifold and vacuum pump.
(d) Gas chromatograph system- with injection device and electron capture
detector.
(e) Capillary column- Nonpolar dimethyl-polysiloxane (100%) phase,

thickness 0.25 m, 50 m x 0.32 mm id.
(f) Pre-column-1.5 m x 0.32 mm id.
(g) Volumetric pipets
Reagents
(a) Pesticide standard solution in hexane : Hexachloro-benzene (HCB);

endrin; -HCH; p,p'-TDE; -HCH; o,p'-DDT; -HCH; p,p'-DDT;
heptachlor; o,p'-dicofol; aldrin; heptachlor; oxychlordane; -chlordane;
o,p'-DDE; -endosulfan; -chlordane; p,p'-DDE; dieldrin; o,p'-TDE;
deltamethrin, all at 8ng/mL; permethrin, cypermethrin, fenvalerate,
cyfluthrin at 40 ng/mL; and -cyalothrin at 10 ng/mL.
116
(b) IS solution in isooctane: Transnonachlor at 10 g/mL.

(c) Acetone
(d) Diethyl ether
(e) Petroleum ether
(f) n-hexane
(g) Acetontrile
(h) Methanol
(j) Dodecane : Used as a keeper

(k) Sodium sulfate-Anhydrous
(i) Methylene chloride
(l) Filter paper-Whatman No. 110 or equivalent
AF
(m) Nonpolar SPE cartridge C -l g, 6 mL, particle size 40 fn, pore size 60 A
(Varian or equivalent).
(n) Polar SPE cartridge Florisil.-l g, 6 mL, particle size 200 m
(o) Mobile phase-Helium 99.99% purity, filtered for oxygen and water.
General fat extraction
(a) For milk - Shake 50 mL milk with 5 mL methanol and 0.5 g sodium
oxalate for 1min in 250 mL separating funnel. Add 20 mL diethyl ether
and shake again for 1min. Repeat with 25 mL petroleum ether. After
separating the phase (centrifuging for 5 min at 1500 rpm may be
required), transfer the organic phase into another separating funnel and
extract the aqueous phase twice with 50 mL portions mixture (1 + 1, v/v)
diethyl ether and petroleum ether. Wash combined solvent extracts over
sodium sulfate anhydrous layer and evaporate by using rotary evaporator
at ca 35C.
117
(b) For fish - Add 50 mL n-hexane to 20 g fish. Mix, and centrifuge for 5 min
at 1500rpm, Decant upper phase and repeat extraction with 50 mL nhexane. Keep the 2 extracts together. Evaporate solvent at ca 35C to 1
mL, and finish evaporation with gentle stream of nitrogen.
(c) For eggs - Use extraction column. In a beaker, carefully mix 15 g sand, 15
g sodium sulfate anhydrous, and then 10 g sample, Stopper a glass column
with cotton-wool swab, add 2 cm sodium sulfate anhydrous and pour in

the above preparation. Elute with 170 mL n-hexane and acetone
AF
(2 +1, v/v).
Evaporate solvent at ca 35C to 1 mL, and finish evaporation with gentle stream
of nitrogen.
Pesticide Extraction
For each product pesticides are extracted from fat by cryogenic extraction.
Weigh 0.5g fat extract in centrifuge tube, add 3 mL acetonitrile-methylene
chloride (75 +25, v/ v and mix vigourously. Centrifuge 20 min at 3000 rpm and
ca -15C. Keep upper-layer supernatant, and then slowly heat bottom to melt fat
and repeat extraction with 3 mL of the same solvent mixture. Evaporate organic
phase at ca 35C under nitrogen to ca 2 mL (solution A).
Cleanup
C18 SPE: Process cartridge with 5 mL petroleum ether, 5 mL acetone, and 5 mL
methanol twice, eluted to meniscus. Solution A (2 mL) is loaded into cartridge
and eluted to meniscus (keep 3 min in contact). Wash solution a container with
10 mL acetonitrile, load it into cartridge, and elute (1 drop/3 s). Elutant is
118
evaporated at about 35C with 100 L dodecane; then dilute in n-hexane

(solution B).
Florisil SPE- Process cartridge with 10 mL n-hexane eluted to meniscus. Load

solution B (3 min contact) and elute with mL petroleum ether-diethyl ether
(98 +2, v/v; 1 drop/s); and 12 mL petroleum ether -diethyl ether
(85 +15, v/v; 1 drop/3 s). Mix the 2 fractions and evaporate together with 100
AF
analysis (solution C).
L dodecane. Dissolve final extract in appropriate volume of n-hexane for GC
Gas chromatographic determination
(a) Internal control procedure: Before analysis, determine linearity and
determination limit of GC system.
(b) Operating conditions : When column (e.g., CP-SIL-5) and mobile phase
helium were used, the following settings were appropriate; helium

steam pressure 23 psi; initial oven temperature 100C, holding time 2
min, rate 7C/min; temperature 220C, holding time 10 min, rate
3C/min; final temperature 285C, injector intial temperature 50C, rate
150C/min; final temperature 250C; holding time 52 min; detector
temperature 320C; nitrogen make-up detector at 25 mL/min; injection
volume 1 L. data sets were produced by GC-electron capture detector
(ECD).
119
(c) Evaluation: Determine, from calibration chromatogram, masses in ng/g fat

of solution injected onto GC column. Calculate mass (M) of unknown
substance in ng/g using the equation or programming computer.
Calculation
injected
L of the standard
Residue (mg/kg) ------------------------------ x -------------------------------------L of the sample extract
AF

injected
------------------------------------------------ x
Reference:
reference standard
Journal of AOAC International, 85 (6): 1398-1405.
120
Table : Retention times, LOQ of pesticides

LOQa
ng/g
2.7
2.3
2.8
2.7
2.7
3.0
3.1
3.0
2.9
2.5
3.0
2.9
2.5
2.8
3.6
2.3
2.4
1.9
5.4
5.4
2.2
1.9
10.3
11.7
7.8
7.2
1.9
AF
-HCH
-HCH
HCB
-HCH
Heptachlor
Aldrin
Heptachlor-epoxide
Oxychlordane
-Chlordane
o,p'-DDE
-Endosulfan
-Chlordane
p,p'- DDE
Dieldrin
o,p'-TDE
Endrin
p,p'-TDE
o,p'-DDT
p,p'-DDT
o,p-Dicofol
Dicofol
-Cyalothrin
Permethrin
cyflulhrin
Cypermethrin
Fenvalerate
Deltamethrin
Retention
time, min
15.200
15.613
16.805
16.201
19.887
20.045
21.246
21.408
22.116
22.350
22.698
23.833
23.750
24.846
24.981
24.760
25.642
26.173
28.316
31.708
32.495
37.099
40.208
42.044
43.160
46.451
49.099
Compound
Note:
For more details suggested to refer AOAC Official Method 970.52 page nos.
485-520 (2007). However, for high fat containing food matrices viz., milk, eggs
and seafood samples advised to refer to Food Chemistry 125:803-812 (2011).
121
ACETAMIPRID
Principle:
An analytical method has been prescribed for the determination for acetamiprid
(E) 1ST- [6-chloro-3- pyridyl] methyl - N-cyano - 1ST- methyl acetamide]
(ATP) in crops by gas chromatography. ATP in crops is extracted with

methanol, purified by liquid-liquid partition and column chromatography and
AF
then determined by electron capture detector.
The limit of detection of ATP for fruits and vegetables in 0.005 ppm and
recovery of fortified samples at 0.1 ppm in about 96% in average (80-104%).
Apparatus
Gas chromatograph: Gas chromatograph with Electron Capture detector,

Column: A 5% PEG HT/ chromosorb WHP column (60-80 mesh, 3.2 m. m i.d.
1m. Length) temperature

Column oven
260C
Injection port
320C
Detector
260C
Carrier gas
1.5kg/ cm
2 Microlitre syringe
-10L Capacity
Waring blender or equivalent

122

Mechanical shaker
Chromatographic column: glass 200 cm x 18 mm .I.D.
Capillary Chromatography conditions:

Instrument
- A gas chromatograph system connected with
Communication software system equipped

with 63Ni Electron capture detector
Column
- Electron Capture Detector
AF
Detector
- DB-1 Capillary column or equivalent

(30m length x 0.25mm I.D x 0.1 film
thickness)
Temperature conditions
300 C
Injector
300 C
Detector
310 C
Oven
Gas flow rate
Nitrogen
15 mL/min
Makeup
15 mL/min
Injection mode Split ratio

Split
3.0 mL
Purge
1.0 mL
123
Current
1 nA
Range
10
0.4 L
Injection volume
Retention time (approximate)

:
7.5 minutes
Reagents :
Florisil
Celite 545
AF
Methanol -glass redistilled
Acetamiprid
Working standard solution of acetamiprid of 1 g/ mL.
Extraction:
Fruits and vegetables: Homogenize the sub sample (20 g) with 100 mL of
methanol using the macerator for 3 min and then shake for 30 min by
mechanical shaker. Filter the homogenate through a celite (1-2 in thickness)
under reduced pressure. Wash the filter cake and vessel with 25 mL of methanol
and combine the filtrates and transfer to a 500mL separatory funnel.
Liquid-Liquid partition
Add sodium chloride solution (150 mL) to the filtrate. Wash the aqueous
methanol solution with 100 mL hexane for 5 min. Transfer the aqueous
methanol to another 500mL separatory funnel. Shake the aqueous methanol
124
twice with each 100 mL of dichloro methane for 5 minutes. Separate the
dichlormethane in another separating funnel and extract again the aqueous
methanol with 100 mL dichloromethone. Wash dichloromethane with 100 mL of
0.05 N alkaline solution for 3 min. Discard the alkaline solution. Pass the
dichloromethane through filter paper containing sodium sulphate in 300 mL
round bottom flask. Add 1 g of Florisil PR to dichloromethane and evaporate to
dryness in a water bath at 40C under reduced pressure.
AF
Transfer the residue with the aid of n-hexane to a column packed with Florisil
PR (9 g). Rinse the vessel with acetone and hexane (20 + 80, v/v) and transfer to
the Florisil column. Wash the column with 130 mL of mixed solvent. Elute the
acetamiprid with a mixed solvent of hexane and acetone (50 + 50, v/v 120 mL).
Concentrate the solvent to dry ness on water bath ca 40C under reduced
pressure. Dissolve the residue in 5 mL of distilled water and transfer to on the
top of sep pack C pretreated with 20 mL of methanol 18 and then with 20 mL

distilled water. Wash the vessel with 30 mL of 15 % aceto nitrile and transfer on
the top of C18 Cartridge. Elute ATP with 30 mL of 15% acetonitrilie.
Concentrate the elute to dryness in a water bath at 40-50C under reduced

pressure Transfer the residue in acetone and estimate by GLC.
125
Calculation

injected
L of the standard
Residue (mg/kg) = --------------------------------- x ----------------------------------Peak height of the standard

injected
Reference:
x concentration in ppm of
reference standard
AF
-----------------------------------------------Mass in g of the sample
M. Tobiled, K. Tiyoshi, K. Sugioba, and T. Gunayo (1997). Rapid determination

method for the insecticide Acetomiprid in crops by gas chromatography, J.
pesticide Sci22, 129-132.
126
IMIDACLOPRID
Scope
This chapter describes high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC)
method for determination of imidacloprid residues in food commodities, and
water.
1. Apparatus
Warring Blender
AF
Laboratory Shaker (Rotary Action)
Chromatographic Glass Column with Teflon cock, 25 cm long x 0.8 cm

i.d.
Rotary vacuum Evaporator
Air blower
Water bath
High performance liquid chromatograph

Equipped with UV detector and operating under the following suggestive
parameters. These parameters may be varied according to available
facilities.
Column
LiChrospher C18, 5m, length 25 cm x i.d. 0.4
cm or equivalent.
Mobile phase
Acetonitrile -water gradient
Flow rate
l.0 mL/min.
127
Oven temperature :
40C
Injection volume :
25L
Detector UV
270 max.
Microlitre syringes of 25 L capacity
Glass apparatus such as storage bottle, columns etc.
2. Reagents
AF
Acetonitrile HPLC grade or equivalent

Water HPLC grade or equivalent
Dichlormethane, finely distilled
n-hexane, finely distilled
Ethyl acetate, finely distilled

Methanol AR grade
Dilute sulphuric acid 0.1 N
Sodium sulphate AR grade or equivalent

Celite 545, as filter aid
Florisil 60/100 mesh, deactivated with 5% water
Cotton wool, chemically pure
Imidacloprid reference standard of known purity
Amberlite XAD-4 resins, 20-50 mesh.
128
3.
Extraction
(I) Plant material with higher water content such as fruits and vegetables,
dry samples (Low moisture) containing no fats or waxes :
Transfer a suitable quantity (about 50 g of plant material or or dry samples)
finely ground, into a 1 liter storage bottle. Add 300 mL methanol/water (3:1 v/v)
mixture and 5 mL dilute sulphuric acid and allow to soak for 30 minutes.
Homogenise the mixture for 3 min. into a waring blender. Add 10-15 g Celite
545 9filter aid) and filter through a fast suction filter fitted with a fast filter paper
AF
and another 10 g of filter aid. Rinse the bottle with about 100 mL methanol /
water mixture (3:1 v/v). Transfer the filtrate into a 500 mL volumetric flask and
make up the volume up to the mark with methanol. Pipette out an aliquot of this
solution (100 mL of 50 g of sample, 200 mL for 25 g of sample etc.) into a 1 L
round bottom flask and concentratato about 20 mL on a rotary vacuum
evaporator at temperature not exceeding 60C. The aqueous residue is further
subjected to a clean up method as described in 4.
(II) Dry samples containing fats and waxes

Transfer a suitable quantity (about 50 g of plant material of dry samples) finely
ground, into a 1 liter storage bottle. Add 300 mL methanol/water (3/1 v/v)
mixture and 5 mL dilute sulphuric acid and allow to soak for 30 minutes.
Homogenise the mixture for 3 min. into a waring blender. Add 10-15 g Celite
545 (filter aid) and filter through a fast suction filterfitted with a fast filter paper
and another 10 g of filter aid. Rinse the bottle with about 100 mL methanol/
water mixture (3.1 v/v). Transfer the filtrate into a 500 mL volumetric flask and
make up the volume upto the mark with methanol. Pipette out an aliquot of this
solution (100 mL for 50 g of sample, 200 mL for 25 g of sample etc.) into a 1 L
129
round bottom flask and concentrate to about 20 mL on a rotary vacuum

evaporator at temperature not exceeding 60C. Dilute the aqueous residue with
100 mL of water and transfer to 500 mL separating funnel. Extract 3 time with
100 mL of n-hexane and discard the hexane phase. Transfer the aqueous phase
quantitatively into a 1 liter round bottom flask and again concentrate to about
100 mL with the help of rotary vacuum evaporator at a temperature not
exceeding 60C ensuring complete removal of n-hexane. The aqueous residue is
further subjected to a clean up method as described in 4.
AF
(III) Oils
Dissolve 10 g of oil sample in 100 mL of n-hexane and extract 3 times with

50mL of water in a 250 mL separating funnel. Collect the aqueous phases in a
500 mL round bottom flask. Any foamy intermediate phase developed during
extraction is left with hexane phases and discarded. Concentrate the combined
aqueous phases on a rotary vacuum evaporator at a temperature not exceeding
60C to remove traces of n-hexane.
Use 50 mL of aqueous phase for determination of Imidacloprid residue after

concentrating to about 40 mL by using rotary vacuum evaporator at a
temperature not exceeding 60C.
4. Cleanup
Clean up by column chromatography on XAD-4 resin.

(I) Column with 10 g XAD-4 resin
Place 30 mL methanol in a 100 mL glass beaker and suspend in to 10 g of
Amberlite XAD-4. Allow to settle. Decant the turbid supernatant liquid. Repeat
the procedure by resuspending the resin and fill into a chromatographic column
130
having an inner diameter of 10 mm. Allow the methanol to percolate upto the
top of the column bed which is then plug by cotton wool. Rinse the column
further with 50 mL methanol and 100 mL water. Apply the aqueous solution
from 3.1 to the top of the column and allow to percolate slowly (Dropping rate
about 2 mL /min.) Rinse the flask with 20 mL of water and also apply the
rinsing to the column. Flush the column further with 20 mL water with about 5
mL/min. rate of elution. Discard all the aqueous washing. Elute the residues with
100 mL methanol. Use the elute for determination of imidacloprid as described
Column with 25 g XAD-4 resin
AF
(II)
in 5.
Place 50 mL methanol in a 100 mL glass beaker and suspend into it 25 g of

Amberlite XAD- 4. Allow to settle. Decant the turbid supernatant liquid. Repeat
the procedure by resuspending the resin and fill into a chromatographic column
having an inner diameter of 20 mm. Allow the methanol to percolate upto the
top of the column bed which is then plug by cotton wool. Rinse the column
further with 125 mL methanol and 250 mL water. Apply the aqueous solution
from 3.4 to the top of the column and allow to percolate slowly (Dropping rate
aboute 5 mL/min.). Rinse the flask with 50 mL of water with about 5 mL/ min.
rate of elution. Discard all the aqueous washings. Elute the residues with 250
mL methanol. Use the elute for determination of imidacloprid as described in 5.
5. Determination of imidacloprid residues
Liquid-liquid partitioning on diatomaceous earth (e.g. ChemElut 2050).
Concentrate the methanolic residue from clean up step to 5 mL using a rotary
vacuum evaporator at temperature not exceeding 60C. Dissolve further in 20-25
mL water. Apply this solution as well as the aqueous solution to a disposable
131
extraction column containing diatomaceous earth. Total volume should not

exceed to 50 mL. Wait for 15 minute after a complete percolation to ensure
uniform distribution of aqueous phase onto the column. Elute the column 4
times with dichloromethane, the first 50 mL dichlormethane being used to rinse
the flask. Concentrate the elute just to the point of dryness on a rotary vacuum
evaporator at a temperature not exceeding 60C.
Column chromatography on Florisil

Fill the chromatographic column (i.d. 10 mm) with 50 mL of ethyl acetate. Add
column gently.
AF
10 g of Florisil (deactivated by adding 5% water) slowly by knocking the
Cover the column further with 0.5 g sodium sulphate. Drain the solvent upto the
sodium sulphate layer.
Dissolve the residue from above 5.0 in 2 mL of ethyl acetate and apply carefully
to column and allow to percolate. Rinse the flask with 2 mL of ethyl acetate and
apply the rinsing also to the column. Flush the column with 100 mL ethyl
acetate, the first 20 mL being used to rinse the flask again.
Elute imidacloprid with 25 mL acetonitrile. Evaporate the elute to dryness on a

rotary vacuum evaporator. Dissolve the residue in 1 mL of acetonitrile /water 1:1
v/v).
Measure the imidacloprid content as described below.

132
Determination
of
imidacloprid
using
High
Performance
Liquid
Chromatography
Principle
The solution of the residue extracted from the sample after clean up is estimated
high performance liquid chromatographically in an instrument equipped with
UV detector. The imidacloprid content in the sample is determined by
comparing the response with the response of a known standard of similar
AF
concentration.
Inject 25 L tof the sample solution after a standard solution with a

concentration of 1g/mL. If the concentration of the sample solutions too high,
then dilute suitably using acetonitrate and inject again. Identify the peak of
imidacloprid in standard as well as sample solution and determine the peak
areas.
6. Calculation
A1 x V2 x V3 x D x C
Residue of imidacloprid (g/g) = -----------------------------------A2 x V1 x M
Where,
A1
Peak area of the sample
A2
Peak area of the standard
V1
Volume in microlitre of the sample injected
V2
Volume in microlitre of the standard injected

133
V3
Total volume in mL of the sample solution
Dilution factor for sample solution
Concentration in ppm of the standard solution
Mass of the sample taken for analysis
Note: Percent mean recovery is dermined by taking untreated control sample to
which a known amount of imidacloprid is added and analysed as described
References:
AF
above.
1. F.J.PleckeandE. Weber. Pflanzenschutz-NochricktenBayer46(1993).pp. 109182.
2. Pesticide Research Journal, 17 (1), 46-50 (2005).
134
PRETILACHLOR
Principle of the method
Milled grains are extracted with acetonitrile in a high speed homogenizer. Plant
material is extracted with methanol in a high speed homogenizer. The extracted
grains are cleaned up by acetonitrile, n-hexane partition. The methanol extracts

of soil samples and plant materials are diluted with water and cleaned up by
water- methanol/n-hexane partition. The hexane phase is evaporated and the
AF
residue of the organic phase is cleaned up by alumina column chromatography

prior to the final determination by gas chromatography.
Extraction and cleanup:
Apparatus and reagents
Alumina basic, (Woelm Eschwege, W. Germany) W 200, activity grade V

(19% water added).
Rotating evaporator (type Rotavapor R, Buchi, Flawil SG, Switzerland) or

equivalent.
Soil homogenizing machine: e.g. planetary blender (type Artofex, F.

Aeschbach AG, Aarau, Switzerland) or equivalent.
Cross beater mill (type SK1, retsch KG, Haan Westfalen, W. Germany) or
equivalent. Food cutter (Mod. 8181 or 8481, Hobart Manufacturing
Company, Troy, Ohio, USA) or equivalent.
Food cutter (Mod. 8181 or 8481, Hobart manufacturing company, Troy,
Ohio, USA) or equivalent.
135
High speed homogenizer (type ultra-Turrax, Janke and Kunkel KG,

Staufen i. Br. W. Germany) or equivalent.
Shaker, mechanical to accommodate 500 mL wide mouth jars (A. Kuhner,
Basel, Switzerland) or equivalent.
Fluted filterpaper (type LS 14 1/2, Schleicher and Schuell, Germany).
All organic solvents redistilled in glass or analytical grade.
Grain
AF
Extraction
Sodium chloride solution, saturated.
Add 200 mL acetonitrile to 100 g of milled grains and macerate with the high
speed blender "Ultra Turrax" or equivalent for 3-4 min. in a 500 mL widemouth
jar. Shake the tightly closed jar for 2 hours with a mechanical shaker; filter the
slurry through a fluted filter paper. Rinse jar and filtercake twice with 30 mL
acetonitrile. Adjust volume to 300 mL and take an aliquot of 100 mL
corresponding to 50 g of crop material.
Other plant materials
Shared the entire laboratory sample with a food cutter. Weigh a subsample of
100 g, add 200 mL methanol and macerate with the high speed blender "Ultra
Turrax" or equivalent for 3-4 min. in a 500 mL wide mouth jar. Shake the tightly
closed jar for 2 hours with a mechanical shaker. Filter the slurry through a fluted
filter paper. Rinse jar and filtercake twice with 40 mL methanol. Adjust volume
to 300 mL and taken an aliquot of 150 mL corresponding to 50 g.
136
Partitioning
Grain
Transfer the 100 mL sample aliquot to 1000 mL. The active ingredient is reextracted from the acetonitrile phase after addition of 500 mL water and 25 mL
sodium chloride solution with three 100 cm portions of n-hexane by vigorously
3 shaking the separatory funnel for at least 2 min during each extraction. The nhexane phases are collected, filtered through a plug of cotton and evaporated
AF
Soil samples and plant materials
to dryness using a rotating evaporator, water bath temperature 40C.
Transfer the corresponding aliquots to a 500 mL sepaatory funnel and add

200mL water and 20 mL sodium chloride solution. Extract the aqueous solution
three times with 70 mL n-hexane each by vigorously shaking the separatory
funnel at lest 2 min during each extraction. The n-hexane phases are collected,
filtered through a plug of cotton and evaporated to dryness using a rotating

evaporator, water bath temperature 40C.
Column cleanup
Fill a chromatographic column 1.8 cm inner diameter, with n-hexane. Add

alumina basic, activity grade V, to a height of 7 cm. Drain the solvent to the top
of the alumina. Dissolve the residue to 5 mL n-hexane. Transfer this solution to
the column. Rinse the flask twice with 5 mL of n-hexane and transfer each
portion to the column. Rinse the column with 100 mL of n-hexane. Discard this
eluate. Elute the active ingredient with 100 mL of a mixture of n-hexane/
ethylether (2+1). Collect the eluate and evaporate to dryness in a rotating
evaporator at a water bath temperature of 40C. Transfer the residue with ethyl
137
ether to 10 mL vials and evaporate to drynes in a stream of clean air. Dissolve

the residue for gas chromatographic determination in 2 mL n-hexane-ethanol
(1+1).
Final Determination:
Analyse by GLC using the following conditions:
Capillary Chromatographic Separation Parameters:

:
Gas
Chromatographic
system
AF
Instrument
with
communication Module
Detector
Column used
: Electron Capture Detector
: DB-5 capillary column of 30m length 0.53 mm

Internal Diameter and 1.5 m film
thickness) or equivalent
Gas flow rate
Nitrogen (Carrier) -
8 mL/minute
Makeup (Nitrogen)
Oven
200 C
Injector
230 C
Detector
250 C
Volume injected
1 L
Range
1
138
40 mL/min
Current
1 nA
Injection Mode
Split
Split ratio
Purge
1
Vent

-
6.1 min
Pretilachlor
Alternatively:
0.004 ppm
AF
Minumum detectable concentration
GLC with alkali flame ionization detector (AFID) with Rubidium sulfate pellet
(Varian Aerograph, Walnut Creek, California, USA).
Gases: Hydrogen, flow rate 35 cm3/min. Air, flow rate 230 cm3/min.
Temperature: 240C. Sensitivity: 4.1Q-12 afs Injection volume: 1 L

Chromatographic column: Glass, 50 cm length, 2 mm i.d., packed with 10% OV
101 on Gas Chrom Q, acid washed, DMCS treated, size 150-180 m.
139
Calculation
L of the standard
injected
Residue (mg/kg) =-------------------------------- x -----------------------------------Peak height of the standard
injected
reference standard
Reference
AF
Final volume of the sample

extract (mL)
--------------------------------------Mass in g of the sample
CIBA Geigy Limited Agrochemical Division.
140
ISOPROTHIOLANE
Principle
Food samples are extracted with benzene-acetone solvent mixture by shaking on
a mechanical shaker. The plant material to be analysed is extracted by blending
in a high speed blender with benzene-acetone.
Cleanup is achieved by liquid partitioning from acetonitrile to hexane followed

by chromatography on a Florisil column. Isoprothiolane rsidues are determined
Experimental
Apparatus
AF
using Gas Chromatograph with electron capture detector (ECD).
Analytical balance with sensitivity of 0.1 mg
Top loading balance with sensitivity of 1 mg
Gas chromatography (GC) with Electron capture Detector (ECD).
The gas Chromatograph shall be equipped with electron capture detector

(ECD) and connected to a PC-based data system. The following operating
parameters are suggested, which can be changed provided standardisation
is done :
Column
100cm x 0.2 cm Pyrex spiral column containing
3% OV- 1 on chromosorb W(HP)

Temperaure
Injector250C
Detector
260C
141
Column oven
210C
Gas flow rates
Nitrogen (Carrier gas) : 35 mL/min.
Detector
Electron capture Detector (eCD)
Retention time
6.0min
Sensitivity
range - 4, Attenuation - 4
10 L
Microlitre syringe :
Capillary Chromatographic Conditions:
AF
Isoprothiolane :
Instrument
Gas Chromatograph Model equipped with

auto injector coupled with computer and
Class GC-10 software.
Detector
Electron Capture Detector
DB-1, Megabore Column (30m length x
Column
0.53mm I.D. x 1.5 film thickness).
Gas flow rate
Carrier Gas Helium
Oven Initial -
210 C
Injector
240 C
Detector
260 C
Volume injected
1 L
Injection Mode
Split
142
7mL/min
Split ratio
1 :10
Solvent
Acetone

Isoprothiolane
7.4 min
Other instruments:
Rotary evaporative concentrator
AF
Sample Grinder
Waring Blender or Equivalent
Mechanical shaker
Chromatographic tubes, 18 mm x 450 mm

Buchner funnel
Separatory funnel
Reagents
Reference standard of known purity of isoprothiolane

Benzene
Acetone
Acetonitrile
n-hexane
diethyl ether
Sodium chloride
143
Sodium sulfate
Florisil, 60-80 mesh
Sample preparation
Finely chop the sample fruits, vegetables, forages, straw, etc. and mix well in a
Standard solution
mixer grinder. Using a suitable grinder mill and mill samples of rice grains.
AF
Prepare 100g/mL stock solutionby dissolving 0.01g reference isoprothiolone

standard in 100 mL benzene. For GC determinations prepare 100 mL working
standard solution by taking a suitable aliquot form the above solution into 100
mL volumetric flask and diluting them with benzene.
Extraction
Plant material
Weigh representative 50 g samples of plant material into a 500 mL wide mouth
jar, add 100 mL of benzene-acetone (50:50, v/v) solvent mixture and blend in a
high speed waring blender for 2 minutes. Filter the mixture through a Buchner
funnel using Whatman No. 1 filter paper. Re-extract the sample twice with 100
mL benzene-acetone (50:50 v/v) and pool the filtrate together after rinsing the
filter cake twice with 20 mL of the same solvent mixture. Combine the extracts
and concentrate to about 5 mL in a vacuum rotary evaporator with water bath at

40C.
Water
Extract the water sample directly in partitioning step
144
Clean up
Partitioning
Plant material
Add 20 mL acetonitrile to the extract and transfer the concentrated extract/
filtrate quantitatively into a separatory funnel using another 20 mL of
acetonitrile. Add 30 mL hexane and shake for 5 minutes. Allow the layers to
separate and draw the acetonitrile layer into another separatory funel containing
200 mL of 10% sodium chloride solution. Extract with two 50 mL portions of

hexane and combine them. Dry with anhydrous sodium sulfate and evaporate to
Water
AF
near dryness on a rotary evaporator with water bath at 40C.
Use a 250 mL sample of water. Transfer the entire sample into a 500 mL
separatory funnel and add 50 mL of saturated sodium chloride solution. Extract
the contents by partitioning thrice with 100 mL portions of hexane. Collect the
upper organic layer (i.e. hexane) each time after passing through anhydrous
sodium sulfate and concentrate to near dryness in a vacuum rotary evaporator
using water both at 40C and take directly for GC analysis.
For clean-up by adsorption column chromatography, place a cotton plug at the
bottom of a chromatographic tube and pack it with 2 g anhydrous sodium

sulfate, 15 g Florisil and 2 g anhydrous sodium sulfate in tandem using benzene.
Drain the excess solvent from the column until the level falls to the top of the
packing. Transfer the residue from the above step quantitatively using three 5
mL portions of benzene and wash the column with 100 mL of benzene and
145
discard the eluate. Now elute the column with 100 mL of benzene-diethyl ether
(33.67, v/v) solvent mixture, collect the eluate and concentrate to dryness at
40C using rotary evaporator.
Estimation
Dissolve the residue derived from the above step in benzene and dilute to
Calculations
AF
conditions described earlier.
Isoprothiolane residue g/g (ppm) =
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
-------------------------------A2 x V1 x M
Where,
suitable volume. Inject 1 L of this solution into GC operated under the
A1
- Peak area of the sample
V2
- Volume in L of standard isoprothiolane
V3
Total volume, in mL of sample solution
A2
- Peak area of standard Isoprothiolane
V1
Concentration in g/g of the standard isoprothiolane solutions
Volume in L of sample solution injected
- Mass in g, of sample taken for analysis
Reference
Zwig, G, Icanouchi, M. and Tamahiro, Hattari. Analytical methods for pesticides
and plant growth regulator. Academic Press, New York, pp. 229-236 (1978).
146
FOSETYL ALUMINIUM
Outline of the method

Fosetyl-aluminium and its main metabolite, phosphorus acid, are extracted from
plant material with dilute tartaric acid. Water samples are acidified with tartaric
acid. An aliquot of the plant extract, or the acidified water samples, are diluted
with isopropanol. After methylation with a diazomethane solution in diethyl
phosphonates are
ether, the resulting O-ethyl O-methyl and O,O-dimethyl
determined by gas chromatography using a phosphorus-specific flame
Apparatus
AF
photometric detector.
Homogenizer
Laboratory centrifuge with 250 mL glass tubes

Glass funnel, 9 cm dia.
Volumetric flasks, 100 mL, 50 mL and 5 mL

Round-bottomed flask, 50 mL, with ground joint
Methylation apparatus Fig. 1
Gas chromatograph equipped with phosphorus specific flame
photometric detector
Microsyringe 10 L
Reagents
Diethyl ether, high purity, dried over calcium chloride
147
2-propanol (isopropanol),
Isopropanol + water mixture 9 : 1 v/v
Fosetyl standard solutions for recovery experiments: 1, 10, 100 and
1000g/mL fosetyl aluminium or phosphorus acid in water.
Derivative standard solutions: Prepare solutions of 100 g/mL of
fosetyl-aluminium and phosphorus acid, respectively, in isopropanolwater mixture (dissolve fosetyl aluminium in water and dilute with
isopropanol to yield a solution containing isopropanol and water in the

proportion 9 : 1 v/v). Transfer 10 mL each of these solutions into
AF
volumetric flasks, Add 25 L of tartaric acid, make up to 100 mL with

isopropanol-water mixture and shake.
Derivatize 5 mL of the solutions as described under methylation.

Concentrate the reaction mixtures to 3 mL, transfer to 5 mL volumetric
flasks and make up to 5 mL with isopropanol. Dilute these solutions
progressively to obtain solutions containing O-ethyl O-methyl
phosphonate or O,O-dimethyl phosphonate equivalent to 0.01, 0.02,

0.05, 0.08, 0.1, 0.15 and 0.2 g/mL of fosetyl aluminium or
phosphorus acid.
Ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution; Dissolve 7 g KOH p.a. in 10

mL water and make up to 100 mL with ethanol.
Diazomethane solution in diethyl ether (for apparatus see Fig. 1 at page

296).
Dissolve 1.2 g N-methyl-N-nitroso-p-toluenesulphonamide in 10 mL
diethyl ether and transfer to the dropping funnel. Slowly add this
solution dropwise to 5 mL ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution
contained
in the
reaction
vessel, and
sweep the generated
diazomethane into 20 mL diethyl ether, using a gentle stream of

148
nitrogen, while the receiver containing the ether is cooled in an ice +

sodium chloride freezing mixture
Glass wool.
Cotton wool, exhaustively extracted with acetone
Air, synthetic
Procedure
Extraction
AF
Nitrogen, re-purified.
Hydrogen, re-purified
Vegetables and fruits
Weigh 50 g of the analytical sample (G) into a centrifuge tube, add 50 mL .1M
tartaric acid (VEx) and homogenize for 1-2 min. Centrifuge for 15 min at 2500
rpm. Filter the supernatant through glass wool, transfer 5 mL of the filtrate (VR)
into a volumetric flask, and make up to 50 mL (V^) with isopropanol. Shake
the solution and filter through cottonwool to remove precipitated material.
Methylation
Transfer 5 mL (VR3) of the solution into a 50 mL round bottomed flask and add
diazomethane solution (5-10 mL) until produced yellow colour remains. Stopper
the flask and allow to stand for 15 min with occasional swirling. Remove excess
diazomethane and concentrate to approx 3 mL with gentle stream of nitrogen.
149
Gas-chromatographic determination
Quantitatively transfer the solution into a volumetric flask and make up to an
appropriate volume (VEnd) e.g. 5 mL, with isopropanol. Inject an aliquot of this
solution (V.) into the gas chromatograph
Column : Glass, 2 mm i.d., i.e. 2 m long; packed with 15%

carbowax 20 M on Chromosorb 750, 100-120 mesh
AF
Column temperature : 130C Injection

Port temperature : 200C
Detector: Flame photometric detector, Model SSD 250, equipped

with 526 nm phosphorus filter.
Temperature: 175C.
Gas flow rates: Nitrogen carrier, 90 mL/min; Hydrogen 60

mL/min.; Air 200 mL/min.
Attenuation: 1-32
Recorder: 10 mV; chart speed 5 mm/min.

Injection volume: 5 L
Retention times for dimethyl phosphonate: 3 min. ethyl methyl
phosphonate: 3 min. 36 s.
Recoveries and limit of determinationThe recoveries from untreated
control samples, fortified with fosetyl- aluminium and phosphorous
acid at levels of 0.1 to 10 mg/kg, ranged from 72 to 120% for plant
150
material and tap water, and averaged 97%. Blanks usually were less
than 0.1 mg/kg. Strawberries and grapes occasionally gave blanks
corresponding to 0.2 and 0.9 mg/kg phosphorus acid, respectively.
The limit of determination was in the range of 0.1 to 1 mg/kg for all
materials tested.
Calculation of residues
AF
calculated from the following equations :
The residue R, expressed in mg/kg fosetyl-aluminium or phosphorus acid, is
WA. (VEx + x) VR2 . VEnd
for plant material R =
--------------------------------------- x 0.93
VR1.VR3. Vi. G
WA . VR2 . VEnd
End for water R = ------------------------------ x 0.93
VR3 . Vi. G
Where,
G
- Sample weight (in g)
= portion of the sample weight (plant material) (in g)
VEx
volume of dilute sulphuric acid used for extraction for sample (in mL)
VR1 - portion of filtrate (before dilution with isopropanol) used for further
processing (in mL)
VR2 - volume of solution after dilution with isopropanol
VR3 - portion of volume V^ used for methylation
151
VEnd - terminal volume of sample solution

Vi. - portion of volume
VEnd injected into gas chromatograph (in IJ)
WA - amount of fosetyl aluminium of phosphorus acid, respectively for V. read
from calibration curve (in mg)
0.93 - factor for conversion of fosetyl aluminium to fosetyl (not required for
phoshorus acid residues)
conditions:
AF
The residues can also be determined using the following LC-MS/MS
Analysis of Fosetyl Al by LC-MS/MS
: C18 (Licrocart * RP 18 150 mm x 4.6 mm, 5 )
LC column
LC conditions
: A- 5 mM Ammonium formate in water
Mobile phase
B- 5 mM Ammonium formate in 90% Methanol + 10% water
: 0.8 mL/ min
Flow rate
Gradient program:
Time (min) Flow Rate(L/min)
A (%) B (%) C (%) D (%) TE#1 TE#2
0.0
1000.00
80.0 20.0 0.0
0.0
open open
0.5
1000.00
80.0 20.0 0.0
0.0
open open
3.0
1000.00
20.0 80.0 0.0
0.0
open open
5.0
1000.00
20.0 80.0 0.0
0.0
open open
152
7.0
1000.00
80.0 20.0 0.0
0.0
open open
11.0
1000.00
80.0 20.0 0.0
0.0
open open
Mass Parameters for API 2000 mass spectrometer:

Ionization of fosetyl Al occurs in negative ionization mode. The negative-ion
electrospray full-scan spectrum of fosetyl shows a peak at m/z 109,
corresponding to the molecular weight of the fosetyl anion. The MS/MS

spectrum shows an important fragment at m/z 81 (Quantifier ion), the product of
a McLafferty rearrangement. By increasing the collision energy a minor
AF
fragment, at m/z 63 (Qualifier ion), due to the loss of ethanol was obtained.
Period 1
Experiment 1:
---------------------------------------Scan Type:
MRM (MRM)
Negative
Polarity:
Scan Mode:
N/A
Ion Source:
Turbo Spray
Resolution Q1: Unit

Resolution Q3: Unit
MR Pause:
5.0070 msec
Q1 Mass (Da) Q3 Mass (Da) Dwell(msec) Param Start

109.00
81.00
200.00
Stop ID
CE
-12.00 -12.00
CXP
-4.00
Q1 Mass (Da) Q3 Mass (Da) Dwell(msec) Param Start

109.00
63.00
200.00
153
-4.00
StopID
CE
-36.00
-36.00
CXP
-14.00
-14.00
Parameter Table (Period 1 Experiment 1)

------------------------------------------------------CUR:
20.00
CAD:
IS:
-4500.00
450.00 (Source temperature in 0C)
GS1:
30.00
GS2:
60.00
ihe:
ON
DP
-16.00
FP
-270.00
EP
-12.00
AF
TEM:
CEP
Reference:
6.00
-10.00
1. A. Bertrandsh. Determination of residues of phosphorus acid and ethyl
phosphorate in lettuces. Method No. 22-29, Rhone-Poulene Agrochimia

1979.
2. IS 14162 : 1994. Pesticide determination of Fosetyl-AI residues in

agricultural and food commodities. Indian Standard IS 14162. 1994.
154
PROPICONAZOLE
Principle
Propiconazole residues are extracted from cereal green matter and grapes with
methanol, and from grains, straw and soil with a mixture of methanol and water.
The filtered extract is diluted with water and saturated sodium chloride solution,
and propiconazole is partitioned into dichloromethane. Water is diluted with
saturated sodium chloride solution, and extracted with dichloromethane. The

dichloromethane extracts are rotary-evaporated to dryness. The residue is
Apparatus
AF
cleaned up by column chromatography on aluminium oxide.
High speed blender fitted with leak-proof glass jar and explosion
proof motor
Homogenizer
Wide neck bottle, 500-mL with ground stopper

Buchner procelain funnel, 9 cm dia.
Filter paper, 9 cm dia, e.g.Macherey-Nagel No. 713
Filtration flask, 1-1
Separatory funnel 1-1
Round bottom flasks, 300 mL, 100 mL and 25 mL with ground
joints.
155
Rotary vacuum evaporator, 40C bath temperature

Test tubes, 10 mL with ground stoppers
Glass syringe, 10 mL with Luer lock fitting
Chromatographic tube, 20 mm i.d. 30 cm long
Gas chromatograph equipped with thermionic nitrogen specific
Reagents
AF
Microsyringe, 10 L
detector
Cyclohexane,
Dichloromethane
Ethanol
Ethyl acetate
n-hexane
Methanol high purity

Toluene
Cyclohexane + ethyl acetate mixture 1:1 v/v

Eluting mixture 1 : dichloromethane + n-hexane 4:6 v/v
Eluting mixture 2 : dichloromethane + n-hexane 6 : 4 v/v
Ethanol + n-hexane mixture 1:1 v/v
Methanol + water mixture 8:2 v/v
156
Propiconazole standard solutions; 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 10.0 g/mL

in ethanol hexane mixture
Sodium chloride solution saturated
Aluminium oxide, activity
grade V : To 100 g Alumina Woelm B Super I (ICN Biomedicals)

in a 300 mL Erlenmyer flask (with ground joint), add 19 mL
water dropwise from a burette, with continuous swirling.
Immediately stopper flask with ground stopper, shake vigorously
until all lumps have disappeared, and then store in a tightly

stoppered container for at least 2 h, 200-400 mesh.
AF
Dry ice
Cottonwool
Compressed air, dried and re-purified

Nitrogen, re-purified
Procedure
Extraction
Green plant matter, grains, straw grapes

Weigh 50g grapes, 50 g milled grains, 20 g milled straw or 10 g of the other
homogenized analytical material (G) into a wide neck bottle. Add 200 mL
methanol or 200 mL methanol-water mixture for samples of grains, straw and
soil. Tightly stopper the bottle, and shake for 1 h on a mechanical shaker,
suction-filter through a Buchner procelain funnel, and wash the filter cake with
two 25 mL portions of methanol. Transfer the filtrates to a separatory funnel.
Add 200 mL water and 50 mL sodium chloride solution, and extract three times
157
with 75 mL protions of dichloromethane. Filter the dichloromethane phases

through a cottonwool plug into a 300 mL round bottomed flask, and rotaryevaporate to dryness. Discard the water phase. Proceed for cleanup of the
residue.
Water
Place 500 mL water (G) in a separately funnel, add 50 mL sodium chloride
solution, and extract successively with three 75 mL portions of dichloromethane.

Filter the dichloromethane phases through a cottonwool plug into a 300 mL
AF
round bottomed flask, androtary-evaporate to dryness.
Pour 15 mL hexane into the chromatographic tube. Slowly add 30 g aluminium

oxide (free from air bubbles). Allow to settle and thendrain the hexane to the top
of the column packing. Transfer the residue to column, using three 2 mL

portions of toluene to complete the transfer. Drain the toluene to the top of
thecolumn packing each time. Elute co-extractives with 50 mL of eluting
mixture 1 and then elute propiconazole with 75 mL of eluting mixture 2, using a

flow rate of 1 to 2 drops per s. Collect the eluate in a 100 mL round bottomed
flask, and rotary evaporate to dryness.
Gas-chromatogrpahic determination
Dissolve the residue derived in 2 mL ethanol hexane mixture, and dilute to a
suitable volume (VEnd).Inject an aliquot of this solution (V.) into the gas
chromatograph.
158
:
With Nitrogen specific detector ( NPD/TID)
Column
Glass, 2 mm i.d. 1.5 m long; packed with 3% CP

Wax 40M on Gas Chrom Q, 80-100 mesh
(chrom-pack)
Column temperature
245C
Injection port temperature:
250C
Temperature
250C
Gas flow rates
Nitrogen carrier, 36 mL/min
Gas chromatograph
AF
Hydrogen 3 mL/min
Air 50mL/min
Attenuation
16
1mV; chart speed 10 mm/min
Injection volume
2L
Retention time for

propiconazole
2min 20 s
Recorder
Reference:
Mannual of Pesticide Residues analyusis Vol.II (1992) Edited by Hens Peter

Their (281-286)
159
DITHIOCARBAMATES
a) This analytical method pescribes the spectrophotometric method for

determination of residues of any of the following dithiocarbamate residues in
Ferbam;
(b)
Ziram;
(c)
Thiram;
(d)
Maneb;
(e)
Zineb;
(f)
Mancozeb; and
(g)
Nabam
AF
(a)
food commodities.
This method has a detection limit of 0.01 g/g (0.01 ppm).
b) Principle
A representative sample of the commodity is blended with deaerated ice-water in

a predetermined ratio (normally 1:1, m/v) under nitrogen and an appropriate
aliquot of the homogenised material is decomposed with sulphuric acid. The
evolved carbon disulphide is absorbed in Vile's reagent. The intensity of the
resulting colour complex is measured spectrophotometrically at 380 nm and the
absorbance compared by means of a standard curve.
160
c) Apparatus
Absorption train (Fig. 1)
d) Reagents
Vile's Reagent
Dissolve 0.05 g cupric acetate, monohydrate in 25 mL water in a 1000 mL
volumetric flask. Add 800 mL ethanol, 1 mL diethylamine and 20 mL

triethanolamine. Make up the volume to the mark with ethanol.
AF
Ethanol
95per cent (v/v), alternatively absolute alcohol may be used.

Lead acetate solution
30 percent aqueous solution (m/v)
Disodium Ethylenedinitrotrichloro Tetra Acetate (EDTA) Solution

Dissolve 33 g EDTA in 800 mL water in a 1000 mL volumetric flask and
dilute to mark with water.
Sulphuric Acid-ION
Reference standard of the Dithiocarbamate of known purity.
Chloroform
Glass re-distilled
e) Method
i) Preparation of standard solution:
161
Prepare a solution so as to contain 20 gof the dithiocarbamate per milliliter of

chloroform (See notes 1, 2 and 3).
Notes:
1.
If the dithiocarbamate is thiram /ferbam/ziram, 0.04g of the active

ingredient shall be dissolved in 100 mL chloroform and dilute the
2.
resultant solution to 100 mL with chloroform

For maneb, mancozeb and zineb, prepare the standard solution as
described in Note I but use EDTA solution as solvent.
For nabam, prepare the soluion as described in Note I/Note 2, but
AF
3.
use water as solvent.
ii) Preparation of Blank solution
Take 12.5 mL Vile's reagent and add 100 mL ethanol.
iii) Preparation of standard curve and calibration

Transfer 10 mL standard solution of the dithiocarbamate into a 500 mL
distillation flask of the decomposition absorption train (figure1). Add 10 mL
lead acetate solution to the first absorption tower. Add 200 mL water to the
distillation flask and assemble the train leaving the vaccum source disconnected.
Heat the flask to 85-90C temperature, leaving the contents just short of boiling.
Apply gentle vacuum continuously and add 40 mL boiling sulphuric acid
through the dropping funnel and reflux for 30-45 minute.
162
Note:
1. When chloroform is used for preparation of reference standard solution of
the dithiocarbamate, remove the solvent by passing a stream of nitrogen at
room temperature. This step is not necessary if EDTA or water has been
used for preparation of the reference standard solution of the
dithiocarbamate.
AF
maneb, zineb, ad mancozeb.
2. Use 60 mL sulphuric acid for digestion for dithiocarbamate such as
iv) Drain the contents of the tower containing Vile's reagent to a 25
mL
volumetric flask. Wash the tower with several 3-4 mL portions of the ethanol to
ensure complete quantitative transfer and collect the washings in the flask. Make
up the volume to mark with ethanol.
v) Transfer separately 2.0, 3.0, 5.0 and 8.0 mL portions of the standard solution
of the dithiocarbamate into the 500 mL distillation flask and follow the digestion
procedure described in d (iii).
vi) Measure the absorbances of the standard solution in 1 cm cell at 380 nm

using blank solution prepared as described in d (iv). Prepare the standard curve
by plotting the absorbances in the graph against corresponding dithiocarbamate
content.
f)Estimation:
163
Select a sample to contain 20-160 g of the dithiocarbamate. Transfer the sample

to the 500 mL distillation flask of the decomposition absorption train. Add 10
mL lead acetate solution to the first absorption tower, 12.5 mL Vile's reagent to
the second tower and 200 mL water to distillation flask and digest as described
in d (iii).
Prepare the solution of the evolved carbon disulphide according to the procedure
1.
AF
Notes:
described in d. (iii) and measure the absorbance as described in d (vi).
Water is added to the distillation flask if thiram/ ferban/ziaram/ nabam

residues have to be determined.
2.
200mL EDTA is added to the distillation flask if maneb/zineb/mancozeb

residues have to be determined. 60 mL sulphuric acid is added and
procedures and described in d (i), d (ii), d (iii) and d (iv) have to be
followed.
g) Determine the dithiocarbamate residues in the sample using the appropriate

calibration curve.
h)
Calculation Dithiocarbamate content (g/g)

= g of dithiocarbamate in the sample / Mass in g of sample taken for test
164
4. Determination of Recovery factor

Fortify 50 g of the fresh commodity (not previously treated with
dithiocarbamate) with about 500 g/l of the dithiocarbamate. Blend with water
(1:1, m/v) to obtain a homogenous mixture.
Weigh 200 g of the blended material (containing about 40 g/g of the

dithiocarbamate) in a 500 mL distillation flask. Add 100 mL of EDTA and
reflux with 40-60 mL of ION sulphuric acid by following the procedures
i) Calculation
AF
described in d (iii) measure the absorbance at 380 nm.
Recovery factor, percent

=
Mass in g of the dithiocarbamate in treated sample/ (Mass in g of
dithiocarbamate added to material
Note:
85 100 percent recoveries of 0.1 -70 Lg /g have been observed in a
variety of substrates.
References
1. Indian Standard IS 13832: 1993.
2. Kepple, G.E. J. AOAC 54 : 529 (1979). U.S. Food and Drug
Administration
3. Laboratory. Information Bulletin 3401 (1984).
165
AF
166
PROCEDURE FOR THE GAS-CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF

DITHIOCARBAMATE RESIDUES IN VEGETABLE, FRUIT AND
CEREAL PRODUCTS
Scope:
The procedure describes a common testing method for the gas-chromatographic
analysis of dithiocarbamate residues in vegetable, fruit and cereal products via
their common degradation product carbon disulfide (CS2) as required by Reg.
AF
396/2005/EC
Vegetables, fruits and potatoes:
A 50 g ( 1 %) representative portion of the sample is weighed into a cleavage

vessel and 25 mL isooctane are added. Then 150 mL of hydrolysis reagent (tin
(II)-chloride in hydrochloric acid are added and the Schott glass is immediately
closed with a screw-cap with septum. The Schott glasses are put into a shakingwater bath for 2 hours at 80 C. After half an hour the glasses are shaken upsidedown in such a way that all sample parts that could have possibly stuck to the
cap get contact with the hydrolysis reagent. Afterwards, the reaction mixture is
cooled down to 30 C, e.g. in a cooling water bath. 1 mL of the isooctane-phase
is pipetted into a GC vial for analysis.
Nuts, cereals, pulses, oil seeds, cereal products and dried fruits
Weigh out a 50 g ( 1 %) representative portion of the sample and add 45 mL of
water and 25 mL of isooctane and continue with the cleavage reaction

Dried herbs
Weigh out 10 g ( 1 %) of the sample and add 50 mL of water and 25 mL of
isooctane and continue with the cleavage reaction.
167
GC Conditions:
Gas Chromatograph
Autosampler
Column: 60 m x 0.25 mm x 1 m, CP-SIL 8CB
Carrier Gas: helium, constant flow 1 mL/min
Injection Volume: 2 L
Sample Injection: splitless; splitless time 0.20 min

Injector Temperature Program: 60C, initial time: 0. 2 min
1st ramp: heating rate: 10C/s
AF
final temperature: 240C

keep 1 min
2nd ramp: heating rate: 10C/s

keep 5 min
GC Oven Temperature Program : 45C, initial time: 0. 5 min

1st ramp: heating rate: 5C/min
2nd ramp: heating rate: 20C/min

keep: 15 min
Detector: ECD
Reference:
Community Reference Laboratories for Residues of Pesticides Version 2,
Document History in page 11EU Reference laboratory for single residue
methods.
168
NOTE: SOP as per above Reference EU Reference Laboratory for single

residue
methods
is
recommended
for
Fosetyl
Aluminium,
AF
EthyleneThiourea, Glufosinate, Diquat and paraquat also.
169
ETHYLENE THIOUREA AND ETHYLENE UREA
Ethylene thiourea and ethylene urea are the two major degradation products of
dithiocarbamates.
Reagents
(i) Methanol
AF
(ii) Distilled water
Extraction and clean up
(iii) Potassium fluoride

(iv) Celite 545
(v) Alumina (neutral)
(vi) Ammonium hydroxide
(vii) n-Hexane (redistilled)
Apparatus
(i) Mechanical shaker

(ii) Waring blender
(iii) Rotary vacuum evaporator
(iv) Separatory funnel (250 mL)
(v) Glass column (45 x 1.5 cm i.d.)
170
Procedure
(a) Extraction
A representative ground sample (50 g) of plant material is blended after adding
15g potassium fluoride and 100 mL solvent mixture (methanol: water - 3:1 v/v)
in a waring blender for two minutes at high speed. The homogenized material is
shaken for 30 minutes at room temperature on a mechanical shaker and filtered
through Buchner funnel with light suction. The filtration was performed by
making a 1.5 cm layer of Celite 545 sandwitched between two Whatman No. 1
filter paper and placed over a 15 cm Buchner funnel. The later is fitted to a
filtering flask attached to an aspirator. Before filtration the Celite layer is washed
AF
with solvent mixture (methanol: water 3:1 v/v). The filtrate is transferred to a
500mL conical flask.
(b) Clean up
The volume of the filtrate is reduced to approximately 20 mL by rotary vacuum

evaporator at 40C. The concentrate is transferred to a separatory funnel (250
mL) quantitatively by dilution with 100 mL distilled water. The aqueous mixture
is partitioned with n-hexane (3 x 50 mL) by shaking the separatory funnel
vigorously for 3 minutes. The aqueous layer was collected into another
separatory funnel and the hexane layer was discarded. The aqueous phase is
again partitioned with chloroform (2 x 50 mL) by shaking the funnel as above
for 3 minutes. After separation of layers the lower chloroform layer was
discarded and the aqueous layer was collected and reconcentrated to 10 mL in a
rotary vacuum evaporator at 60C. The pH of the concentrated extract was
adjusted to 8.0 by adding calculated amount of ammonium hydroxide.
Chromatographic columns (1.5 cm x 45cm) are packed with a small plug of
cotton and 20 g of activated alumina: Celite 545 (3:1 w/w). The concentrated
alkaline extract was poured slowly into the column and the column was eluted
with 100 mL of methanol @ 2-3 mL per minute. The elute was evaporated to
171
dryness in a rotary vacuum evaporator at 40C. The residues were dissolved in 5

mL of HPLC grade solvent mixture (water: methanol 95: 5 v/v) and filtrated
through millipore membrane filter using hypodermic syringe for ultracleaning.
The volume of the cleaned extract is made upto 10 mL using same solvent
mixture and then subjected to HPLC analysis.
Estimation
Ethylenethiourea and ethyleneurea residues are determined by using high

performance liquid chromatography. Methanol: water (3:97 v/v) is used as
Method
AF
mobile phase. ETU is detected at 240 nm and EU is detected at 205 nm.
A 20 L aliquot of the cleaned extract is injected into HPLC. The chromatogram

thus obtained is compared with that of known standards of ETU and EU for their
retention times to identify the peaks in the unknown samples.
Calculations :
A sam. V. C
ETU/EU (g/g) = ----------------------------- xF
A std. W
Where,
A sam = Area of the sample
A std. = Area of the standard
V = Volume of the final extract (mL)
W = Weight of the sample (g)
172
C = Concentration of standards (ppm)

F = Recovery factor i.e. 100/per cent mean recovery.
Reference
AF
AOAC. Official method of Analysis. 17th Edition, 992.31 (2000).
173
TRICYCLAZOLE
The analytical method prescribes the GLC method for estimation of tricyclazole
in rice grains and straw.
a. Reagents
Alumina, Determine moisture content by loss on drying at 110C, then
add sufficient water to bring total moisture content to 8.0% and mix
Acetonitrile, pesticide grade,
thoroughly.
AF
Dichloromethane, analytical reagent, distilled in glass

Ethyl acetate, analytical reagent
Methanol, analytical reagent
Sulfuric acid, 4 N
Sodium sulfate, anhydrous, analytical reagent, prewashed with methanol

Tricyclazole, analytical standard. Prepare solutions in acetonitrile at
concentration of 1.25, 1.0, 0.5, and 0.2 g /mL.
b. Apparatus
Mill Grinder,
Gas chromatograph, equipped with glass on-column injection and

flamephotometric detector.
Glass vials, 25 mL with aluminum insert screw caps,
PH Meter
174
Rotary vacuum evaporator,

Folded Filter paper,
Chromatography columns, 250 mm x 14 mm i.d. equipped with 250 mL
solvent reservoir and removable Teflon stopcock.
c. Gas chromatographic conditions

:
Gas chromatograph (or equivalent) equipped
Instrument
with flame photometric detector operating in the
Column
AF
sulfur mode.
:
Capillary column DB1 , 30 mts X 0.3 mm id or
equivalent provided standardization is done.
Column Temperature
220C
250C
210C
Nitrogen carrier gas
55mL/min
Hydrogen FPD gas
55mL/min
Air FPD gas
60mL/min
Oxygen FPD gas
10mL/min
Electrometer
2.56x 10-9 A full scale
Decto-Detector temperature
Retention time of tricyclazole is approximately 5.7 min.
175
d. Experimental Procedures
i
Sample Preparation
(a)
Whole rice grain. Grind the whole grain in Mill at the fine setting.
Place a representative 25 g sample in a 250 mL boiling flask. Add 100mL
(b)
of 4 N H2 SO4 and reflux samples for Ih. Proceed to (ii) below.
Rice straw. Freeze the rice straw in liquid nitrogen and immediately
grind. Place a representative l0g sample of straw in a 250 mL boiling
ii.
AF
flask. Add 125 mL of 4 N H2 SO4 and reflux 1 h. Proceed to (ii) below.
Partitioning Cleanup
Filter the extracts from the rice tissues through folded filter paper. Cool the
extracts, neutralize with 50% NaOH, and adjust the pH to 7.0 with 2 N NaOH.
Transfer the neutralized solution to a 500 mL separatory funnel and extract with
two 100 mL portions of ethylacetate. If emulsion persists, transfer the mixture to
a centrifuge jar and centrifuge for approximately 10 min. Pass the ethyl acetate
extracts through anhydrous sodium sulfate into a 250 mL boiling flask.

Evaporate to dryness on a rotary vacuum evaporator using a 50C water bath to
aid evaporation.
iii. Alumina column Procedure

Prepare a column consisting of 10 g of 8% deactivated alumina and 2 cm of
anhydrous sodium sulfate (top) in a 14 mm i.d. * 250 mm glass chromatographic
column containing 25-30 mL of dichloromethane. Drain the liquid to the top of
the column packing. Dissolve the residue from (i.a) or (ii) above in 25 mL of
176
dichloromethane and place on the column. Drain the liquid to the top of the
column packing.
Rinse the flask with two 20 mL portions of dichloromethane and pour each rinse
over the column. Wash the column with an additional 25 mL of dichloromethane
and discard all eluates to this point. Elute the tricyclazole from the column with
70 mL of dichloromethane-methanol (99:1 v/v). Collect the elute in a 125 mL
boiling flask andevaporate to dryness using a rotary vaccum evaporator and

50C water bath. Dissolve the residue in 1.0 mL of acetonitrile and determine
AF
tricyclazole by GC-FPD.
iv. Gas Chromatography
The response of the flamephotometric detector is not a linear function of
concentration when operated in the sulfur mode. It is therefore imperative to

prepare standard response curves for tricyclazole. Establish the instrumental
condition desribed in I, c. Inject 3.0 or 5.0 Dof the tricyclazole standard
solutions (0.2 - 1.25 g/mL). Prepare standard curve for the Inject identical
volumes of sample solutions. Dilute samples, if necessary, to obtain responses
within the range of the standard curve. Determine the concentrations of sample
and recovery solutions from the standard curves and calculate results as
described below. Use any acceptable technique for measuring peak response.
177
Calculation
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
Tricyclozole g/g (ppm) = -----------------------------------
Where,
A1 = Peak area of the sample
AF
V2 = Volume in L of standard injected
A x x V1 x M
V3 = Total volume in mL of the sample solution
C = Concentration in ppm of the standard solution

A2 = Peak area of the standard
V1 = Volume in L of the sample solution injected and
M = Mass in g of the sample taken for analysis.
Reference:
Zwig, G. Analytical methods for pesticides and plant growth regulator methods.
Academic Press, Volume XI (1980), pp. 265-273.
178
TRIADIMIFON AND TRIADIMINOL
1. Introduction
Bayleton fungicide contains triadimefon as its active ingredient. The active
2. Description of method
component of Bayfidan fungicide is triadimenol.
The compounds are extracted from cereal samples (green matter, grains, straw)
AF
and from hop cones with acetone/water (2:1). Other plant material is extracted
with acetone only. Soil samples are extracted by refluxing with methanol/ water
(7:3). After filtration, extracts of plant samples are saturated with sodium
chloride, and the compounds are then extracted with dichloromethane.
Following filtration of soil extracts, the methanol is evaporated, and the aqueous
residue is shaken out with dichloromethane. Water samples are directly extracted
with dichloromethane.
The dichloromethane extracts are dried on sodium sulphate, and then rotaryevaporated to dryness. The resultant residue of plant samples is cleaned up
firstly by column chromatography on silica gel and then by gel permeation
chromatography on Bio Beads S-X 3 polystyrene gel. The residue from soil and
water samples need not be subjected to column- chromatographic clean up on
silica gel. After the compound-containing eluates have been rotary-evaporated,
the compounds are measured by gas chromatography using a thermionic
nitrogen/ phosphorus detector (TID).
179
3. Apparatus
High-speed homogenizer
Glass jars, 1000 mL, wide neck, with ground joint
Vacuum filtration flasks, 1000 mL
Porcelain Buchner funnel, 110 mm i.d. with fast flow-rate filter paper, 110
Glass funnels, 100 mm dia.
mm dia.
Round-bottomed flasks, 100 mL, 250 mL, 500 mL, 1000 mL, with ground
joint
AF
Reflux condenser
Heating mantles for 1000 mL round-bottomed flasks

Graduated cylinders, 100 mL, 250 mL, 500 mL
Volumetric flasks, 25 mL, 50 mL, 100 mL with ground joint

Bulb pipettes, 1 mL, 3 mL, 5 mL and 10 mL
Separatory funnels, 250 mL, 500 mL, 1000 mL with ground joint
Test tubes with ground joint, 10 mL
Rotary vacuum evaporator with water bath, bath temperature of 40C
Chromatographic column, 17.5 mm i.d., 300 mm long, extended outlet

with Teflon stopcock.
Gel permeation chromatograph Autoprep 1002

Chromatographic column, 25 mm i.d., 600 mm long, packed with 25 x
320 mm Bio
Beads S-X 3, 200-400 mesh, preswollen in eluting mixture 3; rate of
elution : 5.0 mL/min.
Syringe with Luer-lock fitting, 10 mL
Syringe, 10 L
Gas chromatograph equipped with thermionic N/P detector (TID)
180
1mV Recorder or integrator.
4. Reagents
Acetone
Cyclohexane
Dichloromethane
Methanol
Toluene
Acetone/ water mixture 2 : 1 (v/v)
Ethyl acetate
AF
Eluting mixture 1 : cyclohexane/ ethyl acetate 85:15 (v/v)
Eluting mixture 2 : cyclohexane/ ethyl acetate 20 : 80 (v/v)

Eluting mixture 3 : cyclohexane/ ethyl acetate 1 : 1 (v/v)
Methanol/ water mixture 7 : 3 (v/v)
Parent compound standard solutions in ethyl acetate : 0.1-100
gtriadimefon/ mL and 0.2-200 g triadimenol/ mL
Sodium chloride, analytical reagent grade

Sodium sulphate
Filter aid, e.g. Celite 545
Silica gel 60%, 0.063-0.200 mm, 70-230 mesh (Merck No. 7734)
Bio Beads S-X 3 polystyrene gel, 0.037-0.074 mm, 200-400 mesh
Glass wool
Cotton wool, chemically pure

Air, re-purified
Hydrogen, re-purified.
181
5. Analytical procedure
5.1 Extraction
5.1.1Cereals and hop cones
Introduce the sample material [50 g (G) of cereal green matter, 50 g (G) of
cereal grains, 25 g (G) of cereal straw or 10 g (G) of hop cones] into a 1-1 glass
jar, add 450 mL acetone/ water mixture (2:1), and macerate with the
homogenizer for approx. 3 minutes. Add approx. 15 g filter aid, swirl the glass
jar several times, and filtert hemacerate with gentle vacuum througha Buchner
porcelain funnel Rinse the glassjar and the Filter caketwice with 100ml portion
AF
softheacetone /water mixture (2:1).Dry the filter cake by vacuum suction, and
discard.Transfer the filtrate toa1-1 separatory funnel, saturate with approx.40g
sodium chloride, and then shake out with 100 mL dichloromethane. Allow the
phases to separate, and discard the lower aqueous phase. Drain the organic phase
into a 1-1 round-bottomed flask, and rotary-evaporate to a volume of approx. 40
mL.
Add 25mL dichloromethane, and dry thes olutionon approx.30g sodium
sulphate. Next filter through cotton wool plug covered with an approx. 3 cm
layer of sodium sulphate in a funnel, and collect in a 500 mL roundbottomedflask. Rinse the1-1round-bottomed flask and the sodium-sulphate three
times with 50mL portions of dichloromethane. Rotary-evaporate the filtrate to

dryness. Continue to process the residue as described in step 5.2.
5.1.2 Plant material with a high water content, e.g. fruit and vegetables
To 100 g plant material (apples, bananas, pears, cucumbers, melons, peppers,
peaches, tomatoes, grapes, sugar beet) add 200 mL acetone in a 1-1 glass jar,
182
and macerate for approx. 3 minutes with the homogenizer. Continue to process
the sample as described in step 5.1.1.
5.1.3 Water
Shake out 400 mL water three times with 200 mL portions of dichloromethane.
If the water samples available for analysis are of a smaller size (e.g. 100 mL),
use appropriately reduced volumes of di-chloromethane to extract them. Filter
each organic phase separately through an approx. 3 cm layer of sodium sulphate

retained in a glass funnel by a loose plug of cottonwool. Collect the filtrate in a
AF
1-1 round-bottomed flask. Rinse the sodium sulphate three times with 25 mL
portions of dichloromethane. Rotary-evaporate the filtrate to dryness, and
process the residues as described below in 5.3.
5.2Column chromatography on silica gel
Pack the chromatographic tube in the following order: 10 mL toluene,

cottonwool plug, 15 g silica gel slurried in toluene (to a level of about 130 mm),
approx. 10 mm layer of sodium sulphate, loose plug of glass wool. Drain the
level of the toluene down to the top of the sodium sulphate layer.
Dissolve the residue derived from 5.1.1 or 5.1.2 in 10 mL toluene, and pipette
the solution onto the column. Allow the solution to trickle down to the top of
the sodium sulphate layer, and then rinse the flask twice with 10 mL portions of
eluting mixture 1. Rinse the column with the washings (10, 10 mL) and with an
additional 80 mL of eluting mixture 2. Collect the eluate in a 250 mL roundbottomed flask, and rotary-evaporate to dryness. Continue to process the residue
as described below in step 5.3.
183
5.3 Gel permeation chromatography

Elution volumes ranging from 100 to 130 mL were determined for triadimefon
and triadimenol on Bio Beads S-X 3 polystyrene gel using eluting solvent
mixture 3 pumped at a flow rate of 5.0 mL/min. The elution volume range
should be checked after approx. 500 runs, and re-determined whenever a new
gel permeation chromatographic column is used. Collect the compound eluates
(elution volume ranging from 100 to 130 mL) in a 100mL round-bottomed flask
and rotary-evaporate. Dissolve the residue in a given volume (VEnd, e.g. 5 mL) of
ethyl acetate. Transfer the solutions to a test tube with ground joint (sample
AF
solution). 5.4
Gas chromatographic measurement
Inject 5 L (Vi.) of the sample solution (VEnd) derived from step 5.3 into the gas
chromatograph. Then inject 5 L of the appropriate standard solution (Wst). If
the sample solution has an excessive content of compound, dilute aliquots of the
solution with ethyl acetate to a terminal volume appropriate to the sensitivity of

the detector, and that ensures that the peak areas of the sample solution (Fgt) and
the standard solution (FA) are of gt comparable size. Repeat each injection for
control.
Gas chromatographic conditions

Gas chromatograph: Equipped with a thermionic nitrogen/phosphorus detector
(TID).
Columns:
1.
Glass tube, 3 mm i.d., 180 cm long, packed with 1.5% SP

2250+95% SP 2401 on Supelcoport, 100-120 mesh.
184
2.
Glass tube, 3 mm i.d., 180 cm long, packed with 3.8% SE 30

on chromosorb W-HP, 80-100 mesh
Column 2
Injection port temperature
250-280C
280C
Column temperature
210-225C
190-205C
250-350C
350C
Nitrogen carrier gas flow rate
35-45 mL/min
4.5 mL/min
Hydrogen flow rate
4.5 mL/min
4.5 mL/min
175 mL/min
175 mL/min
1x10-11
1x10-11
Synthetic air flow rate
AF
Attenuation and range
Column 2
5 mm/min
5 mm/min
Injection volume
5L
5L
Retention times
2.9-3.6 min
2.7-4.4 min
Triadimefon
3.7-4.5 min
3.5-5.3 min
Triadimenon
250-280C
280C
Recorder chart speed
6. Evalution
Quantitation was performed by measuring and comparing the peak areas of the
sample solution with those of standard solutions, using an integrator [external
standardization method]. Equal volumes (5L) of the sample solutions and the
standard solutions were injected. Detector linear response ranged from 0.5 to
50ng for triadimefon and from 1.0 to 100ng for triadimenol.
Reference
Pt'Pflonzenschutz-Nachrichiten Bayer 17/1984. pp. 86-93.
Note: LC-MS-MS method may also be used
185
METAL AXYL
The method prescribes a gas chromatographic method for the determination of

residues of metalaxyl in food commodities.
Apparatus
Gas Chromatograph
The gas chromatograph shall be fitted with an alkali-flame inoization detector
AF
(AFID) and printer- plotter-cum-integrator. The following operating parameters

are suggested, which can be changed provided standardization is done: AlkaliFlame Inoization Detector (AFID)
Column: Glass, 100 cm length x 2mm I.D.; packed with 3% carbowax 20 M on
gas Chrom Q DMCS treated (size: 0.15-0.18 mm)
Temperature
Column Oven
185C
Injection Port
240C
Detector
240C
Flow Rate
Nitrogen; 35mL/ min
Flow Rate
Hydrogen; 35mL/min
Air and Flow Rate
230 mL/min
186
Microlitre Syringe-10 ul capacity. Blender or equivalent Centrifuge

Rotary Evaporative Concentrator Sample Grinder Mechanical Shaker Ultrasonic
Bath
Chromatographic Column- glass, 200 cm x 18 mm I.D. with ground glass top
Methanol-glass redistilled
AF
Saturated Sodium
Reagents
Chloride Solution- AR grade n-hexane- glass redistilled

Diethyl ether- glass re-distilled
Dichloromethance- glass redistilled
Reference Standard Metalaxyl- of known purity

Sodium Hydrogen Carbonate- AR garde
Alumina Acidic- W 200, activity grade V (19% water added)
Extraction
Vegetable and fruits
Shred the entire sample with food cutter. Weigh 100 g representative sample into
a 500 mL wide mouth jar and add 200 mL methanol. Macerate with the high
speed blender for 2-3 minutes. Shake the bottle for 2 hours on a mechanical
shaker. Filter through Whatman 40 or equivalent filter paper on a Buchner
funnel, under suction. Rinse the jar and wash the filter-cake twice with 40 mL of
methanol each time. Adjust the volume to 400 mL and take an aliquot of 200 mL
corresponding to 50 g sample.
187
Partitioning
Transfer the corresponding extract-aliquots to a 100 mL separatory funnel and
add 20 mL saturate sodium chloride solution. Extract the aqueous solution 3
times with 75 mL of dichloromethane by vigorously shaking the separatory
funnel during each extraction. Collect the dichloromethane phase and filter
through a plug of cotton and evaporate to dryness using a rotating evaporator at
40C.
Clean-up
AF
Fill the chromatographic column with n-hexane. Add alumina acidic to a height
of 7 cm (30 mL of volume). Drain the solvent to the top of the alumina. Dissolve
the residue from partitioning in 5 mL of n-hexane by immersing the flask into
the ultrasonic bath for 3 minutes. Transfer this solution to the column. Rinse the
flask twice with 5 mL of n-hexane and transfer each portion to the column.
Rinse the flask and then the column with 100 mL of n-hexane. Elute the active
ingredient with further 80 mL of the mixture of n-hexane and diethyl either

(1:1). Collect the eluate and evaporate to dryness in a rotation evaporator at 40
C.
Transfer the residue with 3 increments each of 5 mL diethyl either to 25 mL

vials and evaporate to dryness in a stream of clean air. Dissolve the residue for
gas chromatographic determination in 1 mL n-hexane-ethanol (1:1) mixture.
Estimation
Preparation of Standard Curve
188
Prepare solutions containing 2.5 to 10 preference standard metalaxyl in one mL

of n-hexane-ethanol (1:1) mixture. Inject a minimum of 4 different amounts of
metalaxyl ranging from 2.5 to 10 mg for AFID detector. Measure the peak areas
andplot them against the active ingredient on a log-log scale.
Inject into the gas chromatograph, with the help of a microlitre syringe, a
suitable aliquot of the sample, identify the peaks by the retention times and
measure the peak areas. Estimate the metalaxyl content by comparison with the
Calculation:
Where,
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
------------------------- x f
A2 x V1 x M
AF
Calculation Metalaxyl Residue, ppm =
standard curve.
A1 = peak area of the samples;
V2 = volume, in L of standard metalaxyl solution injected;

V3 = total volume, in mL, of sample solution;
C = concentration in ppm, of the standard metalaxyl solution;
100
F = recovery factor = .....................................
Percent mean recovery
A2 = peak area of standard metalaxyl;
V1 = volume in L of sample solution injected;
M = and mass, in g, of sample taken for analysis.
Reference
189
Indian Standard 14161: 1994.
TRIAZOLE FUNGICIDES
Principal
Triazole pesticide residues extracted from plant material and soil with acetone
are filterd, evaporated to small quantities, dilutes with water and saturated
sodium chloride solution, and partitioned into dichloromethane. Water samples
are diluted with saturated sodium chloride solution, and extracted with
AF
dichloromethane. The dichloromethane extracts are rotary evaporated to dryness

and the residues are cleaned up by column chromatography on aluminium oxide.
Triazoles are determined by gas chramatography using Nitrogen Phosphorus
Detector (NPD).
Hexaconazole, Propiconazole, Penconazole, Myclobutanil, Triademifon and
Triadiminol.
Experimental
Apparatus
Analytical balance with sensitivity of 0.1 mg Tcp loading balance with

sensitivity of 1 mg Gas chromatograph with
Gas Chromatographic column: DB-5, megabore, 30 m long, 0.53 mm
i.d. 0.5 m film thickness (or) similar
190
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD)

Mixer grinder
Conical flasks
Volumetric flasks
Buchner funnel
Vacuum flask/filtration flask
AF
Separatory funnels
Filter paper, whatman No.l
Round bottomed flasks
Chromatographic tubes, 18 mm x 450 mm
Micro syringe, 10 L
Reagents
Reference
standards
Propiconazole,
of
known
Penconazole,
Triadiminol
Acetone.
Dichloromethane
Toluene
191
purities
Myclobutanil,
of
Hexaconazole,
Triademifon
and
n-hexane
Sodium Chloride
Anhydrous sodium sulphate
Aluminium oxide activity grade V: Take 100 g .Aluminium oxide
neutral active in a 300 mL Erlenmeyer flask (with ground joint) and
add 15 mL Water drop wise with continuous swirling. Immediately
stopper the flask with ground stopper, shake vigorously until all lumps
AF
hours before use.
disappeared and store in a tightly stoppered container for at least 2
Sample preparation
Finely chop the samples of fruits, vegetables, forages, straw, etc. and mix well in
a mixer grinder.
Standard solutions
Prepare stock solution by dissolving 0.01 g reference pesticide standards in 100
mL n-hexane (add acetone if required for solubilization). For GC determinations

prepare a mixed pesticide standard solution by taking suitable aliquots from the
above solutions in to 100 mL volumetric flask and diluting them with ethyl
acetate.
Extraction
Plant materials: Weigh 50 g of plant, fruit, vegetable, into 500 mL conical flask
and 200 mL acetone. Shake the container for 2 hours on a mechanical shaker at
slow to moderate speed. Filter under suction through a whatman no. 1 filter
192
paper placed on a Buchner funnel attached to a vacuum flask and wash the filter
cake with three more 25 mL portions of acetone. Pool the filtrate and washings
into a 500 mL round bottom flask and rotary evaporate to about 50 mL volume.
Transfer the filtrate quantitatively into 1000 mL separatory funnel, add about
400 mL double distilled water and 50 mL saturated sodium chloride solution,
and extract three times with 100 mL portions of redistilled dichloromethane.
Filter the dichloromethane phases through anhydrous sodium sulphate into 1000
mL round bottom flasks and rotary evaporate to near dryness.
Water: Take 500 mL water sample in a separatory funnel, add 50 mL saturated

sodium chloride solution and extract successively with three 100 mL portions of
AF
dichloromethane. Filter the dichloromethane extract through anhydrous sodium

sulphate into 1000 mL round bottom flask and rotary evaporate to near dryness.
Clean-up
Place a cotton plug at the bottom of a chromatographic tube and pack it with 5 g
anhydrous sodium sulphate, 30 g aluminium oxide of activity grade V and 5 g

anhydrous sodium sulphate in tandem using n-hexane. Drain the excess solvent
from the column until the level falls to the top of the pecking. Transfer the
extract from the above step quantitatively using three 5 mL portions of

dichloromethane + hexane (60: 40, v/v) solvent mixture and elute the column
with 135 mL of the same solvent mixture at a flow rate of approximately 2 drops
per second. Collect the eluate in a 250mL round bottom flask and rotary
evaporate to dryness.
Gas Chromatographic Determination

Dissolve the residue derived from the above step in acetone-hexane (2: 8. v/v)
mixture and dilute to suitable volume. Inject 1.0L of this solution into
193
Chromatograph equipped with Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) operated

under the following suggested parameters.
Column
DB-5, Megabore, 30 m long, 0.53 mm i.d., 0.5

m film thickness
280C
290C
Initial Temperature (1)
200C
Initial Hold Time
10minutes
Ramp rate
15C/min.
225C
7 min.
15C/min.
Temperature (3)
280C
Final hold time
5 min.
10mL/min..
Makeup gas for detector :
30 mL/min
Hydrogen flow rate
3.5 mL/min.
Air flow rate
110mL/min.
Temperature (2)
Hold time
Ramp rate
AF
Column oven
Carrier gas flow rate
194
Calculations
As x C x D x VI
Residue of each triazole (mg/kg) = ------------------------------ x f
Astd x W x V2
Astd =
C
peak area of each triazole when standard injected
Concentration of ppm of each triazole standard solution
Sample dilution (mL)

Weight of sample (g)
Volumes of sample and standard injected
VI & V2=
peak area of each triazole in sample
AF
As
Where,
100
f = Recovery factor = ---------------------------------
Percent mean recovery
Reference
Indian Standard 34 (1272).
Note: LC-MS-MS method may also be used.
195
ANALYTICAL METHOD
System
Column
A Gas Chromatograph equipped with

mass spectrometer, Auto injector and
Interfaced with GCMS solution software.
HP-1 MS, (30m length x 0.25mm I.D. x
0.1 m film thickness)
Injection port
:
200 C
Injection mode
Split
Split ratio
1:5
AF
Temperature
Column oven
Temeprature
Initial temperature 160C held for 13 min,

ramp
@10C /min to 200C held for 5 min,
@50C /min to 290 C held for 6 min.

1.5 mL/min
Interface temperature :
300C
Acquisition mode
EI
Column flow (Helium):
Retention time in minutes (Approximately)

1. Tetraconazole-10.36
2. Penconazole-11.94
3. Tricyclazole -13.83
4. Paclobutrazole-14.35
5. Hexaconazole-15.36
6. Diniconazole-17.87
196
7. Propiconazole -20.30
8. Tebuconazole-20.75
9. Epoxyconazole-21.75
10.Etoxazole-23.41
11.Fluquiniconazole-24.60
AF
12.Difenconazole-26.30
197
CHLORSULFURON AND METSULFURON
This analytical method prescribes the HPLC method for estimation of residues
of chlorsulfuron and metasulfuron in food commodities.
Methanol, HPLC quality
Reagents:-
2-Propanol (isopropanol), HPLC quality
AF
Toluene, p.a.
Water, bi-distilled
Extraction solution : acetone + buffer solution B 4 : 1 v/v
Mobile phase: Prepare a mixture consisting of 690 mL cyclohexane +
195 mL isopropanol + 115 mL methanol + 2 mL glacial acetic acid + 1

mL of glacial acetic acid-water mixture (9:1 v/v). Mix well, and de-gas
before use in a vacuum filtration unit using water jet pump suction.
Conditioning solution: Prepare a mixture consisting of 200 ml isopropanol

+ 200 ml methanol + 200 ml glacial acetic acid + 20 ml water. Mix well,
and de-gas before use in a vacuum filtration unit using water jet pump
suction.
Stock solutions: 10 mg/100 mL each of chlorosulfuron and metsulfuron

methyl in ethyl acetate. Pipet 1 mL of each stock solution into a 100 mL
volumetric flask. Remove the solvent with a gentle stream of nitrogen,
dissolve the residue and make up tothe mark with mobile phase.
Chlorsulfuron and metsulfuron-methyl standard solutions: 0.05, 0.1,0.2,
198
0.3, 0.4 and 0.5 g/mL of each in mobile phase, de-gassed in an ultrasonic
bath. The solutions are stable for approx. two weeks when stored in a
refrigerator.
Hydrochloric acid conc. 10 g/100 g and 1 mol/1 HCl p.a.
Sodium sulphate p.a. anhydrous
Buffer solution A: 10.6 g/l sodium carbonate anhydrous p.a. and 8.4 g/l
sodium hydrogen carbonate anhyhdrous p.a.

Buffer solution B: 0.82 g/l sodium acetate anhydrous p.a.
51900)
AF
Silica gel disposable cartridge: Sep-Pak Cartridge Silica (Millipore No.
Procedure:Extraction
Cereals
Homogenize (25 g of grains) with 150 mL extraction solution in the mixer for 2
min. Suction-filter the supernatant liquid through a fast-flow rate filter paper in a
Buchner procelain funnel. Homogenize the residue in the glass jar and suctionfilter twice more as above, each time using 120 mL extraction solution (for
cereal grains, use 100 mL each time), finally, rinse the glass jar and the filter
with a further 80 mL of extraction solution. Transfer the filtrate to a volumetric
flask and make up to a definite volume, e.g. 500 mL (VEx). Next transfer a tenth
of this solution (VR) to a 500 mL separatory funnel, add 100 mL buffer solution
A, and proceed as in clean up step.
199
Water
Transfer 1L water into a separatory funnel, adjust the pH to 3-4 with
hydrochloric acid (1 mol/l) and extract the water three times with 100 mL
portions of dichloromethane. Filter the combined dichloromethane phases
through a layer of sodium sulphate, contained in a funnel, into a 500-mL roundbottomed flask. Rinse the funnel with 50 mL dichloromethane. Add 1 mL
glacial acetic acid and rotary-evaporate to approx. 1 mL. Transfer the residue
into a 50 mL round bottomed flask, using four 5 mL portions of mobile phase to
complete the transfer and rotary-evaporate to 1-2 mL. Evaporate the solution to
dryness, using a gentle stream of nitrogen, and proceed in clean up by silica gel
Clean up
AF
cartridge.
Liquid-liquid partition (only cereals)
Shake the extracts derived from above with 50 mL portions of dichloromethane

for 3 min. iscard the organic phases. Break emulsions, if required, by
centrifugation. Transfer the aqueous phase to a beaker and acidify, with vigorous
stirring, to pH 5-6 (pH meter) with concentrated hydrochloric acid. Further,
adjust the pH to 3.5 using hydrochloric acid (10% w/w). Transfer the solution
back to the separatory funnel, rinse the beaker with 5 mL water and 50 mL
toluene, also add the rinsings to the separatory funnel, and shake for 3 min.
Separate the aqueous layer, drain the organic phase into a 250 mL centrifuge
tube, rinse the separatory funnel with 5 mL water, and add the rinsings to the
centrifuge tube. Repeat the extraction twice, each time using 50 mL toluene and
adding the organic phases to the centrifuge tube. Add a further 10 mL of water
200
to the centrifuge tube if the phase boundary is difficult to see after the third
AF
extraction.
201
Centrifuge for 15 min at 3800 rpm, then transfer the upper toluene phase into a
250 mL round-bottomed flask, using a 50 mL volumetric pipette. Add 30 mL
toluene to the aqueous phase remaining in the centrifuge tube, mix centrifuge for
5 min, and likewise pipette off the top layer into the 250 mL round bottomed
flask. Add 1 mL glacial acetic acid to the combined toluene phases, and rotaryevaporate to approx. 1 mL. Transfer the residue into a 50 mL round-bottomed
flask, using four 5 mL portions of mobile phase to complete the transfer and
rotary evaporate to 1-2 mL. Evaporate the solution to dryness, using a gentle
AF
Silica gel cartridge
stream of nitrogen as in silica gel cartridge step.
Draw 10 mL of the mobile phase into the glass syringe, attach a silica gel
cartridge to the syringe, and force the mobile phase through to condition the
cartridge packing. Repeat the conditioning with a further 10 mL portion of
mobile phase. Next detach the cartridge, pull the plunger out of the syringe, and
re-attach the cartridge, dissolve the residue derived above in 1 mL mobile phase
and transfer the solution quantitatively into the syringe with the aid of a pasteur
pipette. Rinse the 50 mL flask with 1mL mobile phase and also add the rinsings
to the syringe. Re-insert the plunger into the syringe and force the liquid through
the cartridge, collecting the eluate in a 10 mL test tube. Detach the cartridge,
remove the plunger from the syringe, and re-attach the cartridge. Force a further
5 mL mobile phase through the cartridge, proceeding in a similar manner as
above, and collect the eluate in the same test tube.
Evaporate the solution to dryness using a gentle stream of nitrogen.
202
High performance liquid chromatographic determination

Dissolve the residue in mobile phase to an appropriate volume. Inject an aliquot
of this solution (vi) into HPLC.
Chromatograph
A HPLC system
Injector
Injection valve 7125 with sample loop (Rhoedyne)

Zorbax Sil, 4.6 mm i.d. 25 cm long
25C.
Mobile phase
Cyclohexane-isopropanol-methanol-acetic acid-water.
Flow rate
0.5 mL/min.
AF
Column temperature:
Conditioning solution:
Isopropanol-methanol-acetic acid-water
Detector
Photoconductivity detector (Tracer 965), operated with
a mercury lamp at 254 nm, ATT=5
5 mV; chart speed 5 mm/min.
Recorder
Injection volume :
20 L
Retention times for chlorsulfuron: 13 min.
Metasulfuron-methyl:
15 min.
The Zorbax Sil column must be conditioned before use. For this end, pump
conditioning solution through the column for 4 h at a flow rate of 0.7 mL/min.
Next equilibrate the column for 3 h with mobile phase at the same rate.
Moreover, pump conditioning solution at a flow rate of 0.15 mL/min through

the system over night, changing to mobile phase at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for
1 h before beginning a new series of measurements the next morning.
203
Quantitation is performed by the calibration technique.
Prepare calibration
curve as follows. Inject equal volumes of each chlorosulfuron and metasulfuron

methyl into HPLC. Plot area of the heights of the peaks obtained vs.
concentration.
AF
LC-ESI-MS/MS conditions:
Simultaneous Determination of Chlorsulfuron and Metsulfuron-methyl
Instrument : HPLC with Bruker HCT Plus LCMS/MS

Ion source : ESI +Ve
Column
:Zorbax SB-C18 3.5, 75 x 4.6mm I.D
Mobile phase:
A: 0.1% Formic acid in Water

B: 100% ACN,
Flow Programme:
Ramp B, 5 to 95% upto15min
Flow
: 0.5 mL/min,
Injection Volume: 10 L
Approximate retention time
204
Metsulfuron-methyl
R.T = 4 .1 min
MRM: 382->167
Chlorsulfuron
R.T = 4.5 min
MRM: 358->167
AF
References
R.V. Slates: Determination of chlorsulfuron residues in grain, straw and green

plants of cereals by high-performance liquid chromatography. J. Agric. Food
Chem., 31: 113-117.
205
ANILOPHOS
The analytical method prescribes a GLC method for estimation of anilophos in

rice grains.
Reagents and apparatus
n-hexane, ethyl acetate, toulene, acetone, acetonitrile, methanol: reagent

grade
grade
AF
Hydrochloric acid, Sodium chloride, Sodium sulfate anhydrous : reagent
Silicagel cartridge column: Sep pak Plus Si; Waters Co.
Activated carbon cartridge column: Sep-pakPlus AC-1; Waters Co.
Diatomite column: Extrelut 20; Merck Co.

Disposable platic syringe
Gas chromatograph : with NPD

Capillry column DB-17;
GC Conditions
Column
DB-17 (i.e. 0.53 x 15 m film thickness 1 m)
Temperature
Detector: 280C; Injector: 250C
Column oven temp :
Initial : 100C (in min); 30C/min;

Final: 270C (1 min)
206
He : 20 mL/min
Combustion gas
H : 3 mL/min. Air : 60 mL/min
Injector
Spirit - less mode
Detector
NPD
Injector volume
2L
Analytical procedure
AF
Extraction
Carrier gas
Twenty five grams of pulverised rice grain are weighed into a round bottom
flask accurately and 20 mL of water is added, then it is left alone for 2 hours. It
is shaken with 100 mL of methanol by strong shaking for 30 minutes. The
extrcts are combined and concentrated to about 20 mL by using a rotary
evaporator at 40C. The concentrate is transferred to a separately funnel with
100 mL of ethyl acetate. After strong shake, water layer is transferred to another
funnel and extracted by newly 100 mL of ethyl acetate. Both extracts are
combined and dried by passing hrough the sodium sulfate anhydrous layer. The
extract is concentrated to about 1 mL by using a rotary evaporator at 40C. The

concentrate is dried up by nitrogen flow.
Purification
The residue is dissolved in 30 mL of n-hexane (saturated with acetonitrile) and
this solution is extracted with two portions of 30 mL of acetonitrile (saturated
with n- hexane). Acetonitrile layers are combined and concentrated to about 1
mL by using a rotary evaporator at 40C. The concentrate is dried up by nitrogen
flow.
207
Activated carbon CC
The residue is dissolved with 10 mL of acetone and transferred to a plastic
syringe with an activated carbon cartridge column which is conditioned by
loading with 20 mL of acetone, 1 M HCl, water and again acetone orderly just
before using. The round bottom flask is washed with two portions of 10 mL of
acetone and the washing solvent is also transferred to the same plastic syringe,
the solutionis loaded and the eluate is concentrated to about 1 mL by using a
Silicagel CC
AF
rotary evaporator at 40C. Then it is dried up by nitrogen flow.
The residue is dissolved with 5 mL of n-hexne: ethyl acetate 95: 5 v/v) and
transferred to a syringe with a silicagel cartridge column which is conditioned
by loading with 10 mL of n-hexane just before using. The round bottom flask is
washed with two portions of 10 mL of n-hexane: ethyl acetate (95: 5 v/v) and the
washing solvent is also combined. The solution is loaded and eluate is discarded,
the column is washed with 10 mL of same solvent and anilophos is eluted with
20 mL of n-hexane: ethyl acetate (8:2 v/v). The column is again washed with 10
mL of n-hexane acetone (2:3 v/v). Each eluate is concentrated to about 1 mL by
using a rotary evaporator at 40C. Then they are dried up by nitrogen flow. The
residue of anilophos is dissolved with small amount of toluene. Volume is made
of 5 mL with toluene.
208
Quantification
Inject 2 L of each test solution into the GC under conditions described above.
The residue value of anilophos is calculated by the following formula:
[Detected amount (ng) x Volume of test solution (mL)]
AF
Residue (mg/kg) = -----------------------------------------------------------------[Sample amount (g) x Injection volume (L)]
Reference
Hoechst, A.G.
Product Development Division, Frankfurt.
209
DICLOFOP-METHYL
The method prescribes for analysis of diclofop methyl in barley grains,

soybeans, wheat grains analytical method.
1. Outline of method
The sample material is refluxed for 6 h with sodium hydroxide solution.
AF
Diclofop-methyl is saponified in the process to the sodium salt of 2-[, 4-(2, 4

dichlorophenoxy) phenoxy]-propionic acid. Next, the reaction mixture is
extracted with ethanol, with simultaneous homogenization, and then filtered to
separate it from undissolved constituents. The filtrate is acidified with
hydrochloric acid, and extracted with a mixture of n-hexane and diethyl ether.
The organic phase is washed with water, and extracted with sodium hydrogen
carbonate solution. The pH of this solution is then adjusted to 4.5 with

hydrochloric acid, and the solution is re-extracted with the hexane-diethyl ether
mixture. The organic phase is concentrated, and methylated with diazomethane.
Next, diclofop-methyl is extracted with n-hexane from the methanolic solution.

The residue remaining after evaporation is taken up in n-hexane from the
methanolic solution. The residue remaining after evaporation is taken up in n-
hexane, and diclofop-methyl is determined by electron capture gas

chromatography.
Hydrochloric acid, p.a., 5 mol/1

Potassium hydroxide solution, 0.5 mol/1 KOH p.a.
Sodium hydroxide solution, 1 mol/1 NaOH p.a.
210
Sodium hydrogen carbonate solution, 5 g/100 mL NaHCO3 p.a.

Sodium sulphate, p.a., anhydrous
[Pre-coated (Schleicher & Schull No. 354103)]
Argon + methane mixture 95 : 5 v/v
2.1 Saponification and extraction
2. Procedure
Weigh 25 g of the analytical sample (G) into a 1-1 round-bottomed flask, and
AF
reflux with 250 mL sodium hydroxide solution for 6 h. Allow to cool, and add
250 mL ethanol through the condenser. Transfer the mixture to a beaker,
homogenize thoroughly with an ultra-Turrax, and filter through a glass filter
funnel. Dissolve the filter cake in 150 mL ethanol-water mixture, homogenize
well with the Ultra-Turrax, and filter again. Combine the filtrates, adjust pH to
2.0 with hydrochloric acid, and extract three times with 200 mL of hexane-
diethyl ether mixture.
2.2 Cleanup
Wash the combined hexane-diethyl ether extracts twice with 100 mL ethanolwater mixture. Discard the water phase. Extract the free acid (formed from
diclofop-methyl) from the organic phase by extracting three times with 100 mL
portions of sodium hydrogen carbonate solution. Combine the aqueous phases,
wash with 100 mL n-hexane, and adjust pH to 4.5 with hydrochloric acid.
Extract the water phase three times with 100 mL portions of hexane-diethyl
ether mixture. Combine the organic phases, wash with 50 mL water, and dry
over 20 g anhydrous sodium sulphate. Then filter and re-wash. Concentrate the
combined solutions to approx. 5 mL in a rotary evaporator.
211
2.3 Reaction with diazomcthanc

(Diazomethane is produced as given in the method of 2,4-D)
The apparatus for generating diazomethane consists of a small washbottle about
half-filled with diethyl ether, a reaction vessel with dropping funnel, and a
methylating vessel filled with the solution derived from step 2.2. The
methylating vessel is followed by two more washbottles in which excess
diazomethane is indicated and destroyed, respectively. These two washbottles
are filled with 2 mL acetone and acetic acid, respectively. Add 1 mL diethyl
ether, 2 mL alkaline diethylene glycol solution and one small stirring rod into
the reaction vessel. Place the reaction vessel in a beaker containing hot water,
AF
switch on the magnetic stirrer, and slowly pass nitrogen through the apparatus.
Then slowly add the methylating reagent dropwise, and continue to sweep the
diazomethane with a nitrogen current into the methylating vessel until the
solution is coloured pale yellow.
2.4 Isolation of reaction products
Transfer the solution from 2.3 to a 100 mL round-bottomed flask, and rotary-
evaporate almost to dryness. Transfer the residue remaining after evaporation to

a separatory funnel with successive washings of 75 mL methanol-water mixture
and 75 mL n-hexane. Shake to partition diclofop-methyl into the hexane phase.
Separate the lower phase, and re-extract with 75 mL n-hexane. Combine the
hexane phases, wash with 50 mL water, transfer to a 500 mL round-bottomed
flask, and concentrate to approx. 5 mL in the rotary evaporator.
Quantitatively rinse the residual solution with n-hexane into an evaporating dish,
and evaporate cautiously under infrared light and ventilation. Then rinse the
212
residue with n- hexane into a graduated tube (with ground joint), and make up to
2.5 mL (VEnd).
2.5 Gas chromatographic determination
Operating conditions:
Column temperature
Chromosorb W-HP, 100-120 mesh
: 220C Hold 4 min Ramp 5 C 260 Hold 10 min
Detector
AF
Injection port temperature: 270C
: Electron capture detector (63Ni)

Temperature 280C
: Helium mixture, 45 mL/min
Attenuation
: 10-16
: 1mV; chart speed 75 cm/h
Injection volume1
: 2L
Recorder
Retention time for diclofop-methyl: 2min

Capillary Chromatographic Conditions:
Instrument
A Gas Chromatograph equipped with

Electron Capture Detector, Auto injector
coupled with computer software.
Column
DB-1, Megabore Column or equivalent

(30m x 0.53mm x 1.5m film thickness).
213
Gas flow rate

Nitrogen (N2)
100 Kpa
Oven Initial
220 C
Holding time at 220C
4 min
20 C/min
Oven final
260 C
Injector
Detector
Volume injected
4 min
AF
Holding time at 260 C -
Heating rate upto 260 C -
270 C
280 C
1 L
10mL/min
Column flow rate
Split
Split ratio
Solvent
Acetone
Diclofop Methyl (Standard) -
7.40 min
Injection Mode
3. Evaluation
3.1 Method
Quantitation is performed by measuring the peak areas or peak heights of the
sample solutions and comparing them with peak areas or heights of standard
214
solutions of known concentration. Equal volumes of the sample solutions and

the standard solutions should be injected; additionally, the peaks of the solutions
should exhibit comparable areas or heights.
3.2 Recoveries and lowest determined concentration

Recoveries from untreated control samples fortified with diclofop-methyl at
levels of 0.01-1.0 mg/kg ranged from 80 to 100% and averaged 90%. The
AF
3.3 Calculation of residues
routine limit of determination was about 0.01 mg/kg.
The residue R, expressed in mg/kg diclofop-methyl, is calculated from the

following equations:
=
FA . VEnd . Wst / Fst. V. G (without cleanup step 2.5)
FA . VEndR - Wst. VEnd / Fst. Vl. VM . G
(with cleanup step 2.5)
where,
G
sample weight (in g)
VEnd
terminal volume of sample solution from 2.4 (in mL)
VM
portion of volume VEnd used for cleanup in step 2.5 (in mL)
215
VEndR
= terminal volume of cleaned-up sample solution from step

2.5 (in mL)
V.
= portion of volume VEnd (without cleanup) or of volume VEndR

(with cleanup) injected into gas chromatograph (in I)
= amount of diclofop-methyl injected with standard solution (in ng)
FA
= peak area or height obtained from V. (in mm2 or in mm)
Fst
= peak area or height obtained from Wst (in mm2 or in mm).
Wst
AF
References
1. Hoechst, A.G., Analytical Laboratory, Frankfurt-Hochst, S. Gorbach andK.

Kunzler.
2. Manual of Pesticide Residue Analysis. Deutsche Forschungs - Gemernschaft
HCH Verlogsgell-Schft Weinhein-FRG (1987), pp. 128-133.
216
GLUFOSINATE
Residues of glufosinate-ammonium, glufosinate and the metabolite are extracted
from plant and water. Depending on the type of sample material, the extracts are
cleaned up by de-fatting with dichloromethane, by precipitation of carbohydrates
and proteins with acetone, or by ion exchange chromatography. From water
samples, the residues are concentrated on an anion exchange chromatographic

column and eluted with formic acid solution. After evaporation of the cleaned-
AF
up extracts or of the eluate, the residues are treated with trimethyl orthoacetate,
resulting in the formation of the derivatives: methyl 4-[methoxy (methyl)
phosphinoyl]-2-acetamidobutyrate from glufosinate, and methyl 3-[methoxy
(methyl) phosphinoyl] propionate from the metabolite. The
derivatives are
cleaned up on a mini silica gel column and are determined by gas
chromatography using a phosphorus-specific flame photometric detector.
2. Apparatus
Homogenizer
Erlenmeyer flasks, 500 mL and 300 mL
Watch glass, 10 cm dia
Hot plate with magnetic stirrer, incl. stirring rod
Graduated cylinders, 1-1, 100 mL, 50 mL and 2 mL
Centrifuge
Volumetric pipets, 20 mL and 10 mL
Round-bottomed flasks, 100 mL and 50 mL, with ground joints
Separatory funnels, 1-1 and 100 mL

217
Filter cartridges for organic solvents, pore size 0.5 fn (e.g. Milliex SR
Filter, Millipore SLSR 0.25 NS)
Beakers
Chromatographic tube 1:15 mm i.d., 30 cm long, with stopcock
Chromatographic tube 2 : 40 mm i.d., 60 cm long, with stopcock
Ultrasonic bath
Solvent dispensers, 15 mL, 8 mL and 2 mL
Reflux condenser, jacketed coil type, 30 cm long, with ground joint
Heating mantles, regulated, for 100 mL and 50 mL round-bottomed

flasks
Disposable syringes, 10 mL, with stainless steel needles (flat tip);
AF
needles approx. 15 cm long, straight form and angular bent
Pasteur pipets
Pear-shaped flask, 10 mL, with ground joint
Volumetric flasks, 100 mL, 50 mL and 5 mL
Gas chromatograph equipped with phosphorus-specific flame
photometric
detector
Microsyringes, 100 L and 10 L
3. Reagents
Acetone, p.a.
Dichloromethane, p.a.
Ethanol, p.a.
Ethyl acetate, p.a.
Methanol, p.a.
Methyl acetate, p.a.
Toluene, p.a.
Eluting mixture : methyl acetate + methanol 1:1 v/v
Solvent mixture 1 : methyl acetate + ethanol 1:1 v/v

218
Solvent mixture 2 : methyl acetate + toluene 1:1 v/v
Solvent mixture 3 : methyl acetate + toluene 7:3 v/v
Glufosinate and metabolite standard solutions for fortification

experiments: 5 g/mL of each glufosinate-ammonium or 3methylphosphinico) propionic acid (Riedel-de Haen) in water or, for
fortification of fats and oils, in solvent mixture 1.
Glufosinate derivate standard solution: Methyl 4-[methoxy (methyl)

phosphinoyl]-2-acetamidobutyrate in eluting mixture, equivalent to 5
g7ml glufosinate-ammonium. Prepare by weighing glufosinateammonium and derivatizing as described in 5.2.
Metabolite derivative standard solution: Methyl 3-[methoxy (methyl)
AF
phosphinoyl) propionate in eluting mixture, equivalent to 5 g/mL

metabolite. Prepare by weighing 3-(methylphosphinico) propionic
acid and derivatizing as described in 5.2.
Polyethylene glycol solution: 10 g/100 mL polyethylene glycol 400

p.a. in acetone Glacial acetic acid, p.a.
Hydrochloric acid, 10 g/100 g HC1 p.a.
Formic acid, 10 mL/100 mL HCOOH p.a.
Ammonia solution, 10 g/100 mL and 1 g/100 mL NH3
Sodium hydroxide solution, 1 mol/1 NaOH
Trimethyl ortho acetate
Cation exchanger, Strong active ion exchanger I (merck No. 4765)
Preparation : Add 2 mL hydrochloric acid to 1000 g cation exchange

in a beaker, allow to stand for 30 min, decant, wash the resin with
water until neutral (pH indicator paper), and further treat, in the
following sequence with :
Ammonia solution (9 g/100 mL), allow to stand for 5 min, wash to
neutral with water;
219
Ethanol-water mixture (1:1 v/v), allow to stand for 30 min;

Hydrochloric acid (conversion to H form), wash with water until
neutral + Cation exchange column Pour 6 g of the damp cation
exchanger as prepared above into a chromatographic tube
Anion exchanger, Strong basic: Dowex 1X8 (Serva No. 41091)

Preparation: Allow the resin (in the chloride form as supplied) to swell
in water for 1 h. Pour approx. 100 g of the swollen resin into a

chromatographic tube (type 2), and wash with 750 ml sodium
AF
hydroxide solution to convert it into the OH~ form. Wash with water
until the eluate has become neutral to pH indicator paper.
Anion exchange column: Pour 6 g of the damp anion exchanger as
prepared above into a chromatographic tube pH indicator paper
RP-18 disposable cartiridge: Sep-Pak Cartridge C (Millipore No.
51910)
Silica gel, deactivated with 4% water: Heat silica gel 60, 0.063-0.200
mm (Merck No.7734), for 6 h at 130C, allow to cool in a desiccator,
and store in a tightly stoppered container in the desiccator. To 100 g

dried silica gel in a 300 mL Erlenmeyer flask (with ground joint), add
4 mL water dropwise from a pipette, with continuous swirling.
Immediately stopper flask with ground stopper, shake vigorously for 5
min until all lumps have disappeared, next shake for 2 h on a
mechanial shaker, and then store in a tightly stoppered container.
Quartzwool
Air
Helium
Hydrogen
220
4. Procedure
4.1Extraction
4.1.1 Plant material with water content (apples, asparagus, bananas, beans,
Chinese cabbage, kiwi fruit, lemons, mirabellas, oranges, plums, potatoes,
sour cherries, sugar beet) and soil
Homogenize 25 g of the analytical sample (G) with 200 mL water in a 500 mL

Erlenmeyer flask. Cover the flask with a watch glass, and magnetically stir the
homogenate for 30 min at room temperature, prepare the volume of the
AF
homogenate (V), and centrifuge a 60 mL portion at 3000 r.p.m. for 10 min. Pipet
20 mL of the supernatant (VX) into a 50 mL round bottomed flask and rotaryevaporate to dryness, using a 60C bath temperature. Add 5-10 mL ethyl acetate
to the residue and rotary-evaporate to dryness again to remove residual traces of
water. Repeat if required until the residue is absolutely dry.
4.1.2 Plant material with high content of water soluble carbohydrates or

proteins (almonds, caraway, maize, peas, soybeans, wheat)

Erlenmeyer flask. Cover the flask with a watch glass, and magnetically stir the
homogenate for 30 min at room temperature. Measure the volume of the
homogenate (VEx), and centrifuge a 60 mL portion at 300 r.p.m. for 10 min.
Take 40 mL of the supernatant (V.) and add 40 mL acetone to precipitate
carbohydrates and proteins (total volume, V2). Centrifuge the mixture again.
Pipet 40 mL of the supernatant (V3) into a 100 mL round bottomed flask and
rotary-evaporate to dryness, using firstly room temperature, then a 60C bath
temperature. Add 5-10 mL ethyl acetate to the residue and rotary-evaporate to
221
dryness again to remove residual traces of water. Repeat if required until the
residue is absolutely dry.
4.1.3 Fatty plant material (rape, sunflower seeds)
Erlenmeyer flask (total volume of the homogenate, VEx). Cover the flask with a
watch glass, and magnetically stir the homogenate for 30 min at room
temperature. Allow solid particles to settle, then decant 40 mL of the supernatant
(VR1) into a centrifuge tube, and add 40 mL acetone (total volume of the
mixture, V^). Mix, and centrifuge the mixture at 3000 rpm for 5 min. Next,
transfer 40 mL of the supernatant as (V^) into a 100 mL separatory funnel and
AF
shake with 20 mL dichloromethane. Separate the lower organic phase and reextract it twice with 10 mL portions of water. Combine the aqueous phases in a
100 mL round bottomed flask and rotary evaporate to dryness, using firstly room
temperature, than a 60C bath temperature. Add 5-10 mL ethyl acetate to the
residue and rotary evaporate to dryness again to remove residual traces of water.
Repeat if required until the residue is absolutely dry.
4.1.4 Fats and oils (primrose oil, sunflower oil)
Dissolve 20 g of the analytical sample (G) in 100 mL dichloromethane (use the

homogenizer for dissolution of solid fat if required). Add 100 mL water (VEx)
and homogenize for 5 min. Decant approx. 60 mL of the aqueous supernatant

into a centrifuge tube and centrifuge at 3000 r.p.m. for 5 min. Force 25 mL of
the supernatant (VR1) through a RP-18 disposable cartridge by forcing through 3
mL water. Collect both the aqueous eluate and the wash in a 50 mL roundbottomed flask and rotary evaporate to dryness, using a 60C bath temperature.
Add 5-10 mL ethyl acetate to the residue and rotary-evaporate to dryness again
222
to remove residual traces of water. Repeat if required until the residue is

absolutely dry.
4.1.5 Water
Before concentrating glufosinate and its metabolite on an anion exchange
column, the cations present in the water must be exchanged for H+. For this
purpose, the ion exchange columns are connected in series, so that the eluate
from the cation exchanger flows directly onto the anion exchanger.
AF
Using a 1-1 separatory funnel, transfer 1L of the water sample (G) onto the
cation exchange column at a rate of 5-10 mL/min. Wash both columns with 100
mL of distilled or deionized water, and discard the eluates. Remove the cation
exchange column. Next elute glufosinote and its metabolite with 70 ml dilute
formic acid into a 100 ml round- bottomed flask. Add 100 ^polyethylene glycol
solution to the eluate and rotary-evaporate to dryness, using a 60C bath

temperature. Add 5-10 mL ethyl acetate to the residue and rotary-evaporate to
dryness again to remove residual traces of water. Repeat if rquired until the
residue is absolutely dry.

4.2Dcrivatization
Suspend the residue derived from extraction step in 2 mL glacial acetic acid by
dipping the flask for 10 min in an ultrasonic bath. Add 8 mL trimethyl
orthoacetate, dip the flask for a further 5 min in the ultrasonic bath, and then
reflux the mixture for 4 h with occasional swirling to prevent suspended solids
from baking onto the walls of the flask.
223
Allow to cool, add 15 mL toluene, and rotary-evaporate to a residual volume of

approx. 1 mL (do not evaporate to dryness!) with 40C bath temperature. Repeat
the evaporation with toluene twice more to completely remove residual acetic
acid and derivatization reagent.
Make up the 0.5-1 mL residue to 3 mL with toluene, dip the flask for 1 min in
the ultrasonic bath, and draw up the flask contents, including the suspended solid
material, into a 10 mL disposable syringe. Rinse the flask with 5 mL ethyl
acetate, dip the flask for approx. 2 min in the ultrasonic bath, and also draw up
the rinsing into the syringe. Mix the contents well by shaking the syringe.
4.3 Insert a quartz wool plug into the bottom of a Pasteur pipet and add 0.6 g
AF
silica gel. Condition the column with 5 mL solvent mixture 2 delivered from a
disposable syringe with a 15 cm long stainless steel needle. Using the needle,
stir the silica gel solvent mixture until it is free of air bubbles. Filter the solution
derived from derivative. Then step in the first syringe through a filter cartridge
mounted on the syringe and, with the aid of an angular bent needle, transfer the
filtrate onto the mini silica gel column. Rinse the flask from with 10mL methyl
acetate. Drawn up the rinsing into the syringe, filter and transfer it onto the
column in a similar manner. When the column has run dry, apply gentle suction
to dry the packing. Next, elute the derivatives of glufosinate and its metabolite
from the column with eluting mixture, collecting exactly 5 mL eluate (VEnd) in a
5 mL volumetric flask.
For samples of drinking water, evaporate the 5 mL of eluate to approx. 100

fusing a 40C water bath and a gentle stream of nitrogen, and make up to 1.5 mL
(VEnd) with eluting mixture.
224
For most other sample materials, a second cleanup on a mini silica gel column is
recommended. Transfer the eluate to a pear-shaped flask using 3 mL toluene and
rotary- evaporate (40C bath temperature) to approx. 1 mL. The methanol must
be removed completely. Make up to 3 mL with toluene, and mix with 5 mL
methyl acetate, as described in 5.2. Rechromatograph the mixture on a mini
silica gel column as described above, with the exception of the filtration step.
4.4 Gas-chromatographic determination
Inject an aliquot of the solution derived from 4.3, e.g. 5 L (V.), into the gas
AF
chromatograph.
Gas chromatograph
A Gas Chromatograph 8045), split exit closed or
equivalent.
Column
Fused silica capillary, 0.53 mm i.d., 10m long;
coated with Carbowax 20 M, film thickness 0.25
a (Restek) or equivalent
Isothermal at 150C for 2 min, programmed to
rise at 39C/ min from 150 to 240C, then
Column temperature
isothermal at 240C for 4 min
Injection Port temperature:
225C
Detector
Flame photometric detector, equipped with 526-
nm phosphorus filter, Temperature 225C

Gas flow rates
Helium carrier, 28 mL/min (2314 cm/s),

Hydrogen, 75 mL/min Air, 125 mL/min
Injection volume
5L
225
Retention times for
Metabolite derivative -
42s
Glufosinate derivative -
4 min 18s.
Column
Alternative Conditions:
Fused silica capillary, 0.53 mm i.d., 8 m long;
AF
coated with RTX- 2330, film thickness 0.25 ffl

(Restek) or equivalent, provided standardization
is done.
Column temperature
Isothermal at 140C for 2 min, programmed to
rise at 39C/min from 140 to 240C, then
isothermal at 240C for 4 min
Gas flow rates
Helium carrier, 25 mL/min (180 cm/s) Helium
purge gas, 10 mL/min Hydrogen, 70 mL/min
Air,
Retention times for
120
Metabolite derivative -
1min 24 s
Glufosinate derivative - 5min
5. Evaluation
226
5.1 Method
Quantitation is performed by measuring the peak areas or peak heights of the
sample solutions and comparing them with the peak areas or peak heights
obtained from the derivative standard solutions. Equal volumes of the sample
solutions and the derivative standard solutions should be injected; additionally,
the peaks of the solutions should exhibit comparable areas or heights.
5.2 Recoveries and lowest determined concentration
The recoveries from untreated control samples, fortified with glufosinateammonium or metabolite at levels of 0.05 to 10 mg/kg, ranged from 64 to 116%.
AF
The routine limit of determination was 0.05 mg/kg for plant material, fats, oils
and soil, 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg for animal matrices.
R=
FA.VEx.VR2.VEnd
----------------------------------------------------------------
WSt / FSt.VR1.V R3.V j. G
Where,
Sample weight (in g)
total volume of homogenate or (for fats and oils) volume of water
VEx
added to the organic phoase for extraction (in mL)
VR1
portion of volume VEx used for further processing (in mL)
VR2
total volume of the aqueous solution with acetone added (in mL)
VR3
portion of volume VR2 used for further processing (in mL)
VEnd =
Vj

portion of volume VEnd injected into gas chromatograph (in L).
227
WSt
amount of glufosinate- ammonium equivalents or metabolite

equivalents, respectively, injected with derivative standard solution
or fortified calibration solution (in ng)
FA
peak area or height obtained from Vj (in mm2 or integerator counts)
FSt
peak area or height obtained from WSt (in mm2 or integratorcounts)
Where,
G
VEnd =
=
FA. VEnd. WSt / FSt. Vj. G
sample volume (in 1)

portio of volume VEnd injected into gas chromatograph (in L)
Vj
AF
For water,
WSt
amount of glufosinate-ammonium equivalents or metabolite
equivalents, respectively, injected with derivative standard solution
or fortified calibration solution (in mg)
FA
peak area or height obtained from Vj (in mm2 or integrator counts)
FSt
peak area or height obtained from WSt (in mm2 or integrator

counts)
To calculate glufosinate as free acid, multiply the results for glufosinateammonium by a factor of 0.91, and the result for the metabolite by a factor of
1.19.
228
Reference:
AF
Hoechst, A.G., Product Development, Division C, Frankfurt/Main, H. Sochor.
229
LINURON
Linuron is alkali hydrolyzed in the presence of the analytical material under

reflux conditions. The resultant aniline is simultaneously steam-distilled and
extracted from the distillage with isooctane. Following cleanup by column

chromatography, the aniline is acetylated with acetic anhydride. The final gaschromatographic determination can be performed with either an alkali flame
2. Apparatus
AF
ionization detector or an electrolytic conductivity detector.
Pyrex round-bottomed flask, 2-1, with NS 29 ground joint
Round-bottomed flasks, 250 mL and 100 mL, with NS 29 ground
joint
Bleidner apparatus, for hydrolysis, distillation and extraction
Heating mantles, for 2-1 and 250 mL round-bottomed flasks
Chromatographic tube, 1 cm i.d., 20 cm long
Gas chromatograph equipped with alkali flame ionization detector
or electrolytic
conductivity detector
Microsyringe, 10 L
3. Reagents
Ethanol, distilled in glass

230
Dichloromethane, distilled in glass
n-hexane, distilled in glass
Isooctane, pure
n-hexane + ethanol mixture 1:1 v/v
Eluting mixture 1 : n-hexane + dichloromethane 7:1 v/v
Eluting mixture 2: n-hexane + dichloromethane 1:4 v/v
Standard solution : 1g/mL
Acetic anhydride, p.a.
Sodium hydroxide solution, 40 g/ 100 mL NaOH p.a.
Aluminium oxide, basic, W 200, activity grade III: to 100 g
aluminium oxide add 7g water.
Antifoam liquid, e.g. NOPCO NXZ (Nopco or Serva)
Compressed air, re-purified
Helium
Nitrogen, re-purified.
AF
4. Procedure
4.1 Hydrolysis, distillation and extraction

Weigh 50 g of the comminuted analytical sample into a 2-1 Pyrex roundbottomed flask. Then add 300 mL distilled water, 200 mL sodium hydroxide
solution, 10 mL NOPCO Antifoam and a few boiling chips. Place the flask in a
heating mantle, half-fill the U-tube of the Bleidner apparatus with water and
isooctane, and connect the flask to the lower arm of the Bleidner apparatus.
Attach a 250 mL round-bottomed flask filled with 100 mL isooctane to the
upper arm of the Bleidner apparatus. Heat both flasks for 14 h at a temperature
that will ensure condensation of equal amounts of water and isooctane (this can
be checked easily from the volumes of the immiscible solvent phases in the
capillary of the Bleidner apparatus).
231
On completion of the distillation-extraction step, let the isooctane cool to room

temperature.
4.2 Cleanup on an aluminium oxide column

Fill the chromatographic tube with isooctane, and slowly add aluminium oxide,
activity grade III, to a level of approx. 12-14 cm (10 mL). Drain the supernatant
isooctane to the level of the adsorbent. Next add the whole of the isooctane
phase from the Bleidner extraction to the column. Wash the column with 40 mL
of eluting mixture 1. Then elute the anilines with 40 mL of eluting mixture 2
4.3Acetylation
AF
into a 100 mL round bottomed flask.
To the elute collected from the aluminium oxide column add 10 mL acetic
anhydride. Attach the flask to the rotary evaporator, and rotate without vacuum
for 10 min in a water bath heated to 45C. Next evaporate the eluate to dryness
under vacuum. Rinse the flask walls with 5 mL of deionized water, and rotary-
evaporate to dryness at a water bath temperature of 45C.
4.4 Gas-chromatographic determination

Dissolve the residue in 1 mL of hexane-ethanol mixture. Inject an aliquot of the
solution into the gas chromatograph.

Gas chromatograph
Column
DB Wax 15 X 0.25 mm id or equivalent,
232
Column temperature
Programmed to rise from 150C to 260C at a

rate of 8C/min , Hold 15 min
240C
Detectors
a) Electrolytic conductivity detector
Helium, 5.0 mL/min
Oven temperature
740C
Catalyst
Granulated nickel
Strontium hydroxide
Purge gas flow rate
Helium, 2.0 mL/min
Reactant gas flow rate
Hydrogen, 50 mL/min
AF
Absorber for acidic gases:
Transfer line temperature :
235C
Voltage
30V
4 V full-scale deflection
Attenuation
Sensitivity
b) Alkali flame ionization detector (AFID)
Gas flow rates
Nitrogen carrier, 30mL/min

Hydrogen, 35 mL/min
Temperature
Air, approx. 230 mL/min
Sensitivity
240C
Recorder
16.10-12 A full-scale deflection

1mV; chart speed 1 cm/min
233
Injection volume
: 105 L for electrolytic conductivity detector

0.1-1 L for AFID
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
Linuron g/g (ppm) = --------------------------- x f x 1.22
where,
AF
A1 = peak area of the sample
A2 x V1 x M
V2 = volume (in L) of standard linuron injected solution.

V3 = Total volume in mL of the sample
C = Concentration in g/mL of standard linuron injected solution.
A2 = Peak area of the standard linuron solution

V1 = Volume in L of the sample solution.
M = Mass of the sample.

F = Recovery factor
Reference
Zwig, G. (Edit).Analytical method for pesticides, plant growth regulators.

Academic Press, New York-Sen Francisco, London. Volume 5 (1967), pp. 434437.
234
DIQUAT AND PARAQUAT
Residue method of paraquat

a. Principle
The sample is extracted by refluxing with 18 N sulfuric acid, filtered,

neutralized, and cleaned up by means of an ion exchange column. Diquat or
paraquat is eluted from the column with saturated ammonium chloride and
measured after alkaline reduction with sodium dithionite to a free radical having
b. Reagents
AF
a strong absorption peak at 380 nm for diquat or 394nm for paraquat.
Ion exchange resin. Dowex 50-W-X8, 200-400 mesh, hydrogen form.

Place the resin in a large chromatography column and backwash the
resin with water to remove the fine particles.
Sodium dithionite (sodium hydrosulfite), purified powder.
Caprylic alcohol.
EDTA (Ethylenedinitrilotetraacetic acid disodium salt). Diquat

dibromide and Paraquat dichloride analytical standards.
c. Equipment
Boiling flasks, 1000 mL, standard taper, with heating mantles and
reflux condensers.
235
Chromatography columns, 10 x 200 mm, equipped with Teflon

stopcoc
ks and a reservoir at the top.
AF
pH meter.
Spectrophotometer, Beckman DB or equivalent.
d. Experimental procedure
i. Preparation of sample
Macerate a representative sample in a food chopper or blender. Transfer a 50 g

sample to a 1000 mL boiling flask and add boiling stones and 40 mL deionized
water. Carefully add 40 mL concentrated sulfuric acid. Attach a water condenser
to the flask and heat at reflux temperature for 30-60 minutes. Using an asbestos
glove, occasionally swirl the flask during reflux. If the sample foams
excessively, add 1-5 mL caprylic alcohol through the top of the condenser. After
refluxing, add 600 mL of water and filter with suction through Whatman No. 1
filter paper in a Buchner funnel. Transfer the filtrate to a 100 mL beaker and add
approximately 70 mL of 50% sodium hydroxide and 3 g EDTA. Stir and adjust
the solution to pH 9.
ii. Cleanup
236
Place a glass wool plug in the bottom of a chromatography column (10 x 200
mm) and add 6 mL settled ion exchange resin in water. Insert a glass wool plug
above the resin column. Rinse the column with 25 mL of 6 M sodium chloride
followed by 50 mL of water. Transfer the sample extract to a two-neck flask
fitted with a stopper and glass tube extending to the bottom of the flask. Position
the flask above the column and connect the glass tube in the two-neck flask to
the top of the column with Tygon tubing and a rubber stopper fitted with glass
tubing. Force the extract through the column at a rate of 5-10 mL/minute using
air pressure (3 psi) at the side neck of the two-neck flask. Rinse the column with
25 mL of water, followed by 25 mL of 0.5 M ammonium chloride. Elute the
diquat or paraquat with 5 M ammonium chloride at a rate of 1 mL per 90
AF
seconds. Collect exactly 25 mL of eluate.
iii.. Measurement
After mixing, transfer a 15 mL portion of eluate to a test tube. Add 3 mL of
freshly prepared sodium dithionite solution (0.2% in 0.5 N sodium hydroxide)

Stopper and mix very gently. Immediately measure the absorbance at the
maximum (approximately 380 nm for diquat or 394 nm for paraquat) and at 4
nm on each side of the maximum. Use 4 or 5 cm cells and a reference solution

containing a mixture of 15 mL of 5 M ammonium chloride and 3 mL of sodium
dithionite solution. With each set of determinations, measure the absorbances of
a standard solution containing 0.5 g/mL diquat or paraquat in 5 M ammonium
chloride. Correct the absorbance of the sample for background as follows:
Ams
Acorr. =
[2Am-(Ah+ Ai)]
2Ams (Ahs + Als)
where,
237
Am = observed absorbance of sample at maximum (Am);

Al = observed absorbance of sample at 4 nm lower than maximum (A1);
Ah = observed absorbance of sample at 4 nm higher than maximum (Ah);
Ams = absorbance of standard diquat or paraquat at Am;
Ahs = absorbance of standard diquat or paraquat at Ah.
The factor Ams / {2 Ams - (Ahs + Als) is a constant that is calculated from the
average absorbances of the standard solution measured before and after each set
iv. Limit of detectability
of samples.
Reference
AF
The limit of detectability of the method is 0.01 ppm when a 50 g sample is used.
Zwig, G. Analytical methods of pesticides - Plant growth regulators. Academic
Press, New York, San Francisco-London. Vol. X (1980). pp. 321-325.
238
ATRAZINE AND SIMAZINE
This analytical method describes gas chromatographic (GLC) method for

determination of atrazine and semazine residues in food, and water sample. The
limit of determination of the compound is 0.05 g/g by the GLC method.
Waring Blender
AF
Laboratory shaker (Rotary action)
Apparatus
Chromatographic column, 25 cm long x 2 cm

Air blower
Water bath
Gas Chromatograph
Equipped with a nitrogen specific detector and operating under the following
suggested parameters. These parameters may be varied according to the
available facilities, provided standardization is done:
Column : A fused Silica capillary DB 5 Column 30mts X 0.25 id

mm id DB5
239
Temperatures:
Column oven: 140C-1min Ramp @ 2 - 240C
Hold 10min ramp @10C to 260 hold 10 min or any equivalent

column, provided standardization is done.
:
300C
Detector
240C
0.7mL/min rate
Retention time:Atrazine :
6.0minutes approximately
Semazine
Microliter syringe
Carrier gas (nitrogen) flow:
7.0 mixture approximately

1.0L capacity.
AF
Regents
Injector
Chloroform - AR grade Petroleum Ether- boiling range 40-60C
Ethyl Ether - 5 percent (v/v) in carbon tetrachloride.

Carbon tetrachloride
Acetonitrile - AR grade
Methanol - AR grade
Sodium acetate buffer solution - Mix equal volumes of 2 N acetic
acid and 1 N sodium hydroxide solution
Reactivated basic alumina - Mix 90 g basic alumina with 10 mL

water thoroughly and allow to stand overnight.
Acetic Acid - 2N.
Sodium hydroxide solution -1 N.
240
Sodium sulphate Anhydrous

Ethyl acetate -AR grade
Reference standard Atrazine and simazine is of known purity.
Extraction:
Grain, Straw, Hay (Low Moisture)

Transfer a suitable quantity (50-100 g) finely ground sample into a waring
blender, add 100 mL chloroform and homogenize for 5 minutes. Transfer the
AF
contents quantitatively to a stoppered 1000 mL conical flask, add 100 mL

chloroform and shake the slurry vigorously on a rotary-action laboratory shake
for one hour. Filter the extract by decanting, through a layer of anhydrous
sodium sulphate mounted on a Waterman No. 1 or equivalent filter paper and a
funnel. Note the exact volume of the filtrate obtained, Evaporate an aliquot of
the extract, equivalent to 50 g of the crop sample, carefully to dryness on a water
bath in a 250-mL beaker, with the help of a gentle stream of air.
Fruits and vegetables
Transfer a suitable quantity (100 g) of the finlely chopped fruit or vegetable

sample into a waring blender along with about 100 g anhydrous sodium sulphate
and 100 mL of chloroform. Blend the mixture for 5 minutes. Follow the
procedure as in grains.
Fatty crops, such as Oilseeds and Nuts

Follow the extraction procedure described in above. Evaporate chloroform
completely on the water bath with the help of steam of air and dissolve the
241
residue in 50 mL petroleum ether. Transfer the solution to a 250 mL separatory

funnel and wash the beaker twice with 20 mL portions of petroleum ether
transferring the washigs into the separtory funnel. Extract the petroleum ether
solution in the separatory funnel thrice with 25 mL portions of acetonitrile. Pool
the acetonitrile extract, and transfer to a second 250 mL sepratory funnel and
wash with 50 mL petroleum ether. Discard the petroleum ether layer. Transfer
the acetonitrile solution quantitatively, directly to the round bottom flask of the
rotary vacuum evaporator and completely evaporate off the acetonitrile under
AF
Water
slightly reduced pressure and with a water bath at 50C.
Transfer 500 mL of the water sample into a 1000-mL separatory funnel and
extract the aqueous layer thrice with 60 mL portions of chloroform. Pool the
chloroform extracts in a 250 mL beaker and evaporate the contents to dryness on
a water bath with the help of a stream of air.
Clean up
Add 25 g reactivated basic alumina to the chromatographic column, tap gently to

eliminate channeling and to achieve uniform packing. Dissolve the extracted
sample residue in 10 mL carbon tetrachloride, transfer on to the column and
allow to penetrate into the alumina. Wash the beaker with 10 mL of carbon tetra-
chloride and transfer to the column allowing to penetrate as before. This

operation shall be further repeated with another 5 mL of carbon tetrachloride.
When the solvent has just penetrated into the column, add 80 mL of carbon
tetrachloride has drained down, place a clean 250 mL beaker as receiver, and
add 100 mL of 5 percent ethyl ether in carbon tetrachloride collecting the
242
complete eluate in the beaker. Evaporate the contents of the beaker to dryness on
a water bath with a stream of air.
Gas chromatographic method

Principle
The residue of atrazine or simazine extracted from the sample after clean up is
dissolved in ethyl acetate and estimated gas chromatographically in an

instrument equipped with a nitrogen specific detector. The content of atrazine
and simazine in the sample is determined by comparing the response with the
Calculations:
AF
response of a known standard of similar concentration.
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
Residue of atrazine/simazine = --------------------------- x f

A2 x V, x M
Where
Aj
peak area of the samples;
V2
volume, in L of standard solution injected;
V3
total volume, in mL, of sample solution;
concentration in ppm, of the standard solution;
recovery factor = 100 / percent mean recovery
A2
peak area of standard simazine or atrazine
V,
volume in L of sample solution injected; and

243
mass, in g, of sample taken for analysis.
References
1. Indian Standard 13829 : 1993.
2. Zwig, G. Analytical methods for pesticides - Plant growth regulators.
Academic Press, Volume X, 513-524
AF
Eclet.Quim.Vol 27 Sao Paulo 2002.
3. Determination of herbicide residues in soil by small scale extraction
244
METRIBUZIN
Principle
The method prescribes typical method for metribuzin (4-amino-6-tert-butyl-(3methylthio)-l,2,4-triozin-5 (4H)-one) in plant material, and water.
Plant samples are extracted with acetonitrile and water samples are extracted
with a mixture of ethyl acetate and dichloromethane. The acetonitrile extract
from cereal grains is cleaned up by shaking out with petroleum ether. Following
AF
evaporation of the extract, the residue is dissolved in methanol and determined

by gas chromatography using a nitrogen specific alkali flame ionization detector.
Apparatus
Blender, E.G.
Glass suction filter
Round-bottomed flasks, 1-L, 500-mL and 50-mL
Polyethylene bottle, 500-mL

Shaking machine,
Rotary vacuum evaporator, bath temperature of 50 C

Separatory funnels, 1-1 and 500 mL
Gas chromatograph equipped with thermionic nitrogen detector
Regents
Acetonitrile, redistilled
Dichloromethane, redistilled
245
Ethyl acetate, redistilled

Helium
Air
Methanol, redistilled
Sodium sulphate, analytical reagent grade, anhydrous
Petroleum ether, boiling range 40-60 C
Hydrogen
Extraction
AF
Analytical procedure
Metribuzin standard solutions
Plant material like barley (green and straw), potato tubers, potato tops, alfalfa,
asparagus, tomatoes, tomato tops Macerate 100 g of the prepared plant sample
(G) with 200 mL of acetonitrile for about 2 minutes in the blender. Filter the
macerate through a suction filter.
Reblend the filter cake with 200 mL of acetonitrile, and filter the macerate
through a suction filter. Rinse the blender jar and the suction filter with a total of
150 mL of acetonitrile, and combine these washings with the filtrate in a 1 - litre
round-bottomed flask. Carefully rotary-evaporate the combined solutions until
they are free of acetonitrile; immediately chill the aqueous residues in an ice
bath.
Grains
Macerate a 50 g portion of ground grains with 100 mL of acetonitrile for about 5
minutes in the blender. Macerate through a suction filter. Reblend the filter cake
246
with 100mL of acetonitrile, and filter the macerate through a suction filter. Rinse
the blendor jar and the suction filter with a total of 150 mL of acetonitrile.
Combine these washings with the filtrate in a 1- litre seperatory funnel.
Water samples
Extract a water sample (500 mL) three times with 100 mL portions of a 9:1
dichloromethane: ethylacetate mixture by shaking in a separatory funnel. Filter
the combined lower dichloromethane ethyl acetate phased over approx. 10 g of
AF
sodium sulphate through a fluted filter, and rotary-evaporate just to dryness.
Cleanup of extracts
Plant material
After chilling it in an ice bath, filter the aqueous residue derived through a fluted
filter into a 500 mL separatory funnel. Rinse the round bottomed flask and fluted
filter with approx. 100 mL of water and add the washing to the separatory
funnel. Shake out the combined filtrates successively with 200, 200 and 100 mL
protions of dichloromethane. Filter the combined dichloromethane phases over
approx. 10 g of sodium sulphate through a fluted filter into a 1 litre roundbottomed flask, and rotary- evaporate just to dryness.
Grains
Shake out the combined acetonitrile solutions derived above, successively with
100 and 100 mL portions of petroleum ether. Discard the petroleum ether
phases. Rotary-evaporate the acetonitrile phase just to dryness.
247
Gas-chromatographic determination
Transfer the residue derived from plant material, grains, soil and water into a
50 mL round-bottomed flask using methanol to complete the transfer, rotaryvaporate the solution jst to dryness, and dissolve their residue in 2.0 mL of
methanol. If the sample solution has an excessive content of metribuzin, dilute it
to another appropriate terminal volume. Inject an aliquot of this solution (Vj)
into the gas chromatograph in operated at the following conditions:
Column glass tube 180 cm long, 2.3 mm id packed with 8% DC - 550 + 2Y DC
AF
on gas chrom Q 80-100 mesh, column temperature 230, Detector 390C,

Injection port temperature 360C.
Evaluation
Procedure
The gas chromatogram was evaluated by measuring the peak area of the sample
and comparing it with that obtained for the standard solutions of metribuzin.
Equal volumes of the extract solutions and the standard solutions should be
injected.
Calculation of residues
The residue R in mg/ kg metribuzin is calculated by applying the following

equation:
248
FA. VEnd. Wst

R=
------------------------ .F
FSt. Vj. G
Where
F = recovery factor determined by analyst
FA = peak area of sample obtained from Vj (mm2)

FSt = peak area of standard obtained from WSt (mm2)
AF
G = sample weight (g)
VEnd = terminal volume of methanol solution (mL)

Vj = portion of terminal volume
VEnd injected into gas chromatograph (L)
WSt = amount of parent compound injected with the standard solution (ng).
Comments
All the steps of the analytical procedure and the final determination should be
conducted and completed on one and the same day to avoid conversion of
metribuzin to its metabolites in the extracts.
Reference
Pflenzenschutz Naohrichten Bayer 31 (1978), 84-97.
249
2,4-D
The analytical method prescribes gas liquid chromatographic method for

determination of 2, 4-D residues in food commodities.
Gas Chromatograph (GLC)
Apparatus
GLC fitted with an electron capture detector (Ni63) and printer-plotter
AF
cum integrator. The following operating parameters are suggested,

which can be changed provided standardization is done:
Column:Glass column of DB 1 30m X 0.25 mm id GC
Temperature180 C
Column oven Injector2500C

Detector280 C
Carrier gasNitrogen
Flow rate20
Miro syringe2L
Note- Approximate retention time for 2, 4-D Me is 4 minutes and the
minimum detectable level is 0.01 ppm under the suggested operating

parameters at the single to noise ratio 1:3
High speed blender
Analytical balance capable of weighing 0.1 mg
Mechanical shaker
250
Vacuum rotary evaporator

Stoppered bottles 500 mL
Round bottom flasks 500 mL
Buchner funnel and flask
Volumetric pipettes 1 mL and 10 mL
Separatory funnels 500 mL
Measuring cylinder 10 mL, 250 mL
Diazald kit (aldrish chemical company US) or suitable apparatus for
Reagents
Acetone
AF
diazomethane preparation (Fig. 1).
Chloroform
Diethyl ether
Ethyl alcohol 99.9 percent purity

Hydrocholoric acid 2.0 N
Sodium bicarbonate AR grade
Sodium hydroxide AR grade
N-methyl N-nitrosotoluene-4-sulphonamide 20 per cent w/v solution in

diethylether
Anhydrous sodium sulphate AR grade
Filter paper Whatman No.41
251
Neutral alumina (60-100 mesh) colum chromatographic grade

Florisil (60-100 mesh) colum chromatographic grade
2,4-D acid analytical standard of high purity
Diazomethane
Diazomethane preparation
Diazomethane is very toxic; its preparation should be carried out only in a fume
cupboard (hood) provided with a powerful exhaust system. The use of a screen
AF
of safety glass is recommended.
Add 50mL of 96 percent ethanol to a solution of 10 g of potassium hydroxide in

15mL of water. Place this solution in a 500 mL distillation flask equipped with a
dropping funnel and an efficient double surface condenser. Connect the other
end of condenser to a conical flask of 200 mL capacity to act a receiver charge

the conical flask with 40 mL of ether and arrange that the inlet tube of the
smaller receiver dips below the surface of the ether. Cool the receiver in an ice-
salt mixture. Heat the distillation flask in a water bath at 60-65, place a solution
of 43 g of N-methyl N-nitrosotoluene-4-sulphonamide in about 250 mL of ether
in dropping funnel and introduce it into the distillation flask over a period of 45
minutes. Adjust the rate of addition so that it is about equal to the rate of
distillation. When the dropping funnel is empty, add more ether (capacity 30
mL) gradually for completing ether distilling in colourless form, the combined
ethereal solutions in the receivers contain 5.9-6.1 g of diazomethane.
For smaller quantities of diazomethane dissolve 2.14g of N-methyl Nnitrosotoluene-4 sulphonamide in 30 mL of ether. Cool in ice. And add a
252
solution of 0.4 g of potassium hydroxide in 10 mL of 96 percent ethanol. If a

precipitate forms, add more ethanol until it just dissolves. After 5 minute, distill
the etheral diazomethane solution from a water bath. The etheral solution
contains 0.32-0.35 g of diazomethane.
Precautions
Notes: The nitroso compound from which diazomethane can be derived are all
toxic and carcinogenic and should be handled with caution as they cause skin
AF
irritation.
Esterfication of 2, 4-D Acid
Prepare a stock solution of 10 ppm of 2, 4-D acid in ethanol. To the 1 mL of the

above solution, add 3 mL of diazomethane solution and keep the mixture in
room temperature in the fuming cupboard for 10 minutes. Esterified solution is
evaporated near to dryness at 30C and taken in suitable volume of acetone.
Extraction
Grains straw, oilseeds, fruits, vegetables, and nuts

Take 25 g of homogenized sample in 500 mL stoppered bottle, add 100 mL of
acidified ether and shake in mechanical shake for 15 minutes. Filter the organic
layer and re-extract the sample with 100 mL of acidified ether, filter and
combined the filtrates, concentrate the combined filtrate to 50 mL on a rotary
vacuum evaporator at room temperature.
253
The concentrated extract is partitioned twice with 100 mL and 50 mL of

saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, the collected aqueous layer is furtther
acidified (pH 2-3) using 2 N hydrochloric acid and partitioned twice with 150
mL of chloroform. Collect the chloroform layer each time and dry over
anhydrous sodium sulphate. Evaporate the chlorform extract to near dryness and
the residues are taken in small amount of methanol for column clean up.
Clean-up
Column clean up for grains, straws, fruits, vegetables and nuts. Chromatographic
AF
column (1.8 cm id) packed with 5 g of neutral alumina (activated at 110C) in

between two layers of 2 g of anyhydrous sodium suphate using hexane is
washed with 50 mL of diethyl ether. Transfer the sample soution completely into
the column using 3 mL of ether. Elute the residues using 100 mL of ether and
methanol (90: 10) mixute at a flow rate of 1 mL/min. Collect the elute and
concentrate to dryness and taken in 2 mL of ethanol for esterification.
Derivatization
The samples are esterified by the addition of 3 mL of freshly prepared

diazomethane.
Evaporate the sample solution near to dry ness and taken in suitable volume of
acetone.
Estimation
Inject 0.2 L of reference standard solution of 2, 4-D methyl ester followed by
the samples. Identify the peaks by their retention times and measure the peak
254
heights/areas. Calculate the amount of residues of 2, 4-D as its ester from the
preconstructed calibration curve.
Calculation
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
2, 4-D methyl ester residues = -----------------------------
A2 x V, x M
AF
Where
=
peak area of the samples;
V2
volume, in L of standard solution injected;
V3
total volume, in mL, of sample solution;
concentration in ppm, of the standard solution;
Aj
A2
peak area of standard simazine or atrazine
V,
volume in L of sample solution injected; and
M = mass, in g, of sample taken for analysis.
Residues of 2, 4-D g/g = Amount of 2, 4-D ME x 221/235
Reference:
Indian Standard. IS 14857 : 2000.
255
PENDIMETHALIN
a) Principle
Residues of Prowl {Pendimethalin} N-(l-Ethylpropyl)-3,4-dimethyli 2,6dinitrobenzenamine) is extracted from the crop material with aqueous acid
methanol, with chloroform-methanol and from oil with n-hexane. After removal
achieved on florosil.
of many co-extractives by various solvent partitionings, final clean up is
The residues of Pendimethalin are measured by gas liquid chromatography using
b) Reagents
AF
an electron capture detector.
Pendimethalin standard of known purity
Solvents : n-hexane, benzene, acetonitrite, methanol, chloroform,

pyridine, acetic anhydride
Chromatographic adsorbent: Florosil 60-100 mesh
Acid extraction solvent: aqueous acid - methanol 20 mL of concentrated
hydrochloric acid and 200 mL methanol dissolved in water and made

to 1 liter with water.
Acid salt solution: 8.3 mL of concentrated hydrochloric acid and 120 g of

sodium chloride dissolved in water and made to 1 litre with water.
c) Apparatus
Gas chromatograph: suitable for use with glass columns and equipped
with an on-column injection system and Ni electron capture detector.
Gas chromatograph column: 180 cm borosilicate glass tube (2 mm id

256
16 nm o.d.) designed to fit the chromatograph and packed with 5%

EGSS-X on gas chrom. Q 100-120 mesh.
Chromatographic tubes : 10 mm i.d. x 250 mm, and 20 mm i.d.x 250

mm with reservoir with Teflon stopcock.
Rotary evaporation
Standard solution: Prepare standard solution of Prowl 1g/mL
separately.
d) Extraction
AF
Extraction of Pendimethalin from sample of vegetables, corn, cereal, grains,

peanuts, soybeans, cotton.
Weigh 25 g of sample into 32 ounce narrow mouth bottle. Add 500 mL of

aqueous acid-methanol and shake the contents for 6 hours using a slow
reciprocating shaker. After shaking filter with sunction until about 150 mL of
filtrate is obtained. Transfer 50 mL portion to a seperatory funnel, add 50 mL of
0.1N HCl and extract the solution twice with 100 mL portion of hexane.
Transfer the combined hexane layers to an evaporation flask and remove the
solvent using a roatry evaporator. Dissolve the residue in 100 mL of hexane,
transfer the solution to a seperatory funnel and extract three times 25 mL of

acetonitrile. Transfer the acetonitrile layers to an evaporation flask and remove
the solvent using a rotary evaporator.
Deactivation of florosil: Weigh 500 g of florosil into a shallow tray and dry in an
oven at 130C for 3 hours. After cooling to a room temperature, transfer 500 g
of the dried material to a 1 gallon bottle. Add 30 mL of water tightly stopper and
mix throroughly. Let it stand for 24 hours.
257
Clean up
Dissolve the contents of the flask in 10 mL hexane and transfer to a fresh florosil
column. Open the stopcock and adjust the flow rate to 1 -2 drops for second until
the solvent reach the top of the packing. Repeat the rinse and wash with two
additional portions of hexane. Elute the compound from the column with 150
mL of hexane-benzene (80:20 v/v) using a flow rate of 3-4 drops per second.
Evaporate the contents of the flask to dryness in a rotary evaporator. Dissolve
63
Gas chromatograph with
the residue in 5 mL. benzene. Analyse by GLC as per procedure.

N electron capture detector, A DB 5 GLC column
AF
30m X 0.53X 1.5 micron

:
240C
260C
270C
Gas flow rate
25mL/min
Column temperature
Retention time
6 min
Calculation
A1 x V2 x V3 x C
Pendimethalin residue (mg/kg) = ------------------------- x f

A2 x Vj x M
Where,
A1
Peak area of the sample
V2
Volume in L standard solution injected

258
Total volume in mL of sample solution
Concentration in ppm of the standard solution
Recovery factor = 100/per cent recovery
Vj
Volume in L the sample solution injected
A2
Peak area of the standard
Mass in g of the sample taken for analysis.
V3
AF
Reference
Gunter Zwig Analytical methods for pesticides and plant growth regulators.
Academic Press, Volume X (1978), pp. 461-482.
259
ORGANO CHLORINE PESTICIDES IN

WATER BY GAS CHROMATGRAPHIC METHOD
The analytical method describes determination of aldrin, -BHC, -BHC,

-BHC, -BHC, chlordane, 4,4-DDD, 4,4'- DDE, 4,4'- DDT, dieldrin,
endosulfan-I, endosulfan-II, endosulfan sulfate, endrin, endrin aldehyde,
heptachlor, and heptochlor expoxide in water.
Principle Measured volume of test portion (1L) is extracted with CH2Cl2 by
AF
shaking in separatory funnel or mechanical tumbling in bottle. CH2Cl2 extract is

separated, dried with anhydrous Na2SO4, solvent exchanged with methyl tertbutyl ether (MTBE), and concentrated to 5 mL. Pesiticides are separated and
measured by capillary column gas chromatography with electron-capture
detection.
Apparatus
Separatory funnel - 2000 mL, with TFE - fluorocarbon stopcock and

ground-glass or TFE fluorocarbon stopper.
Tumber bottle - 1.7 L, with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap. Cut liners
to fit screw cap from sheets and extract overnight with methane before
use.
Kuderna Danish (K-D) apparatus (1) Concentrator tube -10 or 25 mL,
graduated (Kontes 570050-1025 or 570050-2525, or equivalent). Check
calibration of concentrator tube at volumes used in method. Use groundglass stoppers to preent evaporation of extracts (2) Evaporation flask - 500
260
mL (Kontes 570001-0500, or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube

with springs.
Snyder columns - Three-ball macro (Kontes 503000-0121, or equivalent);
2-ball micro (Kontes 569001-0219, or equivalent).
Vials - Glass, 5-10 mL capacity, with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw caps.
Separatory funnel shaker - capable of holding 2 L separatory funnels and
shaking them with rocking motion to thoroughly mix funnel contents
(Eberbach Co., Ann. Arbor, Ml USA).

Tumbler- Capable of holding and tumbling bottles, (b), end-over-end at 30
AF
turns/ min.
Boiling stones - Carborundum, No. 12 granules (Thomas Scientific No.

1590-033), Heat 30min. at 400C before use. Cool and store in desiccator.
Water bath - Heated, capable of control 2C. Use bath in hood. Balance
- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to nearest 0.0001 g. Gas
chromatography -Temperature programmable system suitable for use with

capillary columns, including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector,
and strip chart recorder. Data system is recommended for measuring peak
areas. Primary column; 30m x 0.25 mm id DB-5 fused-silica capillary

column, 0.25 m film thickness (J&W Scientific, Inc.). Conformation
column; 30 m x 0.25 mm id DB-1701 fused silica capillary column, 0.25
m film thickness (J&W Scientific Inc.) Operating conditions; injection

volume 2 L; He carrier gas at 30 cm/s linear velocity; injector 250C;
detector 320C; oven programmed from 60-300C at 4C/min; electron
capture detector.
261
Reagents
Standard solutions - Use standards of test compounds with purity > 96%
to prepare stock solutions at 1 mg/mL in methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE).
Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration
if they are certified by manufacturer or independent source. Store
solutions at room temperature and protect from light. Replace stock
standard solutions after 2 months or sooner if comparison with laboratory
control standards indicates degradation.

Internal standard solution - Prepare pentachloronitrobenzene (Purity >
98%) stock solution at 0.1 mg/mL in MTBE.
AF
Add 5 L stock solutions to 5 mL test portion extract to give final internal

standard concentration of 0.1 L pentachloronitrobenzene/ mL of extract.
Surrogate solution - Prepare 4, 4'-dichlorobiphenyl (purity >96%) stock
solujtion at 0.5 mg/mL in MTBE. Add 50 L stock solution to 1 L test
sample prior to extraction to produce surrogate concentration of 25 g] 4,4'-
dichlorobiphenyl/L in test sample and, assuming quantitative recovery,

5.0 g/mL in extract.
Instrument performance solution - Prepare individual stock standard
solutions containing chlorothalonil, chlorpyrifos, DCPA, and -BHC at

0.10 L/mL in MTBE.
For assessing instrument performance, combine 50 L hlorothalonil stock

solution, 2 L chlorpyrifos stock solution, 50 L DCPA stock solutions,
and 40 L -BHC stock solutions in 100 mL volumetric flask and dilute
to volume with MTBE.
Solvents - Acetone, methylene chloride, and MTBE Distilled-in-glass
quality, or equivalent.
262
Phosphate buffer- pH 7. Mix 29.6 mL 0.1 M HCl and 50 mL 0.1 M

dipotassium hydrogen phosphate. Sodium sulfate - Granular, anhydrous,
ACS grade. Heat in shallow tray for > 4 at at 450C to remove interfering
organic substances.
Sodium chloride - Crystals ACS grade. Heat in shallow tray for > 24 h at
450C to remove interfering organic substances.
Reagent water - Water reasonably free of contamination that would
prevent determination of any analyte of interest.

Preservative - Mercuric chloride solution. 10 mg HgCl2 (ACS grade) /mL
AF
reagent water.
Sodium thiosulfate Na2S2O3, Granular, anhydrous, ACS grade.
Preparation of laboratory sample bottles
Add 1 mL preservative, to glass laboratory sample bottle. If residual chlorine is

expected to be present in laboratory samples, add 80 mg Na2S2O3 to laboratory
sample bottle before collection.
Laboratory Sample Collection

Collect 1 L grab laboratory samples in glass bottles by conventional sampling
practices. Since bottles contain preservative and Na2S2O3, do not prerinse bottles
with laboratory sample before collection. Add laboratory sample to bottle

containing preservative, seal laboratory samplebottle, and shake vigorously 1
min. Refrigerate laboratory samples at 4C from time of collection until
extracted.
Protect from light. Extract laboratory samples within 7 days of
sample collection.
263
Laboratory Sample Preparation

Automated extraction method - Add preservative, (CQ) to any laboratory
samples not previouslyh preserved. Mark water meniscus on side of laboratory
sample bottle for later determination of volume. Add 50 L surrogate stock
solution, C(c) to laboratory sample. If mechanical separatory funel shaker is
used, pour entire laboratory sample into 2 L separatory funnel. If mechanical
tumbler is used, pour entire laboratory sample into tumbler bottle. Adjust sample
to pH 7 by adding 50 mL phosphate buffer, C. check pH and add H2SO4 or
AF
NaOH if necessary.
Add 100 g NaCI, seal, and shake to dissolve salt. Add 300 mL CH2Cl2 to
tumbler bottle or sepaatory funnel, seal, and shake 30s to rinse inner walls.
Transfer rinse to test portion contained in separatory funnel or tumbler bottle,
seal, and shake 10s, venting periodically. Repeat shaking and venting until
pressure release is not observed during venting. Reseal and place test portion
container in appropriate mechanical mixing device (separatory funnel shaker or
tumbler). Shake or tumble test portion for 1 h.
After extraction, pour contents of tumbler bottle into 2 L separatory funnel if

tumbler bottle as used. Let organic layer separate from water phase for > 10 min.
If emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third volume of solvent
layer, complete phase separation mechanically. Collect CH2Cl2 extract in 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask containing ca 5 g anhydrous Na2SO4 . Swirl flask to dry

extract; let flask sit 15 min. Determine original laboratory sample volume by
refilling laboratory sample bottle to mark and transferring water to 1000 mL
graduated cylinder. Record sample volume to nearest 5 mL.
264
Manual extraction method - Add preservative (CQ) to labroatory samples not

previously preserved. Mark water meniscus on side of tumbler bottle for later
determination of laboratory sample volume. Add 50 L surrogate stock solution,
C(c) to laboratory sample, pour entire contents into 2 L separatory funnel.
Adjust to pH 7 by adding 50 mL phosphate buffer, C (f). Check pH and add
H2 SO4 or NaOH if necessary. Add 100 g NaCl to contents, seal, and shake to
dissolve salt. Add 60 mL CH2Cl2 to tumbler bottle, seal and shake bottle 30s to
rinse inner walls.
Transfer rinse to separately funnel and extract laboratory sample by vigorously
AF
shaking funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Let
organic layer separate from water phase for > 10 min. If emulsion interface
between layers is more than 1/3 volume of solvent layer, complete phase
separation mechanically. Collect CH2Cl2 extract in 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask
containing ca 5 g anhydrous Na2SO4 . Add second 60 mL portion of CH2Cl2 to
separately funnel and repeat extraction procedure a second time, combining
extracts in Erlenmeyer flask. Perform third extraction in same manner. Swirl

flask to dry extract; let flask sit for 15 min. Determine original laboratory sample
volume by refilling laboratory sample bottle to mark and transferrng water to
1000 mL graduated cylinder. Record laboratory sample volume to nearest 5 mL.
Extract concentration
Assemble K-D concentrator by attaching 25 mL concentrator tube to 500 mL

evaporation flask. Decant CH2Cl2 extract into concentrator. Rinse remaining
Na2SO4 with two 25 mL portions of CH2Cl2 and decant rinses into concentrator.
265
Add 1 or 2 clean boiling stones to evaporation flask and attach macro-Snyder

column. Prewet column by adding ca 1 mL CH2Cl2 to top. Place K-D apparatus
on 65-75C water bath so that concentrator tube is partially immersed in hot
water and entire lower, rounded surface of flask is bathed with hot vapour.
Adjust vertical position of apparatus and water temperature as required to
complete concentration in 15- 20 min. At proper rate of distillation, balls of
column will actively chatter, but chambers will not flood. When apparent
volume of liquid reches 2 mL, remove K- D apparatus and let it drain and cool >
10 min.
AF
Remove Snyder column and rinse flask and its lower joint with 1-2 mL MTBE,
collecting rinse in concentrator tube. Add 5-10 mL MTBE and fresh boiling
stone.
Attach micro-Snyder column to concentrator tube and prewet column by adding
ca 0.5mL MTBE to top. Place micro K-D apparatus on water bath so that
concentrator tube is partially immersed in hot water. Adjust vertical position of
apparatus and water temperature as required to complete concentration in 5-10
min. When apparent volume of liquid reaches 2 mL, remove apparatus from bath
and let it drain and cool.
Add 5-10 mL MTBE and boiling stone and reconcentrate to 2 mL. Remove
micro K-D apparatus from bath and let it drain and cool. Remove micro-Snyder
column, and rinse walls of concentrator tube while adjusting volume to 5.0 mL
withMTBE.
266
Add 5 L internal standard stock solutions, C to laboratory sample extract, seal,

and shake to distribute internal standard. Transfer extract to appropriate-size
TFE fluorocarbon-sealed, screw cap vial and store at 4C until analysis. A 14day maximum extract storage time is recommended.
Caliberation of Gas Chromatograph with Electron-Capture Detector

Table 1 summarizes retention times and detection limits observed using this
AF
Calculations
method of analysis of chlorinated pesticides.
The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from the following
equation :
(A) (V)
C (g/L) = ------------------(Vt) (Vs)
where,
A
= Amount of the material injected (ng)
Vi
= Volume of extract injected (L)
Vt
= Volume of the total extract (L)
Vs
= Volume of the water extract (mL)
267
Table 1.Relative retention times and estimated method detection limits for
chlorinated pesticide
0.075
0.020
0.070
0.0100
0.0150
0.0075
0.0015
0.0025
0.0100
0.0600
0.020
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.075
AF
Aldrin
a -BHC
-BHC
-BHC
d -BHC
a -chlordane
-chlordane
4,4'- ODD
4,4'- DDE
4,4- DDT
Dieldrin
Endosulfan I
Endosulfan II
Endosulfan sulphate
Heptachlor
Heptachlor expoxide
Estimated MDL
Analyte
Relative retention time

Primary Confirmation
1.18
1.12
0.93
0.97
0.98
1.187
1.03
1.22
0.99
1.04
1.31
1.31
1.28
1.29
1.42
1.38
1.35
1.32
1.48
1.48
1.35
1.35
1.30
1.28
1.40
1.45
1.47
1.11
1.04
1.24
1.24
Reference
AOAC Official method. 17th Edition. 990.06 (2000).
268
N-METHYL CARBAMOYLOXIMES AND N-METHYL CARBAMATES

IN FINISHED DRINKING WATER
The analytical method prescribes HPLC method for determination of aldicarb,

aldicarb sulfone, aldicarb sulfoxide, baygon, carbaryl, carbofuron, 3-hydroxy
carbofuron, methiocarb, methomyl, and oxamyl in drinking water.
A. Principle
Water sample is filtered and measured volume is directly injected onto reverse-
AF
phase LC column. Analytes are separated by gradient elution chromatography.

After elution from LC column, analytes are hydrolyzed with NaOH at 95C.
Methylamine formed during hydrolysis is reacted with o-phthalaldehyde and 2mercaptoethanol to form highly fluorescent derivative, which is detected by
fluorescence detector. Estimated method detection limits range from 0.5g/L for
methomyl to 4.0g/L for methiocarb; estimated method detection limits for 8

other compounds range from 1.0 to 2.0 g/L.
B. Apparatus
(a) Grab sample bottle. 60-mL, borosilicate glass, screw-cap vials (Pierce No.
13075 meets these specifications) and caps with PTFE-faced silicone
septa (Pierce No. 12722 meets these specifications). Before use, wash
vials and septa with soap and water, followed by 3 tap water rinses and 3
deionized water rinses.
(b) Balance- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to nearest 0.0001 g.
269
(c) Macrofilters.- 47 mm 0.45m, nongridded, cellulose acetate filters for

water phases; 47mm, 0.5 m nongrided, PTFE filters for organic phases.
(d) Microfilters- 13 mm stainless steel filter holder and 13 mm diameter, 0.2

m polyster filters (Nuclepore No. 180406 meets these requirements).
AF
(f) Syringe valve- 3 way.
(e) Hypodermic syringe- l0L, glass, with Luer-Lok tip.
(g) Syringe needle- 7-10cm long, 17gauge, with blunt tip.
(h) Microsyringes - Various sizes.
(i) Solution storage bottles- Amber glass, 10-15 mL capacity with TFEfluorocarbon-lines screw cap.
(j) LC system- Capable of injecting 200-400 L aliquots and performing

binary linear gradients at constant flow rate. Data system is recommended
for measuring peak areas. Primary column: 250 mm X 4.6 mm id stainless
steel packed with 5 m Beckman Ultrasphere ODS. Mobile phase linear
gradient from methanol water (15+85) to methanol in 32 min at 1.0
mL/min. Confirmation column: 250 mm X 4.6 mm id stainless steel
packed with 5 m supelco LC-1. Mobile phase linear gradient from
methanol water (15+85) to methanol in 32 min at 1.0mL/ min.
270
(k) Postcolumn reactor - Reactor constructed with PTFE tubing and equipped
with pumps capable of mixing 0.5 mL/min OPA reaction solution, C (i),
and 0.5 mL/min NaOH, C (f), into mobile phase. Reactor must contain
mixing tees and two 1.0 mL delay coils, one thermostated at 95C.
(l) Fluorscence detector. Capable of excitation at 230 nm and detection of
emission energies > 418 nm.
AF
C. Reagents
(a) Standard solutions- Use standards of test compounds with purity > 96% to
prepare stock solutions at 1.00 g/mL in methanol.
Commercially
prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are

certified by manufacturer or independent source. Transfer stock standard
solutions into TFE fluorocarbon- sealed screw-cap vials. Store at room
temperature protected from light. Replace stock standard solutions after 2

months, or sooner if comparison with laboratory control standards
indicates degradation.
(b) Instrument performance solution- Combine 20 L 3-hydroxycarbofuran

stock solution, (a), and l.0 mL aldicarb sulfoxide stock solution, (a) in 10
mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with methanol.
(c) Reagent water. Distilled Water reasonably free of contamination that

would prevent determination of analytes.
(d) Water- LC grade.

271
(e) Methanol- LC grade. Filter B(C), and degas with helium before use.
(f) Sodium hydroxide.-0.05M. 2.0g NaOH/l.0L reagent water, Filter B and

degas with helium before use.
(g) Mercaptoethanol-acetonitrile- (1+1). Mix 10.0 mL 2-mercaptoethanol and

10.0 mL CH3CN. Store in borosilicate glass vial or bottle with PTFE-lined
cap. (Caution: Strong odor. Store in hood.)
(h) Sodium borate.-0.05N. 19.1g Na2B4O7.10H2O/1.0 L reagent water,

Sodium borate dissolves completely at room temperature if prepared day
AF
before use.
(i) OPA reaction solution- 100 10 mg o-phthaladehyde (mp 55-58C)/10L

CH3OH (e) Add to l.0L 0.05M Na2B4O7 solution, (h). mix, filter, B (c ),
and degas with helium. Add 100 L 2-mercaptoethanol, (g), and mix.
Prepare solution fresh daily.
(j) Helium- For degassing solutions and solvents
(k) Monochloroacetic acid buffer- pH 3. Mix 156mL 2.5M monochloroacetic

acid and l00mL 2.5M potassium acetate.
(l) Sodium thiosulfate- Na2S2O3 . granular, anhydrous. ACS grade.
(m) Buffered reagent water- Mix l0mL monochloroacetic acid buffer, (k), and
1L reagent water, (c).
(n) Internal standard solution- Prepare 4-bromo-3.5 dimethylphenyl Nmethylcarbamate (BDMC) (Purity 98%, Aldrich Chemical Co.) stock
solution at 0.1 mg/mL in methanol.
272
D. Preparation sample Bottles

Add 1.8 mL monochloroacetic acid buffer, C (k), to sample bottle, B (a). If
residual chlorine is expected, add 5 mg Na2S2O3 to bottle before sample
collection.
E. Sample collection
Collect 60mL grab samples in glass bottles by conventional sampling practices.
Because bottles contain buffer and Na2S2O3, do not prerinse with sample before
AF
collection. Add sample to bottle, seal, and shake vigorously 1 min.
Refrigrate samples at 4C from time of collection until storage. Store at -10C
until analyzed. Analyze samples within 28 days of collection.
F. Sample Preparation
Adjust pH of sample or standard to pH 3 0.2 by adding 1.5mL 2.5M

monochloroacetic acid buffer, C (k), to 50mL sample. This step should not be
necessary if sample pH was adjusted during sample collection. Fill 50mL
volumetric flask to mark with sample. Add 5 L internal standard stock solution,
C (n), to the 50mL of sample (final concentration l0g/L). Affix 3 -way valve to
l0L syringe. Place clean filter in filter holder, B (d), and affix filter holder and
7-10 cm syringe needle to syringe valve. Rinse needle and syringe with reagent
water, C (C). Prewet filter by passing 5mL reagent water through filter. Empty
syringe and check for leakes. Draw l0mL sample into syringe and expel through
filter. Draw another l0mL sample into syringe, expel through filter, and collect
273
last 5mL for analysis. Rinse syringe with reagent water. Discard filter. Inject 400
L of collected sample into LC system under conditions in B (j).
Calibration of LC system
Table 1 presents retention times and estimated method detection of 10 carbamate
pesticides.
Calculation :
AF
(A)(V)
C (g/L) = --------------(Vt) (Vs)
where,
A= Amount of the material injected (ng)
V= Volume of extract injected (L)
Vt= Volume of the total extract (L)
Vs= Volume of the water extract (mL)
Table 1.
Analyte
Retention time
EDL
Aldicarb
21.4
1.6
Aldicarb sulfone
12.2
2.0
Aldicarb sulfoxide
17.5
2.0
Baygon
23.4
1.0
Carbaryl
25.4
2.0
Carboftiron
24.4
1.5
274
3 -hydroxycarboruron
19.0
2.0
Methiocarb
28.6
4.0
Methomyl
14.8
0.50
Oxamyl
14.6
2.0
Reference
AF
Official methods of Analysis.10.5.02.
275
DETERMINATION OF ALACHLOR, ATRAZINE AND

BUTACHLOR IN WATER
This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of

certain nitrogen and phosphorus contining pesticides in ground water and
finished drinking water. The following compounds can be determined using this
method:
AF
Alachlor Atrazine Butachlor
Equipment and supplies (all specifications are suggested)
Sample Bottie-Borosilicate. 1 L volume with graduations, fitted with

screw caps lined with TFE-fluorocarbon. Protect samples from light.
Amber bottles may be used. The container must be washed and dired as
described in Section 4.1.1 before use to minimize contamination. Cap
liners are cut to fit from sheets (pierce Catalog No.012736 or equivalent)
and extracted with methanol overnight prior to use.
Glassware
Separatory
funnel-2000mL,
(Wheaton
Roller
Culture Vessel
or
equivalent), with TFE- fluorocarbon lined screw cap. Cap liners are cut to
fit from sheets (Pierce Catalong No.012736) and extracted with methanol
overnight prior to use.
Flask Erlenmeyer-500 mL. Concentrator Tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D)l0mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-2525 or K-570050-1025 or
276
equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the

test. Ground glass stoppers are used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
Evaporative flask, K-D-500 mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
Snyder column, K-D-Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).
Snyder column, K-D-Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
AF
equivalent).
Vials- glass, 5-10 mL capacity with TFE fluorocarbon lined screw cap.
Separatory Funnel Shaker (Optional)- Capable of holding 2 L spearatory
funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve thorough
mixing of Separatory funnel contents (available from Eberbach Co. in

Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).
Tumbler-Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them endat
30
over- end
turns/min. (Associated
Design
and Mfg. Co.
Alexandria, VA or other suppliers).
Boiling stones- Carborundum, #12 granules (Arthur H. Thomas Co.

#1590- 033 or equivalent). Heat at 400C for 30 minutes prior to use.
Cool and store in desiccator.
Water Bath- Heated, capable of temperature control (2C). The bath

should be used in a hood.
277
Balance- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest

0.0001g.
Gas Chromatograph- Analytical system complete With temperature
programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all required
accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector and
stripchart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak
areas. Table 1 lists retention times observed for method analytes using the
columns and analytical conditions described below.
Column 1 (primary column) - 30 m long X 0.25 mm I.D DB-5 bonded
AF
fused silica capillary column, 0.25m film thickness (J&W Scientific) or

equivalent Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30 cm/sec, linear
velocity and oven temperature is programmed from 60-300C at 4C/min.
Data presented in this method were obtained using this column. The
injection volume was 2 L in splitless mode with a 45 s delay the injector
temperature was 250C and the detector temperature was 300C.

Column 2 (confirmation column) -30 m long X 0.25 mm I.D DB 1701
bonded fused silica column, 0.25 m film thickness (J&W Scientific) or
equivalent. Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30 cm/sec, linear

velocity and oven temperature is programmed from 60-300 C at 4C/min.
Detector-Nitrogen-phosphorus(NPD)
Reagents and standards

Warning: When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are
removed thus potentially making the solvent hazardous. Also, when a solvent is
278
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially

reducing the shelflife.
Acetone, Methylene Chloride, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether (MTBE)Distilled-in-glass quality or equivalent.
Phosphate Buffer, pH7- Prepare by mixing 29.6mL 0.1 M HCI and 50 mL
0.1 M dipotassium phosphate.
Sodium Chloride (NaCl). Crystal, ACS Grade - Heat treat in a shallow
tray at 400C for a minimum of four hours to remove interfering organic

substances. Store in a glass bottle (not plastic) to avoid hydrogen
AF
(K2HPO4) phthalate contamination.
Sodium sulfate-Granular, Anhydrous, ACS Grade - Heat in a shallow tray

at 400C for a minimum of four hours to remove interfering organic
substances. Store in a glass bottle (not plastic) to avoid phthalate
contamination.
Sodium thiosulfate, Granular, Anhydrous, ACS Grade.
Triphenylphosphate (TPP), 98% purity - For use as internal standard

(available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).
1,3-Dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene, 98% purity - For use as surrogate standard

(available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).
Mercuric Chloride, ACS Grade (Aldrich Chemical Co.) - For use as a

bactericide (optional - see Section 8.0).
Reagent Water - Reagent water is defined as a water that is reasonably
free of contamination that would prevent the determination of any analyte
of interest. Reagent water used to generate the validation data in this
method was distilled water obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water
Co., Columbus, Ohio.
279
Stock Standard Solutions (1.00 g/mL) Stock standard solutions may

be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure standard
materials using the following procedure:
Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing approximately
0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in MTBE, and dilute to
volume in a 10 mL volumetric flask. The stock solution for simazine
should be prepared in methanol. Larger volumes may be used at the
convenience of the analyst. If compound purity is certified at 96% or
greater, the weight may be used without correction to calculate the

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock
AF
standards may be used at any concentration if they are certified by the

manufacturer or by an independent source. Transfer the stock standard
solutions into TEE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap amber vials. Store at
room temperature and protect from light.
Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months or sooner

if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks or QC samples indicate a
problem.
Internal Standard Solution - Prepare the internal standard solution by
accurately weighing approximately 0.0500 g of pure TPP. Dissolve the TPP

in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 100 mL volumetric flask. Transfer the
internal standard solution to a TEE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and
store at room temperature. Addition of 50 g/mL of the internal standard to
5mL of sample extract result in a final TPP concentration of 5.0g/mL. This
solution should be replaced when ongoing QC (Section 9.0) indicates a
problem.
Note: TPP has been shown to be an effective internal standard for the method
analytes.
280
Surrogate Standard solution - Prepare the surrogate standard solution by

accurately weighing approximately 0.0250 g of pure 1,3-dimethyl-2nitrobenzene. Dissolve the 1, 4-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene in MTBE and dilute
to volume in a 100mL volumetric flask. Transfer the surrogate standard
solution to a TEEfluorocarbon- sealed screw cap bottle and store at room
temperature. Addition of 50 l of the surrogate standard solution to a 1 L
sample prior to extraction results in a l,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene
concentration in the sample of 12.5 g/ L. Solution should be replaced when
ongoing QC (Section 9.0) indicates a problem.
Note: 1,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene has been shown to be an effective
AF
surrogate standard for the method analytes.
Laboratory Performance Check Solution - Prepare the laboratory

performance check solution by adding 5 L of the vernolate stock solution.
0.5 mL of the bromacil stock solution, 30L of the prometon stock solution.
15 L of the atrazine stock solution, 1.0 mL of the surrogate solution, and
500 L of the internal standard solution to a 100 mL volumetric flask. Dilute

to volume with MTBE and thoroughly mix the solution. Transfer to a TEEfluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.
Verify calibration standards periodically (at least quarterly), by analyzing a

QCS.
Procedure Extraction (Manual method)
Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later
determination of sample volume. Add preservative to LRBs and LFBs.
Fortify the sample with 50 L of the surrogate standard solution. Pour the
entire sample into a 2 L separately funnel.
Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 mL of phosphate buffer. Check pH.
Add acid or base if necessary to obtain pH 7.
281
Add 100 g NaCl to the sample, seal, and shake to dissolve salt.
Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30
seconds to rinse the inner walls. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel
and extract the sample by vigorously shaking the funnel for two minutes with
periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to
separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 minutes. If the emulsion
interface between layers is more than one third the volume of the solvent
layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase
separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may
include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, entrifugation,
AF
or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 500

mL Erlenmeyer flask.
Add a second 60 mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and

repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the
Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner. Determine
the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and
transferring the water to a 1000 mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.
Extraction (Autotmated method)

Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later
determination of sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Add
preservative to LRBs and LFBs. Fortify the sample with 50 L of the
surrogate standard solution. If the mechanical separately funnel shaker is
used, pour the entire sample into a 2 L separatory runnel. If the mechanical
tumbler is used, pour the entire sample into a tumbler bottle.
Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 mL of phosphate buffer. Check pH.

282
Add acid or base if necessary to obtain pH 7. Add 100 g NaCl to the sample,
seal, and shake to dissolve salt. Add 300 mL methylene chloride to the
sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 seconds to rinse the inner walls. Transfer
the solvent to the sample contained in the separatory funnel or tumbler bottle,
seal, and shake for 10 seconds, venting periodically. Repeat shaking and
venting until pressure released is not observed. Reseal and place sample
container in appropriate mechanical mixing device (separatory funnel shaker
or tumbler). Shake or tumble the sample for one hour. Complete mixing of
after starting the mixing device.
the organic and aqueous phases should be observed within about two minutes
AF
Remove the sample container from the mixing device. If the tumbler is used,
pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2 L separatory funnel. Allow the
organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 minutes.
If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete
the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but
may include stirring, filtration through glass wool, centrifugation, or other

physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 500 mL
Erlenmeyer flask Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
sample bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000 mL graduated
cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
Extract Concentration
Assemble a K-D concentrator by attaching a 25 mL concentrator tube to a

500mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be
used in place of the K-D if the requirements of Section 9.3 are met.
283
Dry the extract by pouring it through a solvent-rinsed drying column

containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Collect the extract in
the K-D concentrator, and rinse the column with 20-30 mL methylene
chloride.
Alternatively, add about 5 g anhydrous sodium sulfate to the extract in the
Erlenmeyer flask; swirl flask to dry extract and allow to sit for 15 minutes.
Decant the methylene chloride extract into the K-D concentrator. Rinse the
remaining sodium sulfate with two 25 mL portions of methylene chloride and
decant the rinses into the K-D concentrator. Add one to two clean boiling
stones to the evaporative flask and attach a macro Snyder column. Prewet the
AF
Snyder column by adding about 1 mL methylene chloride to the top. Place

the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath, 65-70C, so that the concentrator tube
is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of
the flask is bathed with hot vapour. Adjust the vertical position of the
appratus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration
in 15-20 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column
will actively chatter, but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent
volume of liquid reaches 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
drain and cool for at least10 minutes.
Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the
concentrator tube with 1-2 mL of MTBE. Add 5-10 mL of MTBE and a fresh
boiling stone. Attach a micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and

prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of MTBE to the top. Place the
micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the concentrator tube is
partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the
apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete concentration in
five to 10 minutes.
When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 2 mL, remove the micro K-D
from the bath and allow it to drain and cool. Add 5-10 mL MBE to the
284
micro K-D and reconcentrate to 2 mL. Remove the micro K-D from the bath
and allow it to drain and cool. Remove the micro Snyder column, and rinse
the walls of the concentrator tube while adjusting the volume to 5.0 mL with
MTBE.
Note: If methylene chloride is not completely removed from the final extract,
it may cause detector problems. If the internal standard calibration procedure
is used, add 50 L of the internal standard solution to the sample extract,
seal, and shake to distribute the internal standard. Transfer extract to an
appropriate sized TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw-cap vial and store,
AF
refrigerated at 4C, until analysis by GC-NPD.
Gas Chromatography
Under the heading of gas chromatography include in Table 1 are retention

times observed using this method.
Inject 2 L of the sample extract. Record the resulting peak size in area units.
If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute
the extract and reanalayze. If using IS calibration, add an appropriate amount
of IS so that the extract concentration will match the calibration standards.
Identification of Analytes
Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention time to the retention
time of a reference chromatogram. If the retention time of an unknown
compounds corresponds, within limits, to the retention time of a standard
compound, then identification is considered positive.
285
The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be
based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over
the course of a day. Three times the standard derviation of a retention time can
be used to calculate a suggested window size for a compound. However, the
experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of
chromatograms. Identification requires expert judgement when sample
components are not resolved chromatographically. When peaks obviously
represent more than one sample component (i.e. broadened peak with
shoulder(s) or valley between two or more maxima), or any time doubt exists
over the identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate alternative
techniques to help confirm peak identification, need be employed. For example,
AF
more positive identification may be made by the use of an alternative detector

which operates on a chemical/physical principle different from that originally
used e.g., mass spectrometry, or the use of a second chromatography column. A
suggested alternative column is described in Section 6.8.
Calculations
The concentration (C) in the sample can abe calculated from the following
equation:
C (g/L) = (A)(Vi) / (Vt)(Vs)
Where,
A = Amount of material injected (ng)

Vi = Volume of extract injected (L)
Vt = Volume of total extract (L)
Vs = Volume of water extracted (mL)
286
References
1. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82.
"Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation". American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia,
PA, 1986.
2. "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens", Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,

Publication No. 77-206, august 1977.
AF
3. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry", (29 CFR1910).

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).
4. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories", American Chemical

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
5. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,

"Standard Practice for Sampling Water", American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
6. Munch, J.W "Method 525.2 - Determination of Organic Compounds in

Drinking Water by Liquid-Solid Extraction and Capillary Column
Chromatography/ Mass Spectrometry" in
7. Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water,

Supplement 3 (1995). USEPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory,
Cincinnati, Ohio, 45268.
287
Table 1. Retention times for method analytes

Retention Time8
Analyte
Column 1
Column 2
30.00
Alachlor
35.96
34.10
Butachlor
41.45
39.00
l,3-Dimethyl-2-Nitrobenzene (surrogate) 14.48 31.58

Atrazine
Reference:
AF
Official Method of Analysis AOAC. 17th Edition, 991.07 (2000).
NOTE: It is suggested to follow IS:14543-2004, Amendment No.7
288
DETERMINATION OF 2,4-D IN DRINKING WATER BY

LIQUID-LIQUID MICROEXTRACTION, DERIVATIZATION, AND
FAST GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH ELECTRON CAPTURE
DETECTION
Summary of Method
A 40-mL volume of sample is adjusted to pH > 12 with 4 N sodium hydroxide
and allowed to sit for one hour at room temperature to hydrolyze derivatives.
Following hydrolysis, a wash step using a hexane: MtBE mixture is performed
as a sample cleanup and to remove Dacthal. The aqueous sample is then
AF
acidified with sulfuric acid to a pH of less than 1 and extracted with 4-mL of
methyl tert-butyl ether (MtBE). The chlorinated acids that have been partitioned
into the MtBE are then converted to methyl esters by derivatization with
diazomethane. The target esters are separated and identified by fast capillary
column gas chromatography using an electron capture detector (GC/ ECD).
Analytes are quantified using a procedural standard calibration technique with
an internal standard.
Note: since many of the analytes contained in this method are applied as a
variety of esters and salts, it is imperative to hydrolyze them to the parent acid
prior to extraction.
Apparatus and Equipment

Sample Containers - Amber glass bottles, approximately 40 mL, fitted
with PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) lined screw caps.
Extraction Vials - 60-mL clear glass vials with PTFE lined screw caps.
289
Autosampler Vials - 2.0-mL vials with screw or crimp cap and a PTFE
faced seal.
Standard Solution Storage Containers - 10 to 20-mL amber glass vials
with PTFE lined screw caps. Pasteur Pipettes - Glass, disposable. Pipettes
- Class A, 2.0-mL and 4.0-mL glass, or adjustable volume dispensers.
Volumetric Flasks - Class A, suggested sizes include 5 mL, 10 mL,
100mL. Micro Syringes - Various sizes. Balance - Analytical, capable of
weighing to the nearest 0.0001 g. Diazomethane Generator - See Figure I
for a diagram of an all glass system custom made for these validation
studies. Micro molar generators are also available from commercial
AF
sources (Aldrich Cat. #: Z10, 889-8 or equivalent).
Gas Chromatograph - Capillar GC, if the fast GC option is used the

modifications should include a high pressure (> 50 psi) split/splitless
injector, fast temperature ramps oven (50 oC/minute) and a low volume
(150 mL) micro ECD detector.
Additionally, a data system capable of fast sampling (20 points/peak) is

required.
Primary GC Column - RTX-1701, 180 m i.d., fused silica capillary
with chemically bonded (14% cyanopropylphenyl-methylpolysiloxane), or

equivalent bonded, fused silica column. Confirmation GC Column - DB5, 180
m i.d., fused silica
capillary with chemically bonded (5%
phenyl-methylpolysiloxane), or equivalent bonded, fused silica column.
Reagents and Standards

Reagent Water - Purified water which does not contain any measurable
quantities of any target analytes or interfering compounds greater than 1/3
the MRL for each compound of interest. Methyl tert-Butyl Ether (MtBE)
290
- High purity, demonstrated to be free from analytes and interferences

(HPLC grade or better).
Acetone - High purity, demonstrated to be free from analytes and
interferences (HPLC grade or better). Carbitol (Diethylene Glycol
Monoethyl Ether) - High purity, demonstrated to be free from analytes
and interferences (HPLC grade or better).
Hexane: MtBE (90:10, v/v) Wash Solvent - High purity, unpreserved,
demonstrated to be free from analytes and interferences (HPLC grade or

better).
AF
Hexane - High purity, demonstrated to be free from analytes and

interferences (HPLC grade or better).
Sodium Sulfate, Na2SO4 - Pesticide grade, granular, anhydrous.

Interferences have 24 been observed when lower quality grades have been
used. If interferences are observed, it may be necessary to heat the sodium
sulfate in a shallow tray at 400C for up to 4 hr to remove phthalates and
other interfering organic substances. Alternatively, it can be extracted

with methylene chloride in a Soxhlet apparatus for 48 hr. Store in capped
glass bottle rather than a plastic container.
Acidified Sodium Sulfate - Acidify by slurrying 100 g of muffled sodium

sulfate with enough ethyl ether to just cover the solid. Add 0.5mL
concentrated sulfuric acid dropwise while mixing thoroughly. Remove the
ether under vacuum. Mix 1g of the resulting solid with 5mL of reagent
water and measure the pH of the mixture. The pH must be below pH 4.

Store in a desiccator or at 100C to keep the reagent dry.
Copper II Sulfate Pentahydrate, Cu2SO4.5H2O - ACS reagent grade or
better.
291
N Sodium Hydroxide Solution - Dissolve 16 g sodium hydroxide (NaOH)

pellets (ACS grade or equivalent) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
Potassium Hydroxide Solution (37%, w/v) - Dissolve 37 g of potassium
hydroxide (KOH) pellets (ACS grade or equivalent) in reagent water and
dilute to 100 mL. Sodium Sulfite, Na SO - ACS reagent grade, used as a
dechlorinating agent in this method.
Diazald Solution - Prepare a solution containing 5 g diazald (ACS reagent
grade) in 50 mL of a 50:50 (v/v) mixture of MtBE and carbitol. This

solution is stable for one month or longer when stored at 4 oC in an amber
bottle with a PTFE lined screw cap.
AF
Sulfuric Acid - Concentrated, ACS reagent grade.

Silica Gel - ACS reagent grade, 35-60 mesh.
Hydrogen - 99.999% pure or better, GC carrier gas.
Nitrogen - 99.999% pure or better.
Procedure Sample Extraction and Hydrolysis:
Remove the samples from storage and allow them to equilibrate to room
temperature. Place 40 mL of the water sample into a precleaned 60-mL,
glass vial with a PTFE lined screw cap using a graduated cylinder.
Add 10 L of surrogate standard (100 ug/mL, 2,4-dichlorophenylacetic

acid in acetone) to the aqueous sample.
Add 1 mL, of the 4 N NaOH solution prepared to each glass vial. Check
the pH of the sample with pH paper or a pH meter. If the sample does not
have a pH greater than or equal to 12, adjust the pH by adding more 4 N
NaOH solution. Let the sample sit at room temperature for 1 hour, shaking
the contents periodically.
292
Note : Since many of the herbicides contained in this method are applied
as a variety of esters and salts, it is vital to hydrolyze them to the parent
acid prior to extraction. This step must be included in the analysis of all
extracted field samples, LRBs, LFMs and calibration standards. Failure to
perform this step may result in data that are biased low for some targets in
field samples.
Following hydrolysis, add 5 mL of (90:10, v:v) hexane:MtBE and shake
vigorously for three minutes. Allow the phases to separate for
approximately 5 minutes then remove and discard the top hexane/MtBE

layer. This wash aids in sample cleanup and removes any Dacthal from
AF
the sample which would interfere with the quantitation of the Dacthal
metabolites.
Adjust the pH to approximately 1 by adding concentrated sulfuric acid.

Cap, shake and then check the pH with a pH meter or narrow range pH
paper. Add additional sulfuric acid as needed to properly adjust the pH.
Quickly add approximately 2 g of copper II sulfate pentahydrate and
shake until dissolved. This colors the aqueous phase blue and allows the
analyst to better distinguish between the aqueous phase and the organic
phase in this micro extraction.
Quickly add approximately 16 g of muffled sodium sulfate and shake until

almost all is dissolved. Sodium sulfate is added to increase the ionic
strength of the aqueous phase and thus further drive the chlorophenoxy
acids into the organic phase. The addition of salt also decreases the
solubility of MtBE in the aqueous phase and allows greater volumetric

recovery. The addition of this salt and the copper II sulfate pentahydrate
should be done quickly so that the heat generated from the addition of the
acid will help dissolve the salts.
293
Add exactly 4.0-mL MtBE and shake vigorously for three minutes. Allow
the phases to separate for approximately 5 minutes.
Sample
Methylation
with
Diazomcthanc.
Generation
of
Diazomethane
Assemble the diazomethane generator in a hood. The collection vessel is a
maintained at 0-5 C.
10- or 15mL, glass vial equipped with a PTFE lined screw cap that is
Add a sufficient amount of MtBE (approximately 7 mL) to tube 1 to cover
AF
the first impinger. Add 10 mL of MtBE to the collection vial. Set the
nitrogen flow at 5-10 mL/min. Add 4-mL Diazald solution and 3 mL of
37% KOH solution to the second impinger. Connect the tubing as shown
and allow the nitrogen flow to purge the diazomethane from the reaction
vessel into the collection vial for 30 minutes. Cap the vial when collection
is complete and maintain at 0-5C. When stored at 0-5C, this
diazomethane solution may be used over a period of 72 hours. Several

commercial sources of glassware are available for diazomethane
generation. These include a mini Diazald apparatus from Aldrich (Cat.
#:Z10, 889- 8). Using a Pasteur pipette, transfer the sample extract (upper
MtBE layer) to a 7- mL, screw cap vial. Add 0.6 g acidified sodium
sulfate and shake. This step is included to dry the MtBE extract.
Using a Pasteur pipette, transfer the extract to a second, 7mL glass vial.
Add 250 L of the diazomethane solution prepared to each vial. The
contents of the vial should remain slightly yellow in color indicating an
excess of diazomethane. Additional diazomethane may be added if
necessary. Let the esterification reaction proceed for 30 minutes.
294
Remove any unreacted diazomethane by adding 0.1 g of silica gel.

Effervescence (evolution of nitrogen) is an indication that excess
diazomethane was present. Allow the extracts to sit for 0.5 hour.
Transfer the extract to an autosampler vial. A duplicate vial may be filled
using the excess extract.
Analyze the sample extracts as soon as possible. The sample extract may
be stored up to 21 days if kept at 0C or less. Keep the extracts away from
AF
Gas Chromatography
light in amber glass vials with PTFE lined caps.
If the fast GC option is used, several important changes from "conventional GC"
should be made to aid in the rapid analysis of the analytes. The instrument
should have a fast temperature ramp (50C/minute) oven and a high pressure (>
50 psi) split/splitless injector. Additionally, the column diameter and film
thickness should be decreased and the carrier gas should be changed to
hydrogen.
Use of Hydrogen Safely - Although hydrogen can be used safely as a carrier gas,
the potential for fire or explosion does exist if the gas system is mishandled. If
you are unsure of the safety guidelines for using hydrogen as a carrier gas, seek
advice from your instrument manufacturer regarding its use.
Analysis of Extracts
Establish operating conditions as described. Confirm that retention times,
compound separation and resolution are similar to those summarized in Table 1.
295
Calculations
(A) (Vi )
C (g/L) = -----------------------(Vt ) (Vs )
A=Amount of material injected (ng)
AF
Vi=Volume of the extract injected (L)
Where,
Vt=Volume of the total extract (L)
Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL)
Reference
Official Method of Analysis AOAC. 17th Edition. 10.7.03(2000).
296
AF
297
DETERMINATION OF ISOPROTURON IN WATER BY

SOLID-PHASE EXTRACTION AND LIQUID
CHROMATOGRAPHY
Residue method for analysis of isoproturon in drinking water, using a styrenedivinyl benzene co-polymer solid phase extraction followed by liquid
chromatography with diode array detection is described.
Apparatus:
Off-line solid phase concentrator-manual or automated.
B.
Polypropylene cartridges: filled with 200 mg stryene - divinyl benzene
AF
A.
e.g. SDB-I (J.T. Baber Derenter, the Netherlends), of solute ENV + (1ST,
Hengoed, UK).
C.
HPLC/UV system - suited for solvent - gradient elution with automatic
sample injection and equipped with a UV - diode array detector, allowing the
reconding of spectra between 200 and 400 (with max = 230nm) and a data
processing system.
Capillary vials - 5 mL, amber glass.
D.
Reagents:
A.
Certified reference materials of the Isoproturon: Standard solution of
isoproturon is prepared in acetonitrile.

B.
Solvents pesticide grade.
Sample extraction:
Pass a 500 mL volume of drinking water over the conditioned sorbent at a flow
rate of 5-10 mL/min. Dry the solvent under nitrogen or air for 5 min. Elute the
sorbent with 10 mL methnol acetonitrile (60+40). Soak the sorbent with 2 mL
298
eluent for 30 min. Pass the rest of the eluent through sorbent through the sorbent
at 3 mL/min. and collect the elute in the same vessel. Dry the combined elute
under a gentle stream of nitrogen to approximately 200 L, which is taken up in
a 500 L syringe. Adjust the volume to 1000 L with water. Use an aliquot of
this extract for HPLC/UV analysis.
HPLC/UV determination:
Use the following conditions of HPLC/UV for analysis. Column Supelcosil

ABZ +(25 cm x 2.1 or 4.6 mm i.d 5 um particles) combined with ABZ + guard
column (2 cm, 4.6 mm id, 3 or 5 fn particles), both from supelceo gradient from
AF
acetonitrile - water (5+95) to acetonitrile - water (63+37) in 60 min to 100%

acetonitrile in 5 min., held for 5 min. the identity of each compound was
confirmed, by the retention time, which was required to the within 1% or < 10/5
from the retention time of the standards.
Calculation
equation:
(A) (Vi)
C (g/L) =----------------(Vt) (Vs)
Where,
A= Amount of material injected (ng)

Vi= Volume of the extract injected (L)
Vt = Volume of the total extract (L)
Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL)
Reference:
AOAC International, 85 (2): 375-383 (2002).
299
NITROGEN-AND PHOSPHORUS-CONTAINING PESTICIDES IN

FINISHED DRINKING WATER
The analytical method prescribes residue analysis of Dichlorvos (DDVP),

Phorate, Chlorpyrifos. Methyl, Chlorpyrifos, Monocrotophos, Dimethoate,
Malathion, Parathion, methyl, Parathion, ethyl, Ethion, Phosphamidon Atrazine,
Simazine in water.
A. Principle
AF
Measured volume of sample (1L) is extracted with CH2CI2 by shaking in

separatory funnel or by mechanical tumbling in bottle. CH2CL2 extract is
separated, dried with anhydrous Na2SO4 solvent exchanged with methyl tertbutyl ether (MTBE), and concentrated to 5 mL. Pesticides are separated and
measured by capillarycolumn gas chromatographyusing a nitrogen-phosphorus
detector.
B. Apparatus
(a) Grab sample bottles- 1000mL borosilicate glass with TFE fluorocarbonlined screw caps (Wheaton Midia/Lab bottle No. 219820 meets these
specifications). Extract liners overnight with methanol before use.
(b)Separatory funnel- 2000mL, borosilicate glass with TFE fluorocarbon

stopcock and ground-glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stopper.
300
(c)Tumbler bottle.-1.7L, low extractable borosilicate glass with TFE

flurorcarbon-
lined
screw
caps
(Wheaton
Roller
Culture
Vessel
No.348273nmeets these specifications). Cut liners to fit screw cap from TFEfluorocarbon sheets (Pierce No.012736 meets these specifications); extract liners
overnight with methanol before use.
(d) Kuderna-Danish (k-D) apparatus -(l) Concentrator tube.-10 or 25mL.

Borosilicate glass, graduated, standard taper 19/22. Check calibration of
concentrator tube at volumes used in method. Use ground-glass stoppers to

prevent evaporation of extracts. (2) Evaporation flask- 500 mL, borosilicate
glass, standard taper 24/40 top, standard taper 19/22 bottom, capable of
AF
attachment to concentrator tube with springs. (3) Snyder columns- 3-ball macro,
218 mm, standard taper 24/40 or 2-ball micro, 170 mm, standard taper 19/22.
NOTE: Instead of KD (Khuderman Danish) concentrator flash evaporator may
also be used.
(e)Vials- Glass, 5 to 10mL capacity, with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw caps.
(f)Separatory funnel shaker.-(Optional) Capable of holding 2L separatory
funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to thoroughly mix funnel
contents (Eberbach Co. ann Arbor, ML or other suppliers).
(g)Tumbler.- Capable of holding tumbler bottles and over and at 30rpm

(Associated Design and Manufacturing Co. Alexandria. VA. Meets these
specifications).
(h)Boiling stones- Carborundum, No. 12 granules. Heat 30 min at 400 before

use. Cool and store in desiccator.
301
(i)Water bath. Heated, capable of control 20C Use bath in hood.
(j)Balance- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to nearest 0.0001 g.
(k)Gas chromatograph.-Temperature-programmable system for use with

capillary columns, including syringes, analytical columns. Gases, detector, and
strip chart recorder. Data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
Primary column: 30m X 0.25 mm id DB-5 fused-silica capillary column, 0.25
m film thickness (J&W Scientific, Inc. meets these specifications).

Confirmation column: 30m X 0.25 mm id DB210 fused-silica capillary column,
0.25 m film thickness (J&W Scientific, Inc., meets these specifications).
AF
Injection volume 2 L splitless with 45 s delay;

He carrier gas at 30 cm/s linear velocity;
Injector 250C,
detector300C,
Oven programmed from 60 to 300C at 4C/min;

Nitrogen-phosphorus detector.
C. Reagents:
(a)Standard solutions -Use standards of test compounds with purity 96% to

prepare stock solutions at 1 mg/mL in MTBE. Commercially prepared stock
standards may be used at any concentration if they are certified by manufacturer
or independent source. These stock standards may be available from U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency Toxic and Hazardous Materials Repository.
Research Triangle Park. NC Store solutions at room temperature and protect
from light. Replace stock solutions after 2 months, Or sooner if comparision
with degradation. laboratory control standards indicates
(b) Internal standard solution. Prepare 2 nitrotoluene (purity 98% stock solution
302
at 0.25 mg/mL in MTBE add 50L stock solution to 5 mL sample extract to give
final internal standard concentration of 2.5g/mL.
(c)
Surrogate solution-Prepare 1.3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene(DMNB)(purity
98%) stock solution at 0.25mg/mL in MTBE. Add 50L stock solution to 1 L

sample prior to extraction to produce surrogate concentration of 12.5 g/mL in
sample and assuming quantitative recovery, 2.5 g/mL in extract.
(d)Instrument performance slution.Using standard solutions (a) combine 5 L

vernolate stock solution. 0.5 mL bromacil stock solution. 30 L prometon stock
solution, and 15 L atrazine stock solution in 100mL volumetric flask, and
AF
dilute to volume with MTBE.
(e)Solvents.-Acetone, methylene chloride, methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE).

Distilled-in-glass quality or equivalent.
(f)Phosphate buffer.-pH7 Mix 29.6 mL 0.1 M HCI and 50mL 0.1 M dipotassium
hydrogen phosphate (K2HPO4).
(g)Sodium sulfate.-Granular, anhydrous. ACS grade. Heat in shallow tray for
> 4h at 450 C to remove interfering organic substances.
(h)Sodium chloride.-Crystals. ACS grade. Heat in shallow tray for >4h at 450
to remove interfering organic substances.
(i) Regent water.-Water reasonably free of contamination that would prevent

determination of any analyte of interest.
(j)Preservative-Mercuric chloride solution. 10mg HgCI2 (ACS grade) mL

reagent water,
303
(k)Sodium thiosulfate.-Na2S2O3. Granular, anhydrous. ACS grade.

D. Preparation of sample Bottles
Add 1 mL preservative, CQ), to glass sample bottle. If residual chlorine is

expected to be present in samples, add 80mg Na2S2O3 C (k), to sample bottle
E. Sample Collection:
before collection.
Collect 1 L grab laboratory samples in glass bottles by conventional sampling
AF
practices. Because bottles contain preservative and Na2S2O3 do not prerinse

bottles with sample before collection. Add sample to bottle containing
preservative, seal sample bottle, and shake vigorously 1 min. Regrigerate
samples at 4C from time of collection until extracted. Protect from light.
Samples are stable for 14 days when stored under these conditions. Extracts,
stored at 4C away from light, are stable for 14 days.
F. Sample Preparation
(a) Automated extraction procedure-add preservative, CQ), to any samples not

previously preserved. Mark water meniscus on side of sample bottle for later
determination of sample volume. Add 50L surrogate stock solution, C (c), to
sample. If mechanical separatory funnel shaker is used, pour entire sample into
separatory funnel. If mechanical tumbler is used, pour entire sample into tumbler
bottle. Adjust sample to pH7 by adding 50 mL phosphate buffer, C(f) check pH
and add H2SO4 or NaOH if necessary. Add 100g NaCI, C (h), to sample, seal,
and shake to dissolve salt. Add 300mL CH2CI2 to sample bottle, seal, and shake
30s to rinse inner walls.
304
Transfer solvent to sample contained in separatory funnel or tumbler bottle, seal,

and shake 10s, venting periodically. Repeat shaking and venting until pressure
release is not observed during venting. Reseal and place sample container in
appropriate mechanical mixing device (separatory funnel shaker or tumbler).
Shake or tumble sample for 1h. After extraction, pour contents of tumbler bottle
into 2 L separatory funnel. Let organic layer separate from water phase for
10min. if emulsion interface between layers is more than on-thrid volume of
solvent layer, complete phase separation mechanically. Collect CH2CI2 extract in
500mL Erlenmeyer flask containing ca 5 g anhydrous Na2SO4. Swiril flask to

dry extract; let flask sit 15 min. determine original sample volume by refilling
sample bottle to mark and transferring water to 1000 mL graduated cylinder.
AF
Record sample volume to nearest 5mL.
(b) Manual extraction method.-Add preservative. (CQ) to samples not previously

preserved. Mark water meniscus on side of sample bottle for later determination
of sample volume. Add 50 L surrogate stock solution. C (c), to sample. Pour
entire sample into 2 L separately funnel. Adjust sample to pH 7 by adding 50mL

phosphate buffer. C(f). Check pH, and add H2SO4 or NaOH. If necessary add
100 g NaCI to sample, Seal And shake to dissolve salt. Add 60mL CH2CI2 to
sample bottle, seal and shake bottle 30s to rinse inner walls.
Transfer solvent to separately funnel and extract sample by vigorously shaking

funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Let organic
layer separate from water phase for 10 min. if emulsion interface between layers
is more than on-third volume of solvent layer, complete phase separation
mechanically. Collect CH2CI2 extract in 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask containing ca
5 g anhydrous Na2SO4. Add second 60mL portion of CH2CI2 to sample bottle
and repeat exraction procedure a second time, combining extracts in Erlenmeyer
flask. Perform third extraction in same manner. Swirl flask to dry extract. Let
flask sit for 15 min. determine original sample volume by refilling sample bottle
305
to the mark and transferring water to 1000mL graduated cylinder. Record

sample volume to nearest 5 mL.
G. Extract Concentration
Asemble K-D concentrator by attaching 25mL concentrator tube to 500mL

evaporation flask. Decant CH2CI2 extract into concentrator. Rinse remaining
Na2SO4 with two 25mL portions of CH2CI2 and decant rinses into concentrator.
Add 1 or 2 clean boiling stones to evaporation flask and attach macro-snyder

column. Prewet column by adding ca 1 mL CH2CI2 to top. Place K-D apparatus
on 65-70 water bath so that concentrator tube is partially immersed in hot water
AF
and the entire lower, rounded surface of flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust
vertical position of apparatus and water temperature as required to complete
concentration in 15-20 min. at proper rate of distillation. Balls of column will
actively chatter, but chambers will not flood. When apparent volume of liquid
reaches 2mL, remove K-D apparatus, let drain and cool 10min.
Remove snyder column; rinse flask and its lower joint with 1-2 mL MTBE
collecting rinse in concentrator tube. Add 5-10 mL MTBE, collecting rinse in
concentrator tube Add 5-10 mL MTBE and fresh boiling stone. Attach micro-
snyder column to concentrator tube and prewet column by adding ca 0.5 mL

MTBE to top. Place micro K-D apparatus on water bath so that concentrator
tube is partially immersed in hot water. Adjust vertical position of apparatus and
water temperature as required to complete concentration in 5-10 min. when
apparent volume of liquid reaches 2mL remove apparatus from bath and let it
drain and cool.
Add 10mL MTBE and boiling stone and reconcentrate to 2mL. When apparent
volume of liquid reaches 2mL. Remove apparatus from bath and let it drain and
cool. Add second 10mL MTBE and boiling stone and reconcentrate to 2mL
306
when apparent volume of liquid reaches 2mL, remove apparatus from bath and
let it drain and cool.
Add third 10mL MTBEand boiling stone and reconcentrate to L Remove micro
K-D apparatus from bath and let it drain and cool. Remove micro-snyder
column; rinse walls of concentrator tube while adjusting volume to 5.0 mL with
MTBE. Add 50 L internal standard stock solution C (b) to sample extract, seal,
and shake to distribute internal standard. Transfer extract to appropriate-size
maximum storage time is recommended.
TFE- fluorocarbon-sealed screw-cap vial. Store at 40C until analysis. A 14-day
AF
Calibration of gas chromatograph with Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector.
Table 1 summarizes retention times observed using this method of analysis of

organic nitrogen and phosphorus pesticides.
Table 1:
Retention times for method 8141A analytes employing 30-m columns3
Compound
RT (min)
DB-5
DB-210
Dichlorvos (DDVP)
7.45
6 .99
Phorate
12.27
16 .57
Chlorpyrifos. Methyl
15.94
20.45
Chlorpyrifos
17.06
22 .22
Monocrotophos
19.08
15 .98
Dimethoate
18.11
17 .21
Malathion
19.83
21 .75
Parathion, methyl
20.15
20.45
307
Parathion, ethyl
21.38
22 .22
Ethion
22.55
27 .12
Phosphamidon
22.77
20 .09
Atrazine
13.98
17 .63
Simazine
13.85
17.41
Calculations:
equation:
Where,
AF
(A) (V1)
C (g /L) = ----------------(Vt) / (Vs)
A = Amount of the Standard injected (ng)

V1 =Volume of the extract injected (L)
Vt =Volume of total extract (L)
Vs =Volume of the water extract (mL).
Reference:
EPA method 8141 A. United States Environmental Protection Agency 8141.

Organophosphorus compounds by gas chromatography capillary column
technique.
Or
BIS method (IS 13428) may also be followed.
308
LABORATORY SAFETY
General Safety Rules
The rules of safety as applied to laboratory operations are the professional,
moral, and legal responsibility of the analyst. The practice of safety requires the
desire on the part of individual analysts to protect themselves and their
AF
associates by following a set of rules.
1. Proper eye protection is required for anyone entering the laboratory.

Specific eye protection should be used according to the work to be
performed.
2. All laboratory personnel shall familiarize themselves with the location and
use of all emergency equipment.
3. No one may work alone in the laboratory. Exceptions are on a case bycase basis or as indicated in the laboratory's safety program. Supervisors
will judge the risk of the work to be performed and provide specific
permission to work alone in the laboratory.
4. Before starting a sample analysis or research project, the procedure must

be reviewed for possible hazards, and the necessary precautions taken to
eliminate or counteract the hazard.
5. Unauthorized analyses or experiments are not to be conducted.

6. All accidents and hazardous conditions must be brought to the
supervisor's attention.
309
Personal Protection
1. Safety glasses must be worn at all times in laboratory areas. Any

exceptions to this rule must be included in the laboratory safety program.
Contact lenses should not be worn in the laboratory. Gases and vapors can
be concentrated under contact lenses and cause permanent eye damage. In
the event of a chemical splash into the eye, it is often nearly impossible to
remove the contact lens to irrigate the eye because of involuntary spasm
of the eyelid. If it is absolutely essential to wear contacts, the supervisor
AF
must be made aware of this and adequate safety precautions must be

taken. Where splashing chemicals or flying particle hazards exist,
appropriate glasses with side shields, goggles, or face shields should be
used. Specialized eye wear must also be used to protect against laser,
ultraviolet, or other intense light sources.
2. Appropriate protective clothing, specifically rubber gloves, should be

worn when handling:
acids or bases or caustic chemicals
silicone-based lubricants
blood
items suspected of being contaminated in some manner
3. Ear plugs/hearing protectors should be worn when:

working in a high noise level area
working with systems that could produce a sudden sonic
shock -using some types of ultrasonic cleaners
using other equipment emitting high frequency noise
310
4. Safety shoes should be worn when moving or lifting heavy items.
5. Loose clothing, neckties, scarves, jewelry, and long hair should be

confined or bound so that they will not become entangled in equipment.
6. Hands should be washed after handling chemicals and specimens, before

eating, and before leaving work at the end of the day.
7. Smoking, eating, and drinking should not be permitted in the laboratory.
lunches.
AF
8. Laboratory refrigerators are not to be used for personal food storage, e.g.,
9. Cosmetics should never be applied in the laboratory.
Housekeeping
Good housekeeping in the laboratory helps prevent accidents. "A PLACE FOR
EVERYTHING AND EVERYTHING IN ITS PLACE", makes for safety and
efficiency.
1. Aisles should be kept free of obstructions (cartons, carts, chairs, etc.).
2. Hoods should be kept clear and clean and should not be used as a common
storage area.
3. Sinks must be kept clean.
4. Chipped or broken glassware should be discarded into marked containers

for disposal.
311
5. Work surfaces should be cleaned after each analysis.
6. All spills must be cleaned up immediately.
7. Broken glass should be removed with a brush and dust pan or with
cardboard. Absorbent cotton, held with tongs, may be used to pick up fine
pieces of broken glass. A towel should never be used to clean up broken

glass.
AF
8. Laboratory services (air, gas, water, etc.) are to be turned off at the service
cock when not in use.
9. Equipment should be returned to its proper place after use.
10.Materials should always be stacked neatly.
11.Toxic and corrosive materials should be rinsed from containers before the
containers are given to the person washing glassware.
12.Good lighting is especially important around work areas, storage areas,

and stairways.
Special Precautions
1. Unlabeled chemicals must be removed and disposed of properly.
2. When performing a taste test, the material being tested should not be
312
swallowed.
3. A pipet bulb should be used instead of mouth suction to pipet chemical or

to start a siphon.
4. All liquid reagents, particularly corrosive ones, should be poured from

their containers with the use of a pouring rod.
5. Mercury spills inust be cleaned up immediately. If the spills run into

inaccessible areas, the mercury should be covered with sulfur to reduce
AF
vaporization.
6. When lifting heavy objects, the feet should be set apart to obtain a firm
footing. One foot should be put alongside the object and one foot behind
it.The back should be kept straight and the chin tucked in so the head and
neck continue the straight back line. The object should be gripped firmly
with the palms of the hands and held close to the body with arms and
elbows tucked into the sides of the body to keep the body weight centered,
then the object is lifted straight with a thrust of the rear foot.
Laboratory Hazards
Laboratories contain a greater variety of hazards than do most workplaces.

Therefore, an analyst must work defensively at all times, considering each
operation for its intrinsic dangers, and building into each experimental setup
methods of control, security, and escape. Serious accidents, affecting health,
eyesight, and life, rarely happen, but they are always due to carelessness and
they are preventable. A convenient common sense question to ask before
performing an analysis is "What would happen if ... ?" Answers to this question
313
require some knowledge of hazards associated with the chemicals and

equipment involved.
Hazards Associated With Use of Chemicals
The hazards associated with chemical use are physical or chemical. Fires,
explosions, and exothermic reactions are the most serious immediate dangers in
a laboratory. Dangers that usually become apparent over somewhat longer
periods are due to contamination by toxic materials, poisoning, and

asphyxiation. The analyst must be alert to possibilities for all these hazards and
AF
avoid them.
Physical Hazards
Physical hazards include flammability; explosions; and means of high pressure
containment, such as compressed gas cylinders.
Flammability
Flammable substances are among the most common causes of serious laboratory
accidents. In discussing flammability, a few definitions are needed.
Flash Point: The lowest temperature at which a liquid gives off vapor in
sufficient concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface .of
the liquid within the test vessel.
Ignition Temperature: The minimum temperature required to initiate or cause

self- sustained combustion independent of the heat source.
Limits of Flammability: A flammable liquid may be above its flash point and
314
yet not ignite in the presence of an adequate energy source. The reason for this is
that each flammable gas and liquid (as a vapor) has two fairly definite limits
defining the range of concentrations in mixtures with air that will propagate
flame and explode.
The lower flammable limit: (lower explosive limit [LEL]) is the minimum
concentration (percent by volume) of the vapor in air below which a flame is not
propagated when an ignition source is present. Below this concentration, the
mixture is too lean to burn. The upper flammable limit upper explosive limit
[DEL]) is the maximum concentration (percent by volume) of the vapor in air
too rich to burn.
AF
above which a flame is not propagated. Above this concentration, the mixture is
Spontaneous Ignition or Combustion: This phenomenon takes place when a

substance reaches its ignition temperature without the application of external
heat. Materials susceptible to spontaneous combustion include oily rags, dust
accumulations, organic materials mixed with strong oxidizing agents(such as

nitric acid, chlorates, permanganates, peroxides, and persulfates), alkali metals
such as sodium and potassium, finely divided pyrophoric metals, and
phosphorics. The basic precautions for safe handling of flammable materials
include the following:
Flammable substances should be handled only in areas free of ignition

sources.
Flammable substances should never be heated by using an open flame,

steam baths, water baths, oil baths, heating mantles, and hot air baths are
the preferred heat sources.
When transferring flammable liquids in metal equipment, static-generated

315
sparks should be avoided by bonding and the use of ground straps.
Ventilation should be provided. This is one of the most effective ways to

prevent the formation of flammable mixtures.
Explosions
Explosions usually result from extremely rapid exothermic reactions of mixtures
of compounds. As heat is evolved, reaction rates increase and often large

volumes of expanding gases are produced in fractions of a second. Many
reactions can take place explosively, but oxidations are among the most common
AF
sources of accidents.
Explosions can also result from reactions initiated by the cleavage of weak
bonds in sensitive compounds. Such explosions can be induced by heat or
mechanical shock.
An especially treacherous source of explosions are peroxides formed by

autoxidation of common solvents. An example is ether in an opened bottle that
has been left in the laboratory for a few months. Ethers should never be left for
long periods in partially filled containers or in the light.
Potentially explosive substances should not be subjected to friction. They should

not be stored in screw cap or ground glass-stoppered containers, and the mixture
should be kept away from stopcocks and stirrer packing glands. Many
compounds containing high proportions of oxidizable or oxidizing groups are
best stored wet.
The use of explosive materials demands special safety measures and handling
techniques that are thoroughly understood and followed. Guidelines for use in
316
any laboratory operation that might involve explosive materials are as follows:
The analyst must wear safety glasses that have a cup-type shield affixed to the
frame; a face shield with a "snap-on" throat protector in place when in a
hazardous, exposed position; gloves when it is necessary to reach behind a
shielded area.
Shields, barricades, or guards must be placed around the hazardous area.
Warning signs should be posted in the hazardous area.
Miscellaneous protective devices should be available as required to prevent
AF
exposure of any part of the body to injury.
Means of Containment
Compressed gases contained in cylinders present a unique hazard because they
have the potential for simultaneous exposure to both mechanical and chemical
hazards. Therefore, they must be handled with care. Compressed gas cylinders
must not be dropped or thrown and must be firmly secured at all times and
properly identified. They should be protected from heat and direct sunlight and
the head should be covered with a valve-protecting cap during storage or when
being transported. Pressure-relief devices to protect equipment attached to
cylinders of flammable, toxic, or otherwise hazardous gases should be vented to
a safe place.
Cylinders should be placed so that the cylinder valve is accessible at all times.
The main cylinder valve should never be left open when the equipment is
unattended or not operating.
317
Chemical Hazards
Many chemicals found in the laboratory are known to be toxic or corrosive or

both. Their toxic effects are classified as acute or chronic hazards. Acutely
hazardous chemicals are capable of producing immediate or slightly delayed
effects, such as burns, inflammations, allergic responses, and damage to the
eyes, lungs, or 'nervous system. The effects of chronic hazards are delayed or
develop only after exposure over long periods of time. Carcinogenic effects are
usually chronic. The major classes of corrosive chemicals are strong acids and
AF
bases, dehydrating agents, and oxidizing agents.
Exposure to chemicals may occur by:
Inhalation:
Poisoning by absorption through the mucous membrane of the mouth, throat,
and lungs is produced by inhalation of toxic vapors, mists, gases, or dusts.

Inhaled gases or vapors may pass rapidly into the capillaries of the lungs and be
carried into the circulatory system. The degree of injury resulting from exposure
to toxic substances depends on the toxicity of the material and its solubility in
tissue fluids, as well as on its concentration and the duration of exposure.

Several chemicals, e.g., mercury and its derivatives, and some of the common
solvents, e.g., benzene, are cumulative or chronic poisons that can produce body
damage through exposure to small concentrations over a long period of time.
Work that involves toxic gases, vapors, and dusts must be carried out in a fume
hood to prevent the escape of such material into the working place. Chemicals of
unknown toxicity should never be smelled.
318
Safety Measures of Handling EC Detector GENERAL
The BCD contains Nickel (a maximum of 15mCi) radioactive material.

Although beta particles at this energy level have little penetrating power - the
surface layer of the skin or a few sheets of paper will stop most of them - they
may be hazardous if the isotope is ingested or inhaled. Radioactive leak tests
capped when the detector is not in use.
must be performed at the required intervals. The inlet and outlet fitting must be
Corrosive chemicals must not be introduced into the detector, and the effluent
AF
from the detector must be vented outside the laboratory environment.
ECD WARNINGS
1. Owners may not open the ECD cell.
2. Owners shall not modify the cell in any manner.
3. Owners shall not use any solvent, including water, to internally clean the
cell.
4. Owners shall not interface with or attempt to defeat the overheat circuitry
that may be supplied with the ECD.
5. Owners shall not transfer the ECD to another person or another location
except as described in the applicable Regulations.
6. Owners must perform a radioactive leak test at least every 6 months.

7. Owners must maintain record as required by your local Agency (the NCR
or in certain states, a state agency).
8. Owners must notify the in case of incidents or failures that might lead to a
hazardous condition.
319
SAFETY
1. For radioactive lead testing, wipe-test of ECD cell is required at intervals

of no longer that 6 months.
2. If a leak detects more 0.005 mCi (microcurie) of removable radioactive
cell or if the cell is damaged in such a way as to indicate that it may no
longer adequate shield the radioactive material inside, you must
immediately suspend operation of your chromatograph until the cell has

been repaired. "Never dismental the ECD cell. You can remove the ECD
cell for repair.
AF
3. Never eat, drink, or smoke when handing ECDs.
4. Always wear safety glasses when working with or near open ECDs.
5. Wear protective cloths such as laboratory jackets, safety glasses, and
gloves, and follow good laboratory practices. Wash hands thoroughly with
a mild non- abrasive cleaner after handling of ECDs.
6. Cap the inlet and outlet fitting when the ECD is not in use.
7. Connect the ECD exhaust vent to fume hood or vent it to the outside.
8. It is mandatory to get the prior permission for import / procure and use of
ECD from Atomic Energy Regulatory Board, Govt. of India, Mumbai.
Very few Make and Model of ECD are approved by AERB for use in our
country.
..
320
Note:
~Flash evaporator may be used in place of The KD (Khuderman Danish)
concentrator.
AF
~Wherever alternate methods are suggested in addition to the existing

methods, they need to be re-validated in the respective food laboratories, so
as to make them adoptable.
321
T
AF
D
R
Food Safety and Standards Authority of India

(Ministry of Health and Family Welfare)
FDA Bhawan, Kotla Road,
New Delhi-110002
www.fssai.gov.in

Pesticide Residue Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pesticide Residue Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pesticide Residue Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LAB.

FOOD SAFETY AND STANDARDS AUTHORITY OF INDIA

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

MANUAL FOR ANALYSIS OF PESTICIDE RESIDUE IN FOODS

Codex Guidelines on Good Practice in Pesticide Residue

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

CODEX GUIDELINES ON GOOD PRACTICE IN

The Codex document ALINORM 76/24 Appendix IV (Report of the ad hoc

three inter-related parts:

Residue analysis consists of a chain of procedures, most of which are known, or

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

work at residue levels. Maintenance of sample integrity and adequate provisions

disposed of both safely and in an environmentally friendly manner taking into

refrigerators should be spark free or explosion proof. Extraction, clean-up and

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

Equipment and Supplies

Chromatographic equipment, balances, spectrophotometers etc. must be serviced

date and retained.

All laboratories require pesticide reference standards of known and acceptably

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

become concentrated owing to solvent evaporation.

Chemical reagents, adsorbents and general laboratory solvents may contain,

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

Contamination of glassware, syringes and gas chromatographic columns can arise

Pesticide reference standards should always be stored at a suitable temperature in

a room separate from the main residue laboratory. Concentrated analytical

if shown to be a source ofcontamination, should not be allowed in the residue

Analytical instrumentation ideally should be housed in a separate room. The

Residues and formulation analyses must have completely separated laboratory

Reception and storage of samples

Every sample received into the laboratory should be accompanied by complete

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

On receipt of a sample it must immediately be assigned a unique sample

no effect on the concentration of residues present.

If samples cannot be analysed immediately but are to be analysed quickly, they

extremely slow. If prolonged storage is unavoidable, the effects of storage should

When samples are to be frozen it is recommended that analytical test portions be

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

authorised by the analyst in charge.

An analytical method is the series of procedures from receipt of a sample to the

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

been established satisfactorily. When validating and using a method of analysis,

Proficiency testing (or other inter-laboratory testing procedures), where

practicable, provides an important means for verifying the general accuracy of

not address analyte stability or homogeneity and extractability of analyst in the

Where uncertainty data are required, this information should incorporate

Whenever, a laboratory undertakes method development and/or method

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

Preference should be given to methods having multi-residue and or multi-matrix

on method performance, analyses of those variants are required. Considerable

When analyses are performed for monitoring or enforcement purposes, it is

PESTICIDE RESIDUES 2012

a series of samples of similar origin, which contain residues of the same